'OMAN'S 


ALETTE   K.  OHATTUC^ 


rx 

J5 


GIFT  OF 
A.   F.   Morrison 


THE  WOMAN'S  MANUAL 


OF 


PARLIAMENTARY  LAW 


WITH    PRACTICAL   ILLUSTRATIONS   ESPECIALLY 
ADAPTED   TO   WOMEN'S   ORGANIZATIONS 


,'      '  o  , BY    '/'    i.   3-0    ••  o  >      * 

HARRIETTE    R.    SHATTUCK 

• 

PRESIDENT  OF  THE  BOSTON  POLITICAL  CLASS 


FO  UR  TH  EDITION 


BOSTON 
LEE     AND     SHEPARD 

10   MILK   STREET 
1894 


COPYRIGHT,  1891,  BY  HARRIETTS  R.  SHATTUCK 


All  Rights  Reserved 


THE  WOMAN'S  MANUAL 

GIFT  Off- 
(2. 3.  ~~ 


PREFACE 


THIS  manual  is  not  intended  to  take  the  place  of 
any  of  the  other  manuals  of  parliamentary  practice 
now  in  use,  but  to  supplement  them  by  filling  a  want 
which  the  author  believes  has  long  existed. 

There  are  at  present  a»  great  many  women,  per- 
fectly well  fitted,  so  far  as  intelligence  and  interest 
go,  to  share  in  the  deliberations  of  any  assembly,  but 
who,  through  lack  of  knowing  the  technique  of  par- 
liamentary law,  are  kept  from  taking  active  part  in 
the  many  meetings  that  they  constantly  attend. 
Eager  as  listeners,  wishing  they  dared  to  speak, 
reproaching  themselves  afterward  for  not  speaking, 
they  need  only  the  confidence  which  comes  from 
"  knowing  how,"  in  order  to  become  active,  vital 
forces.  They  want  to  know  when  to  rise  and  when 
to  sit,  how  to  begin  to  speak  and  how  to  close,  how 
to  frame  a  motion  or  a  remark,  how  to  open  and 
close  a  meeting,  how  to  meet  an  adverse  motion,  — 


#*» 

M94396 


iv  PREFACE 

all  the  minute  details  of  presiding,  of  debating,  of 
making  motions,  of  conducting  meetings. 

Unlike  the  men,  who  almost  from  childhood  have 
practised  these  little  details  till  they  have  become 
second  nature,  the  majority  of  women  spring  full- 
grown  into  the  arena  of  public  debate,  and  must 
offset  the  lack  of  an  early  and  natural  training  by 
the  more  laborious,  but  by  no  means  impracticable, 
effort  of  middle  life  or  even  of  old  age.  The  hon- 
orable exceptions  of  women  who  do  know  how,  as 
well  as  or  better  than  most  men,  only  prove  the 
rule. 

This  book,  therefore,  is  written  for  women ;  for 
use  in  their  clubs,  unions,  societies,  —  any  organiza- 
tions where  it  is  important  to  know  how  to  conduct 
a  formal  meeting.  If  it  is  also  of  any  use  to  the 
learners  among  men,  either  in  their  youth  or  in  their 
maturity,  the  author  will  feel  doubly  repaid. 

In  order  to  explain  the  elementary  forms  so  that 
any  one,  however  inexperienced,  can  understand  and 
apply  them,  I  have  made  the  text  as  simple  and  rudi- 
mentary as  possible.  Illustrations  are  given  of  all  the 
forms,  so  that  the  reader  may  know  "  how  "  as  well 
as  "  why  "  a  certain  thing  is  done.  The  book  is  not 
rudimentary,  however,  in  the  sense  that  anything 


PREFACE  V 

important  is  omitted,  for  it  will  be  found  to  cover  all 
that  is  necessary  for  ordinary  clubs  and  societies. 
Any  one  who  wishes  to  study  further  is  referred  to 
the  various  manuals  of  parliamentary  law  which 
have  been  written  as  guides  for  legislators  and 
advanced  students,  the  most  helpful  of  which  are 
Cushing's  manual,  Warrington's  manual,  and  Crock- 
er's "  Parliamentary  Procedure."  Fish's  "  Guide  to 
the  Conduct  of  Meetings "  (not  Fish's  manual)  is 

also  helpful  to  beginners. 

H.  R.  S. 


CONTENTS 


PART  I 
ORGANIZATION 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

I.  How  TO  ORGANIZE  A  TEMPORARY  MEETING  .  3 

II.  How  TO  FORM  A  PERMANENT  SOCIETY      .    .  12 

III.  THE  ORDER  OF  BUSINESS  AND  THE  QUORUM  .  29 

IV.  RIGHTS  AND  DUTIES  OF  MEMBERS      ....  38 

PART   II 

MOTIONS 

V.    THE    MAKING,    STATING,   PUTTING,    AND  SEC- 
ONDING OF  MOTIONS 47 

VI.    THE    WITHDRAWAL    AND  DIVISION    OF    MO- 
TIONS  55 

VII.    DEBATE 59 

VIII.    THE  PREVIOUS   QUESTION,    OR   THE  CLOSING 

OF  DEBATE 75 

IX.    VOTING 88 

X.    RECONSIDERATION  OF  VOTES 99 

vii 


vill  CONTENTS 

PART    III 
AMENDMENT 

CHARTER  PAGE 

XI.    NATURE  AND  EFFECT  OF  AMENDMENT  ...    113 
XII.    WAYS  TO  AMEND  A  PROPOSITION      ....    127 

XIII.  EXCEPTIONS  REGARDING  AMENDMENT  .    .    .     142 

PART    IV 
THE   PRECEDENCE   OF   MOTIONS 

XIV.  THE  RANK  OF  DEPENDENT  MOTIONS    ...     153 
XV.    THE    MOTIONS    TO    ADJOURN    AND  TO  LAY 

UPON  THE  TABLE .    .  162 

XVI.    THE  MOTIONS  TO  POSTPONE 171 

XVII.    THE  MOTION  TO  COMMIT      .......  177 

XVIII.    THE  COMMITTEE  AND  ITS  REPORT   ....  185 

PART   V 
QUESTIONS   OF   PRIVILEGE  AND   ORDER 

XIX.    QUESTIONS  OF  PRIVILEGE 201 

XX.    QUESTIONS  OF  ORDER .    208 

CONCLUSION 223 

APPENDIX.  —  MODEL  OF  A  CONSTITUTION  AND  BY-LAWS    229 
INDEX 237 


INTRODUCTION 


IN  a  democratic  community,  where  all  the  people 
are  responsible  for  good  government,  some  knowl- 
edge of  the  proper  conduct  of  public  meetings  is 
especially  essential.  It  is  not  necessary,  of  course, 
for  every  one  to  become  an  expert  parliamentarian, 
but  certain  fundamentals  of  parliamentary  procedure 
should  be  familiar  to  every  one  who  is  liable  to  take 
part  in  a  public  meeting.  It  is  particularly  impor- 
tant that  women,  who  are  now  entering  public  life  in 
large  numbers,  shall,  in  order  to  command  respect, 
conduct  their  meetings  with  a  certain  regard  for 
forms. 

Parliamentary  law  maybe  defined  as  those  usages 
of  legislative  and  deliberative  bodies  which,  by  long 
practice  and  experience,  have  become  generally 
approved.  Parliamentary  law  is  not  fixed  and  arbi- 
trary, but,  like  the  English  common  law,  is  in  con- 
tinual process  of  development,  being  changed  and 


X  INTRODUCTION 

enlarged  from  time  to  time  by  such  new  usages  as 
gain  general  acceptance ;  and  no  one  authority  is 
absolute. 

As,  in  the  common  law,  certain  principles,  from 
long  custom,  have  become  firmly  fixed,  while  certain 
others  are  in  process,  so  in  parliamentary  law,  cer- 
tain principles  (chiefly  fundamental)  have  become 
established,  while  many  others  are  not  yet  settled. 
A  new  usage  or  interpretation  may  arise  at  any 
time,  and,  if  it  is  generally  recognized  as  good,  it 
takes  its  place  as  a  part  of  the  body  of  the  law. 

Besides  the  general  body  of  parliamentary  law, 
there  are,  for  use  in  the  conduct  of  meetings,  special 
rules  which  may  be  adopted  by  any  society.  As  the 
written  law,  or  statutes,  of  a  State  govern  that  State 
in  preference  to  the  common  law,  wherever  they 
conflict,  so  the  special  rule  of  any  assembly  governs 
that  assembly  instead  of  the  general  parliamentary 
law. 

Care  should  be  taken,  therefore,  not  to  confound 
parliamentary  usages  with  special  rules,  which  (be- 
cause they  have  not  been  generally  adopted)  are 
not  yet  embodied  in  parliamentary  law.  Every 
deliberative  body,  from  a  small  club  to  the  Congress 
of  the  United  States,  may  make  its  own  rules  of 


INTRODUCTION  XI 

procedure,  and  these  are  then  binding  upon  itself ; 
but  such  special  rules  are  not  authority  for  any  other 
body.  When  any  such  special  rule,  having  received 
the  approval  of  many  other  assemblies  and  the  sanc- 
tion of  time,  becomes  generally  adopted,  it  is  a  part 
of  parliamentary  law. 

When  there  is  a  special  rule  on  any  particular 
subject,  this  rule  supersedes  (for  the  assembly  which 
has  adopted  it)  the  general  usage  on  that  subject. 
When  there  is  no  such  rule,  general  usage  governs ; 
and  the  question,  What  is  usage  ?  is  to  be  answered 
by  deciding  what  is  best,  for  the  kind  of  assembly 
in  question,  in  the  light  of  the  best  precedents  and 
authorities. 

An  illustration  of  the  distinction  between  a  spe- 
cial rule  and  a  parliamentary  usage  may  be  helpful. 
In  the  United  States  Senate,  there  is  a  special  rule 
that  an  appeal  from  the  decision  of  the  chair  upon 
a  question  of  order,  may  be  laid  upon  the  table. 
The  general  parliamentary  usage  is  that  an  appeal 
cannot  be  tabled  without  at  the  same  time  tabling 
the  whole  subject  to  which  the  appeal  and  the  ques- 
tion of  order  relate.  The  latter,  and  not  the  former, 
practice  is  parliamentary,  notwithstanding  the  fact 
that  so  high  an  authority  as  the  United  States  Senate 
has  a  special  rule  to  the  contrary. 


xil  INTRODUCTION 

Justice  and  Equality  are  the  principles  on  which 
parliamentary  law  is  founded  ;  upon  these,  the  con- 
duct of  all  meetings  is  based,  and  only  by  special 
rule  can  any  method  be  practised  which  contradicts 
them. 

The  object  of  parliamentary  law  is  the  fair, 
orderly,  and  speedy  transaction  of  business,  or,  as 
Jefferson  says,  "  accuracy  in  business,  economy  of 
time,  order,  uniformity,  and  impartiality."  The  will 
of  the  majority  is  to  be  carried  out,  with  due  regard 
for  the  rights  of  the  minority  —  the  minority  being 
protected  from  the  arbitrary  power  of  the  majority. 
Every  assembly  should  be  governed  in  the  demo- 
cratic spirit,  and  any  practice  which  allows  any 
special  privilege  to  one  member  over  any  other,  or 
which  limits  in  any  way  the  right  of  full  and  fair 
consideration,  should  be  discountenanced. 

In  deciding  between  authorities,  these  funda- 
mental principles,  justice  and  equality,  are  to  be 
borne  in  mind,  and  no  usage  or  rule  of  any  body, 
however  eminent,  which  conflicts  therewith,  is  com- 
petent authority.  The  English  House  of  Commons 
and  the  United  States  Congress  have  their  own 
special  rules  (the  United  States  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives has  "  tied  itself  up  with  rules,"  War- 


INTRODUCTION  xiu 

rington  says  in  his  manual),  but  these  rules  are  not 
often  suitable  for  ordinary  assemblies  or  societies. 

It  is  important  to  bear  in  mind,  as  Warrington 
also  says,  "  that  it  is  possible  that  some  deliberative 
bodies  have  adopted  rules  incompatible  with  sound 
parliamentary  principles,'5  and  Mr.  Crocker,  the 
latest  authority,  confirms  this  in  the  following  words  : 
"  In  the  heterogeneous  mass  of  rulings,  none  are 
entitled  to  be  considered  a  part  of  a  general  system 
of  parliamentary  or  assembly  practice,  except  those 
founded  on  reason  and  justice." 

It  follows  that  the  spirit  of  justice  and  equality, 
tempered  by  individual  judgment  and  common- 
sense,  is  of  more  importance  in  a  parliamentarian 
than  knowledge  of  methods.  The  technique  is 
necessary,  but  is  secondary  to  the  spirit.  One  can 
know  so  much  of  parliamentary  forms  as  to  prac- 
tically deny  parliamentary  principles.  A  knowl- 
edge of  the  usual  forms  necessary  for  conducting  a 
simple  meeting  is,  however,  essential,  in  order  that 
inexperienced  persons  may  not  be  outwitted  by 
unscrupulous  ones,  and  that  all  may  have  an  equal 
opportunity  to  express  their  convictions. 


PART    I 

OR  GANIZA  TION 


4  ORGA  NIZA  TION 

recognized  chairman ;  they  all  talk  whenever  they 
please,  and  jto'  6nfe  another;  they  do  not  address 
the  chair,  -make' -motions,  or  take  votes;  one  mem- 
ber, S'termtfirg  the '.tide-  occasionally,  will  say  "Well, 
Uieri, '!' suppose;  t'lla'-t •  «is  settled  ;  "  or,  "  Mrs.  B.,  will 
you  attend  to  that  ? "  —  and  so  the  disorderly  ses- 
sion goes  on.  Such  a  meeting  may  accomplish  its 
object,  but  how  much  better  than  this  chaotic  fashion 
is  the  method  of  those  other  societies  of  women  that 
carry  on  their  meetings  "  decently  and  in  order," 
and  who,  at  the  same  time,  learn  how  to  conduct 
those  larger  assemblies  into  which  they  are  now 
rapidly  entering  ! 

2.  The  Three  Kinds  of  Organization.  There 
are  three  sorts  of  organizations  that  need  to  be 
considered :  the  temporary  meeting,  for  a  special 
purpose ;  the  committee  meeting,  appointed  by  a 
superior  body  to  decide  or  perfect  matters  for  that 
body  ;  and  the  permanent  organization,  formed  for 
a  definite  object.  The  difference  between  these 
three  is  that  the  first  and  second  are  temporary,  and 
the  third  is  permanent ;  also,  that  the  first  and  third 
are  independent,  while  the  committee  is  a  dependent 
body. 

The   only  essential   difference   in  organizing  the 


HO W   TO   ORGANIZE  A    MEETING         5 

three  is,  that  in  the  committee  meeting  a  secretary, 
although  useful,  is  not  absolutely  necessary,  the 
chairman  having  authority  to  act  in  that  capacity. 
The  permanent  organization  is  subject  to  the  same 
forms  as  the  other  two,  and,  in  addition,  must  have 
permanent  officers,  duly  elected,  a  plan  of  work  in 
the  form  of  a  constitution  and  by-laws,  a  regular 
time  and  place  of  meeting,  and  a  stated  purpose. 

3.  The   Call.     A   meeting  is  called  by  any  per- 
son  or  persons   interested,   by   means  of  verbal  or 
written  invitations,  or  by  a  public  call  in  the  news- 
papers. 

Let  us  suppose  that  Mrs.  Allen,  Mrs.  Burns,  and 
Miss  Sawyer  have  caused  a  notice  to  be  printed  in 
the  Mendon  Telegraph,  over  their  signatures,  as  fol- 
lows :  — 

All  women  who  are  interested  in  helping  the  sufferers  by  the 
great  flood  in  Johnstown,  are  invited  to  meet  at  the  house  of 
Mrs.  Alice  M.  Rice,  174  Blank  Street,  on  Tuesday,  October  14, 
at  2.30  P  M.,  to  consult  as  to  the  best  means  of  accomplishing 

this  object. 

(Signed)  LUCY  B.  ALLEN. 

DEBORAH  BURNS. 
IDA  F.  SAWYER. 

4.  Calling  to  Order.     The  day  has  arrived,  and 
nineteen  ladies  are  present.    Mrs.  Rice  has  arranged 


6  ORGA  NIZA  TION 

the  chairs  in  lines  across  the  room,  as  they  would  be 
in  a  hall,  and,  facing  them,  a  small  table  and  chair 
for  the  presiding  officer.  They  wait  a  while  for  the 
tardy  ones,  and  then  Mrs.  Allen,  whose  name  stands 
first  on  the  call,  rises  in  the  place  where  she  happens 
to  be,  if  necessary  she  raps  to  secure  attention,  and 
says  :  "  Friends,  the  time  to  which  our  meeting  was 
called  has  more  than  arrived.  Will  you  please  come 
to  order  and  nominate  some  one  as  chairman  of  the 
meeting  ?  "  She  remains  standing,  and  waits  for 
nominations. 

If  Mrs.  Allen  is  absent,  or  does  not  wish  to  call 
to  order,  any  one  else  may  do  it,  preference  being 
given  to  those  who  signed  the  call.  If  the  meeting 
has  been  called  by  private  invitations,  any  one  pres- 
ent may  call  to  order.  The  "lady  of  the  house"  has 
no  special  privileges,  and,  indeed,  it  is  better  for  her 
not  to  call  to  order,  or  to  preside,  since  she  is  usu- 
ally occupied  with  her  duties  as  hostess. 

5.  Election  of  Chairman.  Miss  Lovell,  rising 
and  looking  at  Mrs.  Allen,  says  :  "  I  nominate  Mrs. 
Burns  as  chairman."  She  does  not  address  Mrs. 
Allen  as  "  Mrs.  Chairman,"  because  she  is  not  regu- 
larly a  chairman,  but  only  a  self-constituted  one. 
Miss  Lovell  sits,  and  Mrs.  Sanders  rises  and  says : 


HOW   TO   ORGANIZE   A    MEETING         7 

"  I  second  the  nomination  "  [sits].  Mrs.  Allen  then 
says  :  "  Mrs.  Burns  is  nominated  as  our  chairman, 
and  the  nomination  is  seconded.  Are  there  any 
other  nominations  ?  [she  waits.']  Or  any  remarks  ? 
[waits.']  If  not,  those  in  favor  of  Mrs.  Burns  serving 
us  as  chairman  will  say  '  Aye.'  [All  those  present 
who  are  in  favor  then  respond  *  Aye.J]  Those  op- 
posed, '  No.'  [Those  opposed,  respond  '  No.'}  It  is  a 
vote,  and  Mrs.  Burns  is  elected  chairman  of  this 
meeting  "  [sits]. 

In  this  illustration,  it  is  supposed  that  Mrs.  Allen 
believes  that  the  majority  have  answered  "  Aye."  If, 
on  the  contrary,  it  seems  to  Mrs.  Allen  that  there 
are  more  "  Noes  "  than  "  Ayes,"  she  says  :  "  It  is  not 
a  vote,  and  another  nomination  is  in  order."  Some 
one  will  then  nominate  another  person  in  the  same 
way. 

6.  More  than  One  Nominee.  It  is  always 
well,  before  putting  a  name  to  vote,  to  ask,  "  Are 
there  any  other  nominations  ?  "  thus  saving  the 
meeting  from  hasty  action,  or  from  having  a  chair- 
man forced  upon  it  by  "  cut  and  dried  "  proceed- 
ings. In  the  illustration,  if  some  one  had  desired 
another  than  Mrs.  Burns  for  chairman,  that  person 
would  rise  and  say,  "  I  nominate  Mrs.  Robbins  ; " 


8  ORGANIZA  TION 

and  still  another  could  say,  "  I  nominate  Miss 
Sawyer,"  and  so  on,  Mrs.  Allen  meanwhile  wait- 
ing till  all  had  nominated  who  wished.  Then  she 
would  put  the  names  to  vote,  one  by  one,  beginning 
with  Mrs.  Burns  as  the  one  first  mentioned,  and  if 
she  were  defeated,  going  on  with  the  other  names,  in 
the  order  nominated,  till  one  of  them  was  elected. 
The  merits  of  the  candidates  may  be  discussed 
until  the  voting  begins,  though  this  is  rarely  done. 
If  Mrs.  Allen  is  herself  nominated,  she  puts  the 
question  upon  her  own  name  as  if  it  were  that  of 
some  one  else.  She  is,  for  the  time  being,  not  "  Mrs. 
Allen,"  but  the  agent  of  the  meeting  for  securing  a 
chairman,  and  so  she  receives  and  presents  her  own 
name,  impersonally,  with  the  rest. 

7.  Seconding  the  Nomination.     It  is  well  for 
nominations   to    be    seconded,    as    this    shows    that 
more  than   one   person  is  in  favor  of  the  nominee. 
But  the  seconding  is  not  imperative,  and  the  name 
may  be  put  to  vote  without  a  second,  if  the  acting 
chairman  chooses. 

8.  Election    of  Secretary,   etc.     Mrs.  Burns, 
having   been    elected    chairman,   rises,  goes   to   the 
table  facing  the  audience,  stands  behind  it,  raps  if 
necessary,  and  says :  "  The  first  business  is  the  elec- 


HOW   TO   ORGANIZE  A   MEETING         9 

lion  of  a  secretary.  Will  you  please  nominate  ?  " 
She  remains  standing,  and  waits.  Mrs.  Robbins 
rises  and  says,  "  Mrs.  Chairman  "  \this  is  called 
"addressing  the  chair  "].  The  chair  responds,  "  Mrs. 
Robbins  "  \this  is  called  "  recognition"  and  entitles  the 
one  recognized  to  the  floor\.  Mrs.  Robbins  then  "  has 
the  floor,"  and  proceeds  to  say,  "  I  nominate  Miss 
Lovell  for  secretary."  She  sits.  Mrs.  Preston 
rises  and  says,  "  I  second  the  nomination,  Mrs. 
Chairman."1  The  chair  waits,  or  asks  for  further 
nominations,  and  then  proceeds  in  the  way  already 
given  for  the  election  of  chairman.2  Miss  Lovell, 
being  elected,  takes  her  seat  at  the  table  beside  the 
chairman,  is  provided  with  writing  materials,  and 
proceeds  to  write  down,  correctly  and  exactly,  the 
proceedings  which  have  already  taken  place  and  all 
that  follow.  She  need  not  record  what  is  said,  but 
makes  a  full  record  of  what  is  done,  or  decided  by 
vote.  She  should  make  no  personal  comments. 

The  chairman  then  states  the  object  for  which  the 
ladies  were  called  together,  making  an  address  of 

1  The  title  "  Madam  "  (chairman  or  president)  may  be  used  instead  of 
"  Mrs.,"  but  it  is  rather  fastidious  to  insist  upon  it.     "  Mrs."  means  simply 
"  Mistress,"  and  applies  to  all  women,  whether  they  are  "  Mrs. "or  "  Miss." 

2  When  the  regular  chairman  or  secretary  of  a  permanent  organization  is 
absent,  a  temporary  officer  is  ehcted  in  this  same  way. 


10  ORGANIZATION 

any  reasonable  length,  or  saying  briefly  something 
like  this :  "  Our  meeting  is  now  ready  to  consider 
the  matter  for  which  we  have  been  called  together. 
As  you  know,  our  object  is  to  consider  in  what  way 
(if  in  any  way)  we  women  of  Mendon  can  help  the 
sufferers  by  the  terrible  flood  in  Johnstown.  Any 
suggestions  or  remarks  are  now  in  order,  and  the 
chair  hopes  that  all  present  will  freely  express  their 
opinions  so  that  we  may  arrive  at  some  action  as 
speedily  as  possible."  She  then  sits,  rising  again 
whenever  any  person  "  addresses  the  chair,"  and 
sitting  during  remarks.  She  also  rises  to  state  and 
to  put  motions,  to  state  facts,  or  whenever  it  is 
necessary  for  the  order  and  dignity  of  the  meeting. 
The  temporary  meeting  is  now  "  organized "  and 
ready  for  work. 

9.  The  Committee  Meeting.  A  committee 
meeting  is  organized  in  the  same  way,  except  that  a 
secretary  may  be  omitted.  If  the  body  by  which 
the  committee  is  appointed  has  definitely  elected  a 
certain  person  as  its  chairman,  that  one  is  the  chair- 
man ;  otherwise,  a  chairman  is  elected  by  the  com- 
mittee at  its  first  meeting.  The  mere  fact  of  a 
person  having  been  appointed  first,  or  nominated 
first,  on  a  committee,  does  not  constitute  her  its 


HOW   TO   ORGANIZE  A    MEETING       II 

chairman,  except  for  the  purpose  of  summoning  the 
others  to  the  first  committee  meeting.  The  rules 
for  proceedings  in  committees  are  considered  in 
chapter  eighteen. 

SUMMARY 

A  temporary  meeting  is  organized  by  the  choice 
of  a  chairman  and  a  secretary ;  a  committee  meeting 
by  the  choice  of  a  chairman ;  and  a  permanent 
society  by  the  election  of  permanent  officers  and  by 
the  adoption  of  a  constitution  and  by-laws. 

Any  person  present  may  call  a  temporary  meeting 
to  order,  preference  being  given  to  those  who  issued 
the  call  for  it. 

Temporary  officers  are  elected  by  nomination 
from  the  floor,  the  chair  giving  opportunity  for  as 
many  nominees  as  are  desired. 

Names  given  in  nomination  are  voted  upon  in 
the  order  nominated.  Nominations  may  well  be 
seconded. 

The  temporary  chairman,  when  elected,  takes  her 
place,  and  receives  and  puts  to  vote  nominations  for 
secretary. 

The  secretary  records  what  is  done,  but  need  not 
record  what  is  said.  She  makes  no  comments. 


1 2  ORGA  NIZA  TION 

A  committee  is  organized  in  the  same  manner  as 
a  temporary  meeting,  electing  its  chairman  unless 
one  has  been  specified  when  it  was  appointed.  Its 
chairman  may  act  as  secretary  also.  - 


CHAPTER   II 
HOW   TO    FORM    A    PERMANENT   SOCIETY 

FORMING  A  CLUB  ;  CONSTITUTION  AND  BY-LAWS  ; 
THE  OFFICERS;  ROTATION  IN  OFFICE;  ELECTION 
OF  OFFICERS  ;  OTHER  METHODS  OF  ELECTING; 
"  No  CHOICE  ;  "  MAJORITY  vs.  PLURALITY  ;  CON- 
CLUSION OF  ORGANIZATION. 

10.  Forming  a  Club.  The  first  meeting  of  any 
proposed  permanent  society  is  organized  in  the 
same  way  as  a  temporary  meeting.  It  is  then 
necessary  to  adopt  a  plan  of  organization,  in  the 
form  of  a  constitution,  or  by-laws,  or  both;  and  to 
elect  permanent  officers. 

Illustration  :  Let  us  suppose  that  the  same 
women  of  Mendon,  having  enjoyed  meeting  to- 
gether while  helping  the  Johnstown  sufferers,  decide 
that  it  will  be  profitable  to  form  a  permanent  society 


HO IV   TO  FORM  A    SOCIETY  13 

or  club,  for  social,  literary,  or  philanthropic  purposes. 
They  call  their  friends  together  and  organize  their 
temporary  meeting  as  already  described. 

Mrs.  Burns  and  Miss  Lovell  having  been  elected 
temporary  chairman  and  secretary,  and  the  chairman 
having  stated  the  object  of  the  meeting,  informal 
remarks  are  made  by  those  present,  favoring  or  dis- 
approving the  project.  Mrs.  Allen  then  rises,  "  ad- 
dresses the  chair,"  is  "  recognized,"  and  says  :  "  I 
move  that  a  woman's  club  be  formed,  and  that  we 
take  the  necessary  action  at  this  meeting."  The 
chair  repeats  the  motion,  it  is  regularly  debated,  and 
when  all  have  spoken  who  wish,  the  motion  is  "  put 
to  vote," 1  and  if  the  majority  vote  in  favor,  the 
motion  is  carried  and  the  chair  says,  "  The  motion 
to  form  a  club  is  decided  in  the  affirmative."  Tech- 
nically speaking,  the  ladies  have  voted  to  turn  the 
present  temporary  meeting  into  a  permanent  organi- 
zation, it  being  understood  that  all  present,  after 
fulfilling  the  requirements  to  be  agreed  upon,  are 
entitled  to  membership  in  the  club. 

The  chair,  having  declared  the  result  of  the  vote, 
asks  :  "  What  further  action  will  the  club  take 
toward  perfecting  its  organization  ?  "  Mrs.  Sanders, 

1  See  chapter  V.  for  forms  for  making  and  putting  motions. 


1 4  ORGA  NIZA  TION 

having  properly  obtained  the  floor,  moves  "  that  a 
committee  of  three  be  formed  to  frame  a  constitu- 
tion and  by-laws."  This  motion  is  stated,  discussed, 
and  put  to  vote  ;  if  carried,  the  chair  asks,  "  In  what 
way  shall  that  committee  be  appointed,  by  nomina- 
tions or  by  the  chair  ?  "  Mrs.  Rice  moves  "  that  it  be 
appointed  by  the  chair,"  1  or,  "  that  it  be  nominated 
from  the  floor."  If  the  former  motion  is  made,  it  is 
put  to  vote,  and,  if  carried,  the  chair  names  three 
persons  present,  saying,  "The  chair  will  appoint  as 
this  committee,  Mrs.  Robbins,  Mrs.  Rice  and  Miss 
Lovell."  If  the  other  motion  is  made,  that  is  put  to 
vote  instead,  and,  if  carried,  the  chair  asks  for  and 
receives  nominations  for  the  members  of  the  com- 
mittee and  puts  them  to  vote,  one  by  one,  as  already 
explained  in  the  election  of  chairman. 

In  the  same  way,  a  motion  is  made  and  put  "  that 
a  committee  be  formed  to  prepare  a  list  of  perma- 
nent officers  for  the  club,"  or,  "  that  permanent 
officers  for  the  club  be  now  elected  by  nomination." 

1  The  custom  of  calling  out  "  By  the  chair"  or  "  From  the  floor"  is  incor- 
rect, though  by  general  consent  it  may  be  allowed.  A  chairman  may  dis- 
regard such  irregular  calls,  and  insist  upon  a  motion  regularly  made.  In  case 
she  allows  them,  she  should  not  assume  such  calls  to  be  the  sense  of  the 
meeting  and  act  upon  them  without  a  vote,  but  should  consider  them  as  a 
motion,  and  put  such  motion  regularly  to  vote.  It  is  better  to  insist  upon 
a  proper  motion. 


CONSTITUTION  AND   BY-LAWS          15 

If  a  committee  is  appointed,  that  committee  may 
retire  at  once,  deliberate,  and  report  a  list  of  officers 
(other  business  being  done  in  the  mean  time),  or  it 
may  report  at  a  subsequent  meeting ;  it  may  also  be 
instructed  to  prepare  written  or  printed  copies  of  its 
report,  to  be  used  as  ballots. 

The  committee  on  the  constitution  and  by-laws 
necessarily  reports  at  a  later  meeting. 

This  is  all  the  business  absolutely  necessary  to  be 
done  at  this  initial  meeting.  Having  thus  organized 
temporarily,  and  taken  steps  toward  permanent 
organization,  the  first  meeting  decides  upon  the 
time  and  place  for  its  next  session  and  adjourns. 

ii.  Constitution  and  By-Laws.  The  com- 
mittee appointed  at  the  first  meeting  "  to  frame  a 
constitution  and  by-laws  "  meets  and  prepares  its 
report  in  writing.  At  the  next  meeting  of  the  club, 
the  first  business,  after  the  approval  of  the  records, 
is  the  report  of  this  committee.  The  report  is 
called  for  by  the  presiding  officer,  and  read  by  the 
chairman  of  the  committee.  The  whole  is  read 
first,  in  order  to  give  the  club  a  general  idea  of 
its  scope.  Then  the  constitution  is  taken  up  and 
read  section  by  section,  each  one  being  discussed, 
amended  if  necessary,  and  voted  upon  separately. 


1 6  ORGA  NIZA  TION 

After   each    section   is   considered    sufficiently,  the 
chair  will  say,  "  Those  in  favor  of  this  section  will  say 

*  Aye ; '  those  opposed  '  No.'     It  is  a  vote,  and  the 
section  is  adopted."     When  all  have  been  adopted, 
she  will  say,  "  The  question  now  is  upon  the  adop- 
tion of  the  constitution  as  a  whole.     Those  in  favor 

#  *  #  "  l     The  same  is  done  with  the  by-laws.     See 
section  //j. 

A  model  is  given  in  the  Appendix  which  will  serve 
as  a  basis  in  preparing  the  plan  of  organization  for 
any  society.  It  should  include  the  name  and  object 
of  the  society,  the  number  and  the  duties  of  its 
officers  and  standing  committees,  its  conditions  of 
membership,  time  of  meeting,  authority  in  parlia- 
mentary law,  and  any  other  matters  essential  to  an 
understanding  of  its  purpose  and  methods. 

12.  The  Officers.  The  essential  officers  are  a 
president,  a  vice-president,  and  a  recording  secretary. 
If  there  are  to  be  fees,  a  treasurer  and  an  auditor  are 
added ;  there  may  also  be  a  corresponding  and  an 
assistant  secretary.  If  the  business  is  such  that  it  can- 
not be  done  in  business  sessions  consisting  of  the  mem- 
bers, directors  are  elected  to  do  the  business  for  them. 

1  Where  these  *  *  *  are  used,  it  is  supposed  that  the  reader  will  supply 
the  forms  necessary  to  complete  the  motion. 


ELECTION  OF  OFFICERS  I/ 

In  societies,  or  clubs  whose  object  is  chiefly  mutual 
improvement  rather  than  systematic  outside  work, 
this  object  is  best  attained  by  having  all  the  im- 
portant business  presented,  discussed,  and  finally 
decided  in  open  business  meetings  of  the  whole 
society,  leaving  necessary  details  to  be  carried  out 
afterward  by  special  or  standing  committees,  when 
ordered  so  to  do  by  the  whole  body.  Every  mem- 
ber thus  has  a  voice  in  the  management  of  the 
society  of  which  she  is  a  part,  the  feeling  of  unity 
and  esprit  de  corps  becomes  strengthened,  and  the 
spirit  of  justice  and  equality  subserved. 

13.  Rotation  in  Office.  In  societies  for  mutual 
Improvement,  it  is  well  to  provide  in  the  by-laws  for 
iotation  in  office,  that  is,  to  prescribe  the  term  of 
office  beyond  which  certain  officers  may  not  be  re- 
elected.  The  club  will  thus  avoid  getting  into  a  rut, 
ind  its  members  will  mutually  share  the  opportunity 
of  learning  how  to  conduct  the  meeting.  This  is  not 
equally  true  of  societies  exclusively  for  outside  work, 
because,  in  such  organizations,  there  may  not  be 
more  than  one  or  two  who  are  sufficiently  interested 
to  do  active  work,  the  rest  simply  belonging  in  order 
to  help  by  their  fees  and  by  the  influence  of  their 
names.  In  women's  clubs  especially,  where  the 


1 8  ORGA  NIZA  TION 

chief  motive  is  to  learn  and  to  grow,  rotation  in 
office  is  one  of  the  best  helps,  because,  without  it, 
there  is  danger  that  one  or  two  efficient  women  will 
come  to  believe  that  they  alone  know  what  is  best,  • 
and  can  alone  manage  the  club.  This  may  be  true, 
but  it  is  death  to  the  growth  of  the  rest,  who,  given 
the  chance,  will  develop  the  talent  that  is  in  them, 
bring  in  new  ideas  and  methods,  and,  in  short,  help 
to  secure  the  attainment  of  that  "  mutual  improve> 
ment "  for  which  the  club  is  seeking.  Two,  three, 
or  at  most  four  years,  are  long  enough  for  any  one 
woman  to  act  as  president,  vice-president,  auditor, 
director,  or  member  of  any  standing  committee. 
The  secretaries,  being  distinctively  working  officers, 
rather  than  executive  ones,  may  be  allowed  a  longer 
or  even  an  indefinite  term,  and  the  treasurer,  being 
such  an  important  office,  so  hard  to  fill,  and  at  the 
same  time  one  that  will  not  be  sought  for  on  account 
of  the  honors  attendant  upon  it,  may  well  be  exempt 
from  the  rule.  It  may  be  said  in  general,  that  such 
offices  of  a  given  society  as  are  distinctively  honor- 
ary and  self-educative,  should  be  subjected  rigidly  to 
the  rotation  rule.  Justice  and  equality  demand  that 
as  many  members  as  possible  shall  have  a  chance 
to  show  and  to  use  the  talent  they  possess. 


ELECTION  OF  OFFICERS  19 

14.  Election  of  Officers.  The  committee  ap- 
pointed at  the  first  meeting  to  nominate  a  list  of 
officers,  meets  and  prepares  its  report  in  writing. 

At  some  subsequent  meeting  (the  constitution  and 
by-laws  having  been  adopted)  the  presiding  officer 
calls  for  the  report  of  the  nominating  committee, 
and  its  chairman  rises  and  says  :  "  Mrs.  Chairman, 
your  nominating  committee  reports  as  follows :  For 
President,  Mrs.  Alice  Mayo  Rice  ;  for  Vice-president, 
Miss  Ida  F.  Sawyer;  for  Recording  Secretary,  Miss 
Ruth  H.  Lovell ;  for  Corresponding  Secretary,  Mrs. 
Mary  L.  P.  Robbins ;  for  Treasurer,  Mrs.  Deborah 
Burns;  for  Auditor,  Mrs.  Frances  Hall  Allen"  —  and 
so  on  to  whatever  other  elective  officers  are  made 
necessary  by  the  constitution.  She  then  hands  the 
list  to  the  chairman  and  takes  her  seat. 

It  will  have  been  provided  in  the  by-laws,  whether 
election  shall  be  at  the  same,  or  at  a  subsequent, 
meeting  to  the  one  at  which  the  nominating  com- 
mittee reports. 

If  it  is  to  be  at  a  subsequent  meeting,  the  chair, 
receiving  the  committee's  report,  says  :  "  You  have, 
heard  the  report  of  your  committee.  The  election 

of  officers  will  take  place  next  ,  and  these 

names  are  before  you  as  candidates."  Then  is  the 


20  ORGA  N1ZA  TION 

time  to  present  another  list,  if  members  are  dissat- 
isfied, it  being  understood  that  the  regular  nominees 
do  not  exclude  other  nominees,  though  they  take 
precedence  of  others. 

If  election  is  to  be  at  once,  the  chair  says  :  "  You 
hear  the  report  of  your  committee.  What  is  your 
pleasure  ?  "  It  is  not  necessary  to  move  to  receive 
or  adopt  the  report.1  Other  nominations  are  then 
in  order.  See  the  next  section. 

When  the  time  for  the  election  comes,  copies  of  the 
report  are  distributed  (if  it  has  been  so  voted)  to  be 
used  as  ballots  ;  or,  blank  slips  of  paper,  upon  which 
to  write  out  their  choice,  will  do  as  well,  if  there  is 
plenty  of  time.  In  either  case,  the  members  will 
now  consider  this  report  as  before  them  for  action. 
The  chairman  having  said,  "  What  is  your  pleas- 
ure ?  "  Mrs.  Preston  obtains  the  floor,  and  moves 
"that  a  committee  of  two  be  appointed  by  the  chair 
to  receive,  sort,  and  count  the  votes."  This  is  put 
to  vote  and  carried,  and  the  chair  appoints  Miss 
Anna  Long  and  Miss  Nellie  Faxon  as  this  commit- 
tee. Each  member  then  prepares  her  ballot,  scratch- 
ing out  any  name  she  does  not  like  and  substituting 
one  she  prefers  ;  the  committee  collect  the  slips  in  a 

1  See  section  143. 


ELECTION  OF  OFFICERS  21 

box  or  other  receptacle,  retire,  count  the  votes,  and 
note  down  the  result.  When  they  are  ready,  the 
chair,  interrupting  other  business  if  necessary,  says : 
"  Your  committee  on  election  of  officers  is  ready  to 
report."  Miss  Long  then  reads  the  result  of  the 
votes,  giving  the  whole  number  of  votes  cast,  the 
number  necessary  for  a  choice  (which  is  a  majority 
of  the  votes  cast),  and  the  number  each  one  has 
received  for  each  office,  as  follows  :  — 

Whole  number  of  votes  cast  21 

Necessary  for  a  choice  n 

For  President :  Mrs.  Preston  has         i 
Mrs.  Rice  has  20 

and  appears  to  be  elected. 

For  Vice-President :  Miss  Faxon  i 

Mrs.  Sanders        i 
Miss  Sawyer       19 

and  appears  to  be  elected ;  and  so  on,  to  all  the 
offices.  She  then  hands  the  list  to  the  presiding 
officer,  who  says  :  "  The  following  persons,  having 
received  a  majority  vote,  are  elected  as  the  officers  of 
this  club."  She  then  re-reads  the  list  of  offices  and 
those  who  are  elected  to  fill  them.  This  declaration 


22  ORGANIZATION 

of  the  chairman  decides  the  matter,  and  the  secre- 
tary records  the  result.  It  cannot  be  reconsidered. 

15.  Other  Methods  of  Electing.  In  case  the 
nominating  committee  reports  at  the  same  meeting 
at  which  it  was  appointed,  there  will  be  no  time  to  pre- 
pare full  ballots.  Each  officer  will  then  be  voted  for 
separately,  on  slips  of  paper,  each  member  writing  the 
name  thereon,  the  slips  being  collected  and  counted 
one  by  one.  An  informal  ballot  may  be  taken  first, 
to  test  the  sense  of  the  meeting.  This  method  gives 
more  opportunity  for  freedom  of  choice,  but  takes 
much  more  time.  Still  another  way  is  for  the  secre- 
tary to  cast  one  ballot  for  the  whole  membership, 
using  the  nominating  committee's  report  as  the  bal- 
lot. The  one  ballot  is  then  handed  to  the  chairman> 
who  reads  the  list,  declaring  the  nominees  to  be 
duly  elected.  This  method  is  not  recommended, 
and  is  never  to  be  used,  except  in  cases  where  it  is 
certain  that  all  are  agreed  upon  the  candidates.  A 
motion  is  made  "  that  the  secretary  be  empowered 
to  cast  the  ballot  of  the  society."  This  motion  is 
regularly  put  to  vote,  and  if  there  is  even  one  dis- 
senting voice,  it  cannot  be  done.  Such  a  vote  must 
be  unanimous. 

A  fourth  method  is  by  nomination  from  the  floor, 


ELECTION  OF  OFFICERS  23 

either  at  the  first  or  at  a  subsequent  meeting.  This 
takes  a  great  deal  of  time,  but  secures  freedom  of 
choice,  and  is  a  good  way  to  adopt  when  there  is 
danger  that  a  nominating  committee  will  not  select 
persons  agreeable  to  the  majority,  or  to  any  consid- 
erable number  of  the  members.  If  this  method  is 
desired,  a  motion  is  made  "  that  we  proceed  to  elect 
the  officers  of  the  club  by  nomination  from  the 
floor."  The  motion  is  stated  and  debated  and  put 
to  vote.  If  carried,  the  chair  says :  "  It  is  a  vote, 
and  the  chair  awaits  nominations  for  president." 
Mrs.  Sanders  obtains  the  floor  and  nominates  Mrs. 
Burns,  Miss  Sawyer  nominates  Mrs.  Allen,  Mrs. 
Robbins  nominates  Miss  Lovell.  When  all  have 
nominated  who  wish,  the  chair  says :  "  Mrs.  BuTns, 
Mrs.  Allen,  and  Miss  Lovell  have  been  nominated 
for  president.  The  members  will  write  upon  the 
slips  of  paper  the  name  they  prefer."  She  then 
appoints  a  committee  of  two  or  three  who  distribute 
slips  to  all,  and  then  collect,  sort,  and  count  them, 
the  result  being  declared  by  the  chair,  as  in  the  first 
method.  The  vice-president,  secretaries,  etc.,  are 
then  nominated  and  elected  in  the  same  way,  one 
by  one. 

Still  another  method  is  to  allow  members  of  the 


24  ORGA  NIZA  TION 

club,  in  open  session,  at  the  time  the  nominating 
committee  is  appointed,  to  rise  and  propose  candi- 
dates for  any  office.  These  names  would  be  merely 
suggestions,  and  the  committee  would  be  bound  only 
to  consider  them,  not  to  nominate  them.  It  would 
be  well,  also  (in  cases  where  there  is  a  nominat- 
ing committee),  to  provide  that  an  independent  list 
of  nominees  may  be  made  by  any  three,  five,  or 
more  persons,  and  that  these  nominees  be  placed 
upon  the  same  written  or  printed  list  with  the  regu- 
lar nominees.  In  voting,  the  members  could  then 
erase  the  name  they  did  not  want,  or,  as  in  the  Aus- 
tralian ballot  system,  make  a  cross  against  the  name 
they  did  want.  This  would  secure  as  great  freedom 
and  fairness  as,  and  would  take  less  time  than,  the 
method  by  nomination  from  the  floor.  It  should  be 
decided  upon  by  vote  and  incorporated  in  the  by- 
laws which  of  these  various  methods  shall  be  used 
by  a  given  society. 

In  all  cases,  permanent  officers  should  be  elected 
by  ballot,  unless  it  is  the  unanimous  wish  to  elect  by 
acclamation.  When  this  is  desired,  a  motion  is 
made  "  to  elect  by  acclamation  ;  "  this  is  put  to 
vote,  and  if  there  is  no  dissenting  voice,  it  is  done. 
The  names  of  candidates  for  each  office  are  read  by 


ELECTION  OF  OFFICERS  2$ 

the  chair,  one  by  one,  the  chair  saying,  "  Those  in 
favor  of  Mrs.  -  -  for  president  of  the  club  will  say 
aye,"  as  in  any  motion.  By  motion  and  unanimous 
vote,  also,  the  names  may  be  all  voted  upon  at  once, 
or  portions  of  them  together,  instead  of  one  by 
one. 

In  their  choice  of  methods,  different  societies  will 
be  governed  by  what  seems  suited  to  their  needs 
and  by  what  is  fairest.  With  certain  societies,  elec- 
tion may  be  by  a  nominating  committee  and  a 
printed  ballot ;  with  most,  acclamation  would  be  too 
summary;  with  all,  the  method  of  nomination  from 
the  floor,  or  that  of  a  committee  and  a  written 
ballot,  could  hardly  fail  to  be  impartial.1 

16.  "  Nc  Choice.'*  If,  in  the  case  of  any  office, 
no  candidate  receives  a  majority  of  the  votes  cast, 
there  is  "  no  choice,"  and  that  officer  must  be  voted 
for  again,  as  many  times  as  are  necessary,  until  some 
one  is  elected.  For  instance,  in  electing  the  presi- 
dent, if  nineteen  votes  had  been  cast,  and  Mrs.  Rice 
had  received  ten,  Miss  Sawyer  seven,  and  Mrs. 
Burns  two,  Mrs.  Rice,  having  a  majority,  would  be 
elected ;  but  if  Mrs.  Rice  received  fewer  than  ten, 
she  would  not  be  elected,  and  a  new  vote  would  be 
taken.  The  chair  would  say  :  "  None  of  the  candi- 

1  See  Addenda,  page  228. 


26  ORGA  NIZA  TION 

dates  for  president  has  received  a  majority  vote. 
The  club  will  please  ballot  again/' 

17.  "  Majority"  and  "  Plurality."  A  major- 
ity is  more  than  half,  a  plurality  is  the  largest  of  two 
or  more  numbers.  When  there  are  only  two  num- 
bers, or  two  candidates,  a  majority  and  a  plurality 
are,  of  course,  the  same,  but  where  there  are  more 
than  two,  there  is  a  distinction.  In  the  case  in 
question,  if  there  had  been  nineteen  votes  cast,  Mrs. 
Rice  receiving  nine,  Miss  Sawyer  seven,  and  Mrs. 
Burns  three,  Mrs.  Rice  would  have  a  plurality,  but 
not  a  majority,  because  ten,  and  not  nine,  is  a  ma- 
jority of  nineteen. 

A  plurality,  however,  may  elect,  if  it  is  so  desired, 
and,  if  so,  this  should  be  decided  by  vote  before  the 
balloting  begins.  Otherwise,  a  majority  elects.  In 
all  societies,  it  would  seem  that  officers  ought  to 
gain  at  least  one  more  than  half  the  votes  cast,  in 
order  to  entitle  them  to  serve,  so  that  it  is  better 
to  observe  the  general  rule  of  a  majority  vote.  In 
elections  by  the  people  for  public  office,  the  opposite 
is  true,  the  majority  method  having  proved  of  great 
inconvenience  in  the  States  where  it  is  used. 

An  election  to  office,  once  decided,  is  final,  and 
cannot  be  reconsidered. 


ELECTION  OF  OFFICERS  27 

18.  Conclusion  of  Organization.  The  per- 
manent officers,  having  been  elected,  assume  their 
offices  at  the  meeting  following,  the  temporary 
officials  retaining  their  places  until  the  close  of  the 
meeting  in  question. 

The  president,  on  assuming  the  chair,  may  thank 
the  club  for  its  confidence  in  her,  and  promise  to  try 
to  carry  on  the  business  properly,  and  to  see  that 
the  rights  and  privileges  of  the  members  are  equally 
recognized  and  respected.  She  is  now  addressed 
as  "  Mrs.  President." 

The  officers  having  been  elected,  and  the  constitu- 
tion arid  by-laws  adopted,  the  society  is  organized 'and 
ready  for  work.  It  is  now  the  duty  of  the  officers  to  be 
present  and  perform  their  several  functions.  But  in 
case  at  any  time  the  proper  officers  happen  to  be  all 
absent,  and  the  time  has  arrived  for  the  meeting 
to  be  called  to  order,  any  member  may  call  it  to 
order,  and  cause  a  chairman  and  secretary  "pro 
tempore "  to  be  elected,  and  thus  proceed  to  busi- 
ness. This  is  better  than  to  keep  a  meeting  and  a 
speaker  waiting. 

The  remaining  chapters  of  the  book  apply  equally 
to  temporary  meetings  and  to  permanent  societies. 


28  ORGANIZATION 


SUMMARY 

A  permanent  society  is  at  first  organized  tem- 
porarily ;  and  then  permanently,  by  election  of  offi- 
cers and  adoption  of  a  constitution  and  by-laws. 

The  constitution  and  by-laws  include  the  name, 
object,  and  methods  of  the  society,  with  the  number 
and  duties  of  its  officers.  They  are  prepared  by  a 
committee,  and  adopted,  after  discussion,  by  the 
whole  body. 

The  necessary  officers  of  a  permanent  organiza- 
tion are  a  president,  a  vice-president,  and  a  record- 
ing secretary.  Other  officers  may  be  added. 

Business  may  be  done  by  directors,  but,  in  socie- 
ties for  mutual  improvement,  it  is  better  to  have 
business  meetings  of  the  whole  membership. 

A  compulsory  change  of  certain  officers  every  few 
years  is  advisable  in  societies  for  mutual  improve- 
ment. 

Election  of  officers  may  be  by  means  of  a  nomi- 
nating committee,  or  by  nominations  from  the  floor. 
All  permanent  officers  should  usually  be  voted  for 
by  ballot.  In  giving  the  result  of  a  vote,  the  num- 
ber of  votes  against  a  candidate  as  well  as  the 
number  for,  should  be  stated. 


THE   ORDER   OF  BUSINESS  29 


A  majority  elects,  unless  it  is  provided  by  vote 
that  a  plurality  shall  elect. 

A  majority  is  more  than  half ;  a  plurality  is  the 
largest  of  several. 

An  election  cannot  be  reconsidered. 

In  case  of  the  absence  of  permanent  officers,  a 
chairman  and  secretary /r0  tempore  are  elected. 


CHAPTER  III 

THE  ORDER  OF  BUSINESS  AND  THE 
QUORUM 

ROUTINE  BUSINESS  ;  THE  FORMAL  ORDER  OF  BUSI- 
NESS ;  "  QUORUM  "  DEFINED  ;  A  QUORUM  NECES- 
SARY BEFORE  BEGINNING  ;  EFFECT  OF  "  No 
QUORUM"  DURING  PROCEEDINGS;  METHOD  OF 
COUNTING  THE  QUORUM. 

19.  Routine  Business.  The  three  formalities 
necessary  in.  the  conduct  of  meetings  are  the  calling 
to  order,  the  reading  and  approval  of  the  records, 
and  the  adjournment.  These  constitute  what  is 
sometimes  called  the  "  routine  business."  Reports 
of  standing  committees  may  also  be  included  under 


30  ORGANIZA  77ON 

this  title.  The  routine  business,  by  general  consent/ 
may  be  carried  on  without  formal  motion  and  vote, 
but  care  should  be  taken  not  to  use  this  method 
with  any  except  routine  business,  that  is,  with  any 
except  business  that  is  merely  formal,  and  does  not 
call  for  discussion.  Objection  may  be  made  by  any 
one  to  its  use,  even  in  routine  business. 

The  presiding  officer  of  a  permanent  organization, 
when  the  time  arrives  for  the  session  to  begin,  rises 
from  the  chairman's  seat,  stands  silently  a  moment, 
raps  with  a  gavel  if  necessary,  and  says :  "  The  hour 
having  arrived,  the  meeting  will  please  come  to 
order,  and  listen  to  the  reading  of  the  records  of  the 
last  meeting."  The  secretary  rises,  addresses  the 
chair  \who  now  sits~\,  reads  the  records,  and  seats 
herself.  The  chair  rises  and  says :  "  You  have 
heard  the  records  of  the  last  meeting.  Does  any  one 
notice  any  errors  or  omissions  ?  [she  waits.']  If  not, 
the  records  will  stand  approved.  The  next  business 
is,  etc." 

If  any  one  has  noticed  any  error,  she  will  rise  and 
make  the  correction,  saying  something  like  this:  "As 
I  remember,  Mrs.  President,  the  action  taken  upon 
(so  and  so)  was  as  follows :  "  (giving  it  as  she 

1  See  section  53. 


THE   ORDER   OF  BUSINESS  31 

remembers  it.)  If  the  chair  and  the  secretary  think 
the  correction  is  valid,  and  no  one  objects,  it  will  be 
made  by  the  secretary,  and  the  chair  will  say:  "The 
records,  with  the  necessary  correction,  will  stand  ap- 
proved." Or,  some  one  may  move  "  to  amend  the 
records  in  accordance  with  the  suggestion  ; "  or,  "  to 
amend  by  striking  out  (certain  words)  and  inserting 
(others),"  l  and  this  motion  is  put  to  vote,  and  the 
records  amended  or  not,  according  as  the  majority 
vote  is  affirmative  or  negative.  The  chair  will  then 
say :  "  The  records,  as  amended,  will  stand  approved." 
20.  Formal  Order  of  Business.  It  is  well  for 
a  society,  or  its  president,  to  adopt  an  order  of  busi- 
ness by  which  the  chair  shall  guide  its  meetings. 
The  form  is  not  arbitrary,  but  may  be  something  liks 
the  following  :  • — 

1.  Calling  to  Order. 

2.  Reading  and  Approval  of  the  Records. 

3.  Announcements. 

4.  Reports  of  Special  Committees. 

5.  Reports  of  Standing  Committees. 

6.  Special  Assignments. 

7.  Unfinished  Business. 

8.  Elections  to  Membership. 

9.  New  Business. 

10.  Programme  for  the  Day. 

11.  Adjournment. 

1  See  section  105. 


32  ORGANIZATION 

Any  society  will  modify  this  order,  in  accordance 
with  its  own  convenience  and  methods.  The  presi- 
dent arranges  a  list  for  each  day,  itemizing  under 
each  of  these  heads  the  special  business  to  be 
brought  up,  and  calls  up  each  item  in  order.  When 
she  comes  to  "  new  business  "  she  asks  :  "  Is  there 
any  new  business  ? "  If  there  is,  it  is  presented, 
disposed  of,  temporarily  at  least,  and  then  the  lec- 
ture, or  other  programme  for  the  day,  follows.  If  a 
special  time  is  set  for  the  programme  to  begin,  all 
business  which  is  not  reached  when  this  time  arrives, 
is  postponed  by  tacit  consent  till  the  next  business 
meeting,  unless  a  vote  is  taken  "to  continue  the 
business  session  longer."  The  order  of  business, 
after  the  approval  of  the  records,  may  be  interrupted 
or  changed  at  any  point,  by  a  motion  and  vote  to 
consider  any  special  topic. 

21.  The  Quorum  Defined.  The  quorum  is 
that  number  of  persons  whose  presence  is  necessary 
for  the  transaction  of  business.  In  a  temporary 
meeting,  the  question  of  a  quorum  does  not  arise, 
those  present,  however  few,  constituting  the  meeting. 
In  a  committee,  a  majority  of  those  appointed  con- 
stitutes the  quorum.  In  a  permanent  organization, 
it  is  necessary  to  provide,  by  rule  or  in  the  by-laws, 


THE   QUORUM  33 

what  number  shall  constitute  the  quorum.  If  it  is  not 
so  provided,  the  quorum  is  a  majority  of  the  whole 
membership ;  and,  since  business  cannot  be  done 
without  a  quorum,  a  majority  would  have  to  be 
present  before  a  meeting  could  even  be  called  to 
order. 

In  legislatures,  where  the  business  is  of  a  public 
nature,  where  it  is  the  duty  of  all  the  members  to  be 
present,  and  where  there  is  power  to  compel  their 
attendance,  a  large  quorum  is  expedient  and  just. 
In  ordinary  societies,  the  contrary  is  true.  The 
object  being  to  get  the  business  done,  the  quo- 
rum should  be  fixed  at  a  number  small  enough  to 
ensure  that  a  meeting  is  actually  held  when  it  has 
been  called.  For  a  society  numbering  from  fifty  to 
one  hundred,  the  quorum  may  well  be  fixed  at  seven  ; 
for  a  small  society  five ;  and  for  one  of  several  hun- 
dred, eleven  or  fifteen  is  sufficient.  In  fixing  the 
quorum,  the  kind  of  society  may  also  be  taken  into 
account,  and  if  its  membership,  though  large,  is  not 
a  working  membership,  the  quorum  may  be  still 
smaller.  The  principle  is,  that  all  having  the  right 
and  the  opportunity  of  attendance,  those  who  actu- 
ally do  attend,  rain  or  shine,  have  the  right  to  do  • 
the  work  for  which  they  have  taken  the  trouble  to 


34  ORGA  NIZA  77  ON 

come.  Absent  and  tardy  members  must  take  the 
consequences.  Only  as  a  matter  of  courtesy,  can 
they  expect  business  which  has  been  regularly  as- 
signed, to  be  put  off  because  they  are  not  present. 
Of  course,  if  the  members  present  choose,  they  can 
postpone  any  or  all  items  of  business  and  adjourn  ; 
but  they  need  not,  nor  is  it  best  to  do  so.  If  the 
bare  quorum  is  present,  they  may  go  on  as  if  there 
were  a  large  meeting. 

22.  Quorum  Necessary  before  Beginning. 
Whatever  number  is  fixed  upon  as  the  quorum  of  any 
body,  the  presence  of  that  number  of  members  is 
necessary  before  any  business  can  be  done.  When 
the  time  for  the  meeting  arrives,  the  president  counts 
those  present,  including  herself,  to  see  if  the  requi- 
site number  are  there ;  even  if  but  one  is  lacking, 
she  does  not  call  to  order,  but  waits  until  others 
arrive.  After  a  reasonable  time  (from  a  half-hour 
to  an  hour),  if  there  is  still  no  quorum,  she  adjourns 
the  meeting,  saying :  "  There  being  no  quorum, 
the  meeting  stands  adjourned  to"  (naming  the 
time  for  the  next  meeting).  Those  present  may 
talk  over  matters,  but  no  motion,  vote,  or  business 
of  any  kind,  is  in  order.  It  is  as  if  the  meeting  had 
not  been  held.  Members  may  be  sent  for  to  make 


THE   QUORUM  35 

a  quorum,  but  they  cannot  be  required  to  come. 
The  same  is  true  of  committee  meetings. 

23.  Effect  of  "  No  Quorum"  During  Pro- 
ceedings. A  different  practice  prevails  where 
there  has  been  a  quorum,  and  where,  during  the 
meeting,  the  members  have  gradually  departed  until 
less  than  the  proper  number  remain.  In  this  case, 
business  may  still  go  on  unless  some  one  "raises  the 
point  of  no  quorum,"  the  supposition  being  that,  a 
quorum  having  been  present,  it  is  still  present. 
Business  clone  under  those  circumstances  is  regular, 
and  may  continue  to  an  adjournment  at  the  regular 
time.  The  chair  is  not  obliged  to  note  the  absence 
of  a  quorum,  but  may  continue  to  conduct  the 
exercises. 

If,  however,  any  one,  the  chair  or  a  member,  so 
wishes,  the  question  of  "  no  quorum  "  can  be  raised 
and  the  proceedings  stayed.  The  chair  may  say : 
"The  chair  calls  the  attention  of  the  members  to 
the  fact  that  there  is  '  no  quorum/  The  meeting  is 
therefore  adjourned,"  and  thus  dissolve  the  session. 
Or,  a  member  may  rise  and  say :  "  Mrs.  President,  I 
raise  the  question  of  *  no  quorum.'".  Business  is 
then  suspended  until  the  number  present  is  counted, 
and  if  it  is  deficient,  the  meeting  is  perforce  ad- 
journed. 


36  ORGA  NIZA  TION 

24.    Method  of  Counting   the    Quorum.     If 

the  quorum  is  small,  its  presence  or  absence  is  easily 
ascertained  by  a  simple  count,  by  the  president  and 
secretary,  which  is  verifiable  by  all.  If  it  is  large, 
the  parliamentary  practice  is  to  ascertain  it  by  the 
roll-call,1  those  answering  to  their  names  (and  thus 
recorded  as  present)  deciding  the  question  of  the 
presence  of  a  quorum. 

It  would  be  beyond  the  province  of  this  book  to 
consider  the  controversy  which  has  lately  arisen  in 
the  United  States  House  of  Representatives  as  to 
whether  the  presiding  officer  of  a  legislative  assembly 
(whose  quorum  is  a  majority,  or  some  very  large 
number)  may  decide  the  question  of  a  quorum,  by 
himself  counting  those  present.  It  may  be  said, 
however,  that  precedent  and  safe  and  fair  practice 
indicate  the  roll-call  as  the  most  just  way  of  ascer- 
taining the  presence  or  absence  of  members.  Mis- 
takes and  misunderstandings  arose  from  the  at- 
tempted reversal  of  this  time-honored  practice  in  the 
winter  of  1889-90,  under  the  speakership  of  Mr. 
Reed  of  Maine. 

In  any  given  case  where  the  opportunity  arises, 

1  For  the  way  to  call  the  Roll  see  section  72. 


THE   QUORUM  37 

the  natural  tendency  of  all  presiding  officers  toward 
the  assumption  of  autocratic  power  should  be  re- 
stricted rather  than  encouraged. 

SUMMARY 

Routine  business,  by  general  consent,  may  be 
carried  on  without  regular  motions  and  votes. 

Meetings  of  permanent  societies  should  be  guided 
by  a  formal  order  of  business,  including,  under 
suitable  heads,  all  that  will  be  likely  to  arise. 

The  quorum  is  that  number  of  persons  whose 
presence  is  necessary  for  the  transaction  of  business. 
If  the  number  is  not  stated,  it  is  a  majority  of  the 
membership.  It  is  better  to  have  it  definitely  fixed. 

The  quorum  should  be  small  enough  to  ensure  a 
meeting  being  held  when  one  is  called,  those  taking 
the  trouble  to  come  being  entitled  to  do  the  business. 

A  meeting  is  not  called  to  order  till  a  quorum  is 
present ;  but  once  in  progress,  it  may  go  on  without 
a  quorum  until  some  one  raises  the  question  of  "  no 
quorum." 

The  presence  of  a  small  quorum  is  ascertained  by 
a  count ;  of  a  very  large  one,  by  the  roll-call. 


38  ORGANISATION 

CHAPTER   IV 

RIGHTS    AND    DUTIES    OF    MEMBERS 

DUTIES  OF  THE  PRESIDING  OFFICER  ;  RIGHTS  OF 
THE  PRESIDING  OFFICER;  RIGHTS  AND  DUTIES 
OF  MEMBERS;  THE  VICE-PRESIDENT;  THE  RE- 
CORDING SECRETARY. 

25.   Duties   of  the  Presiding   Officer.     The 

presiding  officer  is  the  servant  of  the  whole  body, 
not  the  servant  of  any  party  or  individual ;  above 
all,  not  the  master  of  the  assembly  over  which  she 
presides.  She  directs,  by  means  of  her  order  of 
business,  seeing  that  all  is  conducted  in  accordance 
with  justice  and  equality.  She  ic  preserves  order 
and  decorum  "  by  calling  to  order  when  necessary, 
and  correcting  parliamentary  errors,  holding  the 
reins,  so  to  speak  (but  not  too  tightly),  and  guiding, 
not  driving,  the  session,  through  its  by-ways  to  its 
destination.  It  is  her  duty  to  be  strictly  non-par- 
tisan while  in  the  chair ;  to  see  that  while  the  will 
of  the  majority  is  carried  out,  the  rights  of  the 
minority  are  also  respected ;  to  secure  the  speedy 
and  fair  transaction  of  business,  and  freedom  and 
impartiality  in  debate. 


RIGHTS  AND  DUTIES  OF  MEMBERS    39 

A  good  presiding  officer  will  have  three  character- 
istics,—  force  of  will,  sincerity  of  purpose,  and  con- 
sideration for  others. 

As  to  matters  of  detail,  the  chair  will  do  that 
which  best  preserves  order  and  secures  the  proper 
transaction  of  business.  She  will  stand  during  all 
business  or  voting,  especially  while  stating  and  put- 
ting motions,  but  may  sit  during  debate.  She  will 
not  speak  of  herself  as  "  I,"  but  as  "  the  chair"  or 
"  the  president."  She  will  recognize  the  member 
to  whom  the  floor  rightfully  belongs,  will  state  every 
motion  that  is  in  order,  and  give  a  chance  for  its  dis- 
cussion ;  she  will  wait  for  a  quorum  before  beginning, 
and  will  open  and  close  the  meeting  at  the  proper 
time ;  she  will  know  when  committees  are  to  report, 
and  see  that  their  reports  are  called  for;  she. will 
see  that  special  assignments  are  called  up  at  the 
proper  time,  and  that  all  necessary  business  is 
either  done,  or  else  properly  postponed  before  the 
meeting  dissolves. 

26.  Rights  of  the  Presiding  Officer.  The 
presiding  officer  is  a  member  of  the  society  or  meet- 
ing, and  as  such  may  always  vote  and  speak.  These 
rights  are  usually  waived,  however,  except  in  cases 
of  necessity.  The  chairman  may  make  explanations 


40  ORGANIZATION 

or  state  facts,  but  if  she  wishes  to  debate,  she  leaves 

the  chair  (saying,  "  Will  Mrs. please  assume 

the  chair? "),  and  becomes  merely  a  member  for  the 
time  being.  She  need  not  actually  vacate  the  real 
chair,  though  this  is  best  in  large  assemblies  ;  she 
simply  assumes  that  another  person  is  the  chairman, 
and  then  "  addresses  the  chair  "  as  a  member,  and 
goes  on  with  her  remarks,  resuming  her  chairman- 
ship at  their  close. 

The  chair  has  the  right  to  decide  who  is  entitled 
to  the  floor,  and  to  decide  points  of  order,  both  of 
these  being  subject  to  appeal.  She  may  call  up 
regular  business  without  waiting  for  motions,  may 
declare  certain  routine  business  "  approved "  with- 
out a  vote,  and  may  adjourn  a  meeting  if  it  is  time, 
or  if  a  quorum  is  not  present.  She  may  require 
motions  to  be  put  in  writing,  and  may  refuse  to  put 
those  that  are  not  in  order. 

A  president  has  no  right  to  meet  with  a  commit- 
tee, unless  she  has  been  specially  appointed  upon  it, 
and  she  need  not  be  consulted  by  members  of  it. 
She  has  no  so-called  ex  qfficio  rights,  unless  these  are 
specifically  granted,  and  it  is  not  well  to  grant  them. 
Her  rights  consist,  not  in  managing  the  society,  but 
in  directing  it  so  that  it  may  manage  itself. 


RIGHTS  AND  DUTIES  OF  MEMBERS     41 

27.  Rights   and    Duties   of  Members.     The 

members  will  best  do  their  duty  in  assisting  the 
president  to  preserve  order,  by  preserving  order 
themselves.  They  will  refrain  from  whispering, 
from  "  asides,"  from  walking  about,  from  doing  any- 
thing which  may  distract  the  meeting  and  prevent 
others  from  speaking  and  listening.  They  will  make 
motions  properly,  debate  courteously,  and  abide  by 
the  voice  of  the  majority.  Every  member  is  upon 
an  equality  with  every  other.  It  is  the  right  of 
members  to  vote,  and  also  their  duty,  when  clear  as 
to  their  convictions.  The  rights  and  duties  of  mem- 
bers in  debate  are  considered  in  chapter  seven. 

28.  The  Vice-President.     The   vice-president 
is  the  substitute  for  the  president  in  case  of  her 
absence    or  disability.     Her   duties   are   the    same 
therefore,    and    she    should    inform    herself    upon 
the  objects  and  methods  of  the  society,  and  upon 
parliamentary  practice.     It  is  well  for  a  president  to 
call    often   upon   her  vice-president   to   aid   her  in 
different  ways,   so  that   the   latter  office   shall  not 
degenerate  into  a  sinecure. 

29.  The    Recording  Secretary.     This  officer 
records  at  the  time,  and  afterward  writes  out  in  per- 
manent form,  all  that  is  done.     She  may  also,  but 


42  ORGA  NIZA  TION 

need  not,  record  what  is  said  in  debate.  Votes  are 
to  be  transcribed  in  the  exact  form  in  which  they 
are  taken.  The  record  is  the  authority ;  whatever 
that  says,  stands  as  the  legal  acts  of  the  society.  It 
is  necessary,  therefore,  that  the  records  of  a  meeting 
be  read  at  the  meeting  subsequent  and  be  then 
"  approved  "  by  motion  and  vote  of  the  society,  or 
by  tacit  consent.  They  are  thus  sanctioned  as  cor- 
rect ;  and  it  is  these  records,  and  not  the  memory 
or  assertion  of  any  individuals,  which  decide  what 
the  action  has  been. 

The  duties  of  any  other  officers  will  be  specified 
in  the  by-laws  of  the  society  which  elects  them,  and 
will  be  determined  by  the  needs  of  that  society. 
See  the  Appendix. 

SUMMARY 

The  presiding  officer  is  the  servant  of  the  whole 
body ;  it  is  her  duty  to  be  strictly  non-partisan,  to 
preserve  order,  to  see  that  justice  and  equality  are 
subserved,  and  to  guide  the  meetings  by  the  rules 
of  parliamentary  law,  and  by  an  order  of  busi- 
ness. 

It  is  the  right  of  the  presiding  officer  to  vote  and 
to  speak,  leaving  the  chair  for  debate.  These  rights 


RIGHTS  AND  DUTIES  OF  MEMBERS     43 

are  not  often  assumed.  She  has  no  ex  qfficio  rights 
not  specifically  granted. 

The  duty  of  the  members  is  to  help  to  preserve 
order  and  to  observe  the  rules  of  procedure.  They 
are  all  upon  an  equality. 

The  vice-president  assists  the  president  when 
called  upon,  taking  her  place  in  case  of  her  absence 
or  disability. 

The  recording  secretary  keeps  a  correct  record  of 
all  that  is  decided  by  vote.  The  records  are  the 
legal  authority  of  what  has  been  done,  and  must  con- 
sequently be  "  approved  "  at  the  meeting  following 
the  one  recorded. 


PART    II 

MOTIONS 


CHAPTER   V 

THE    MAKING,   STATING,    PUTTING,   AND 
SECONDING    OF    MOTIONS 

"  MOTION  "  vs.  "  TALK  ;  "  THE  PROCESS  OF  DECID- 
ING A  MATTER  BY  MOTION  AND  VOTE  ;  WORDS 
TO  BE  USED  ;  WHEN  A  MOTION  MAY  BE  MADE  ; 
ILLUSTRATION  OF  THE  PROCESS  ;  SECONDING  THE 
MOTION  ;  FORM  FOR  SECONDING  ;  EXTREMES  TO 
BE  AVOIDED. 

30.  "  Motion  "  vs.  "Talk."  In  order  to  bring 
a  matter  properly  before  a  meeting,  it  is  necessary 
to  make  a  formal  motion.  Desultory  talk  or  sug- 
gestion followed  by  general  agreement,  is  of  no 
binding  value.  A  motion,  regularly  made  and  put  to 
vote,  is  the  basis  of  business  ;  and  only  when  this 
is  done,  can  one  who  is  instructed  to  do  a  certain 
thing  be  held  to  its  performance.  This  is  not  say- 
ing that  a  matter  may  not  be  informally  talked  over 
previous  to  the  making  of  the  motion.  This  is 
often  profitable  and  necessary  ;  but  such  informal 
47 


48  MOTIONS 

talk  is  merely  preliminary  to  the  regular  motion  :  it 
does  not  take  its  place.  The  motion  alone  is  the 
basis  of  action. 

31.  The  Process  of  Deciding  a  Matter  by 
Motion   and   Vote.     In    deciding    a    matter    by 
motion  and  vote,  six  steps  are  essential.     These  are 
as  follows :  — 

1.  The  member  rises  and  addresses  the  chair. 

2.  The     chairman     rises     and     recognizes     the 
member. 

3.  The  member  makes  her  motion  and  sits. 

4.  The  chairman  states  the  motion. 

5.  The  chairman   gives    opportunity   for  debate, 
and  then  asks,  Are  you  ready  for  the  question  ? 

6.  The    motion   is   put   to   vote,   and    the   result 
declared. 

If  the  motion  is  seconded,  the  seconding  follows 
the  third  step.  This  is  not  included,  because  it  is 
not  absolutely  essential,  while  the  other  steps  are. 

32.  'Words  to  be  Used.     In  making  motions, 
any  words  may  be  used  which  express  the  speaker's 
meaning.    A  motion  should  be  as  concise  as  possible, 
and  should  relate  to  one  subject.    The  motions  given 
in  illustration  throughout  the  text  of  this  book  are 
not  arbitrary,   but  are   simply  indicatory  of  how  a 


THE  MAKING   OF  MOTIONS  49 

motion  should  be  framed.  The  speaker  should 
begin  by  saying,  "  I  move,"  not  "  I  motion,"  or  "  I 
move  you." 

33.  When  a   Motion  may  be   Made.      Any 
motion  may  be  made  at  any  time  when  there  is  no 
other  motion  pending.     There  are  also  certain  tech- 
nical motions  which  may  be  made  while  others  are 
pending,  and  these  are  considered  in  chapter  fourteen. 
No  motion  can   be  made  during  voting,  or  while  a 
member  has  the  floor  for  debate.     When  a  motion 
is  defeated,  the  matter  remains  where  it  was  before 
the  motion  was  made. 

34.  Illustration  of  the  Process.     Let  us  sup- 
pose that  a  business  meeting  of  the  Mendon  Women's 
Club  is  in  progress.     The  president  has  called  the 
meeting  to  order,  the  records  have  been  read  and 
approved,  and,  in  the  "order  of   business,"  the  item 
"  new  business  "  is  reached. 

Mrs.  Preston  wishes  to  bring  before  the  club  a 
proposition  for  a  public  lecture.  She  rises  and  says, 
"  Mrs.  President,"  then  waits  for  "recognition  ;  "  the 
chair,  rising,  "  recognizes  "  her  by  saying,  "  Mrs.  Pres- 
ton." Mrs.  Preston  then  "  has  the  floor."  She  pro- 
ceeds as  follows  :  "  I  move  that  our  club  hold  a  public 
meeting."  She  then  sits,  and  the  president  says, 


50  MOTIONS 

il  You  have  heard  the  motion  of  Mrs.  Preston,  that 
our  club  hold  a  public  meeting  ;  the  matter  is  be- 
fore you  for  discussion."  Still  standing,  the  chair 
waits  for,  invites,  if  necessary  urges,  discussion ;  and 
when  the  matter  has  been  debated  l  (during  debate 
the  chair  may  sit),  and  it  seems  to  her  that  all 
have  spoken  who  wish,  she  rises  and  says,  "  Are  you 
ready  for  the  question  ? "  If  no  one  rises  to  speak, 
she  then  puts  the  motion  to  vote  as  follows  :  "  The 
motion  is  that  our  club  hold  a  public  meeting.  All 
those  who  are  in  favor  of  the  motion  will  say  l  Aye.' 
\Those  who  favor  the  project,  answer  i  Aye.']  Those 
opposed,  *  No.'  [Those  opposed  answer  i  No.'}  It  is  a 
vote  "  (or,  "  The  motion  is  carried  ").  If  the  "  Noes  " 
are  in  the  majority,  she  declares  the  result  by  say- 
ing, "  It  is  not  a  vote,"  or,  "  The  motion  is  lost." 
This  declaration  of  the  chair  decides  the  matter, 
unless  the  vote  is  doubted  or  reconsidered.  The 
secretary  records  the  result,  and  it  stands  as  the 
vote  of  the  club,  to  be  in  future  acted  upon.  Fur- 
ther motions  as  to  when  and  where  the  public  meet- 
ing shall  be  held,  who  shall  be  the  speakers,  etc., 
are  made  and  decided  by  the  same  forms.  In  short, 
all  motions  whatsoever  follow  this  same  process,  with 

1  For  rules  regarding  the  limit  of  debate,  see  section  47. 


THE  SECONDING   OF  MOTIONS          51 

the  exception  that,  with  certain  technical  motions, 
debate  is  omitted  or  limited. 1 

35.  Seconding  the  Motion.  The  practice  of 
seconding  the  motion  has  become  a  kind  of  shibbo- 
leth. Persons  who  cannot  make  a  motion  properly, 
will  often  cling  with  amusing  tenacity  to  the  neces- 
sity of  seconding  all  motions,  presiding  officers  some- 
"times  even  going  so  far  as  to  refuse  to  state  a  motion, 
or  to  allow  it  to  be  discussed,  until  it  is  seconded. 
The  principle  of  equality  dictates  that  every  member 
has  an  equal  right  with  every  other,  and  that  one 
person  has  the  same  right  as  have  two  persons,  to 
bring  up  any  matter  which  is  in  order  and  to  have  it 
fairly  discussed. 

Although  some  good  authorities  make  the  second- 
ing of  all  motions  a  necessary  part  of  the  procedure, 
the  actual  practice  of  certain  legislatures  2  and  large 
bodies  in  not  seconding  motions  would  seem  to 
indicate  that  this  practice  is  gradually  ceasing  to  be 
considered  an  essential,  and  to  sustain  the  opinion 
that  a  second,  while  always  permissible,  should  not 

1  See  Addenda,  page  228. 

8  Motions  are  not  seconded  in  either  house  of  Congress  or  in  the  Legisla- 
ture of  Massachusetts.  The  same  is  probably  true  of  most  of  the  other  States. 
The  author  has  the  authority  of  a  United  States  Senator  for  saying  that  "  in 
most  bodies  of  dignity  and  importance  a  second  to  a  motion  is  not  required 
by  parliamentary  rule." 


52  MOTIONS* 

be  made  obligatory,  except  as  a  means  of  protection 
against  irregular  or  factious  motions.  The  second 
has  come  to  be  simply  a  sign  of  approval,  and  it  is 
therefore  of  the  nature  of  debate,  —  a  person  "sec- 
onding "  where  she  has  nothing  else  to  say.  Some- 
times, too,  a  motion  is  seconded  as  an  opening  for 
debate.  To  make  of  it  a  necessary  factor  in  the  mak- 
ing of  a  motion  is  to  give  it  too  much  importance. 

It  is  undeniable  that  a  presiding  officer,  if  -she 
wishes  to  be  so  arbitrary,  may  refuse  to  state  a 
motion  that  is  not  seconded,  and  there  is  no  help 
for  it,  because  the  practice  of  omitting  the  second 
has  not  yet  become  so  firmly  established  as  to  be 
authoritative.  But  if  she  understands  that  a  motion 
need  not  be  seconded,  and  if  she  wishes  to  be  fair 
to  all,  she  will  not  insist  upon  it,  but  will  allow 
every  proper  motion  to  take  its  regular  course,  to 
be  debated,  and  then  to  be  defeated  fairly  by  a  vote, 
rather  than  to  defeat  it  beforehand,  by  refusing  to 
place  it  before  the  meeting  unseconded. 

It  is  proper  also  for  the  presiding  officer  herself 
to  tacitly  second  any  motion,  thus  doing  away  with 
the  necessity  for  waiting,  or  asking  for  a  verbal 
second.  In  this  case,  in  stating  the  motion,  she 
says,  "  The  motion  is  made  and  seconded  that,"  etc. 


THE  SECONDING   OF  MOTIONS          S3 

36.  Form  for  Seconding.     When  a  motion  is 
seconded,  it  must  be  done  formally.     The  custom 
of   calling  out   "  Second  the   motion "   by   any  one 
seated,  and  not  addressing  the  chair,  is  disorderly, 
and  such  calls  need  not  be  heeded.     The  fact  that 
this   careless   method    is  quite   common  shows  that 
the  practice  of  seconding  is  beginning  to  pass  into 
disuse.     When  motions  are  seconded,  the  seconding 
follows  the  making  of  the  motion.     The  mover  hav- 
ing seated  herself,  another  person  rises,  addresses 
the    chair,  is  recognized,   and  says,  "  I  second  the 
motion, "     She  then  sits,  and  the  chair  says,  "The 
motion  is  made  by  Mrs.  Preston  and  seconded  by 
Mrs.  Paine  that,"  etc.     She  then  continues  as  in  the 
illustration. 

37.  Extremes  to  be  Avoided.     There  are  two 
extremes  which  a  fair-minded  chairman  will  avoid  : 
first,  suppressing  a  motion  because  it  is  not  seconded ; 
and  second,  hastily  putting  one  to  vote  without  giving 
a  chance  for  discussion. 

As  was  said  in  chapter  one,  nominations  for  office 
would  better  be  seconded.  The  reason  for  this  is 
that  nominations  are  almost  never  discussed.  In- 
deed, a  good  rule  to  be  established  in  regard  to 
seconding  would  be  this  :  a  second  should  not 


54  MOTIONS 

ordinarily  be  insisted  upon ;  but  it  may  be,  in  the 
case  of  nominations,  of  undebatable  motions,  a.nd  of 
appeals. 

SUMMARY 

A  formal  motion,  regularly  made  and  put  to  vote, 
is  the  only  proper  basis  for  business.  Informal  talk 
determines  nothing. 

There  are  six  steps  in  deciding  a  matter  by  motion 
and  vote  :  addressing  the  chair,  recognition,  making 
the  motion,  stating  the  motion,  debate,  putting  the 
question  to  vote. 

Any  words  may  be  used  which  express  the  speak- 
er's meaning. 

A  motion  begins  with  the  words,  "  I  move." 

A  motion  may  be  made  at  any  time  when  no  other 
is  pending. 

Seconding  the  motion  is  permissible,  but  should 
not  be  made  obligatory;  the  chair  may  tacitly  second 
a  motion. 

Calling  out  "  Second  the  motion/'  without  rising 
and  addressing  the  chair,  is  out  of  order. 

A  motion  should  not  be  suppressed  because  it  is 
not  seconded  ;  neither  should  one  be  put  to  vote 
hastily  without  opportunity  for  debate. 


THE    WITHDRAWAL    OF  MOTIONS      55 


CHAPTER   VI 

THE    WITHDRAWAL    AND    DIVISION    OF 
MOTIONS 

RULE  FOR  WITHDRAWAL  ;  WITHDRAWAL  ILLUS- 
TRATED ;  EXCEPTION  ;  DIVISION  OF  MOTIONS  ; 
EQUIVALENT  MOTIONS. 

38  Rule  for  Withdrawal.  A  motion,  having 
been  made  and  stated,  is  in  the  possession  of  the  as- 
sembly and  not  of  the  mover,  who  may  "  withdraw  " 
it  only  under  certain  restrictions.  The  rule  for  with- 
drawal may  be  stated  as  follows  :  The  member  who 
makes  a  motion  may  withdraw  it,  by  unanimous  con- 
sent, before  it  is  put  to  vote,  unless  it  has  been 
amended  or  put  into  a  different  form  from  that  first 
moved.  The  reason  why  it  cannot  be  withdrawn 
without  unanimous  consent  is  because  after  it  has 
been  put  before  the  assembly  it  u  belongs/'  so  to 
speak,  to  the  whole  body,  and  no  longer  to  the 
mover.  Furthermore,  unanimous  consent  is  the 
shortest  way  of  determining  the  wish  of  the  meet- 
ing ;  any  person  could  at  once  renew  the  motion  if 
it  were  allowed  to  be  withdrawn  by  a  majority  vote, 


5  6  MOTIONS 

and  time  would  thereby  be  lost.  Even  by  unani- 
mous consent,  it  cannot  be  withdrawn  if  it  has  been 
amended,  for  it  has  now  become  involved  in  other 
processes  which  require  their  own  course  of  action. 
If  it  has  been  seconded,  the  second  must  also  be 
withdrawn.  A  motion  that  is  withdrawn  need  not  be 
recorded,  for  it  is  as  if  it  had  not  been  made  at  all. 

39.  Withdrawal   Illustrated.      Matters    may 
come  up  in  the   course  of  debate  which  lead  the 
mover  to  see  that  her  motion  is  unnecessary  or  unde- 
sirable, and  she  wishes  she  had  not  made  it.     She 
may  in  that  case  withdraw  it.     That  is,  she  may  rise, 
address  the  chair,  and,  being  recognized,  may  say, 
"  I  desire  to  withdraw  my  motion."     The  chair  will 
then  say,  "  Mrs. desires   to  withdraw  the   mo- 
tion.     Is   there    any   objection  ? "      She    waits   for 
objections,  and   if  there   are   none,  she  says,  "  The 
motion  is  withdrawn."     If  any  one,  wishing  it  to  be 
further  considered,  does   object   to    its  withdrawal, 
that    person    rises    and    says,    "  Mrs.    President,    I 
object."     The   chair  will    then    say,   "  There  being 
objection,   the  motion  cannot  be  withdrawn,  and  is 
still  before  you,"  and  the  debate  upon  it  proceeds. 

40.  Exception.     A  motion    may  be    withdrawn 
before   it  is  stated  by  the  chair,  without  unanimous 


THE  DIVISION  OF  MOTIONS  57 

consent,  and  solely  at  the  will  of  the  mover.  Not 
having  been  stated  by  the  chair,  it  "  belongs  "  to  the 
mover.  This  may  happen  when,  after  a  motion  is 
made,  the  chair,  or  some  one  through  the  chair, 
knowing  of  facts  or  circumstances  unknown  to  the 
mover,  suggests  to  her  its  undesirability  or  untimeli- 
ness  ;  and  she  in  consequence  withdraws  it,  if  she 
wishes. 

41.  Division  of  Motions.  A  motion  which  has 
two  or  more  distinct  parts  may  be  divided  into  as 
many  motions  as  there  are  parts,  and  each  one  put 
to  vote  separately.  This  division  may  be  made  by 
the  chair  without  a  vote,  if  there  is  no  objection  ; 
or,  a  member  may  move  "  that  the  motion  be 
divided,"  and  this  is  put  to  vote  like  any  other 
motion.  For  instance,  a  motion  is  made  "  that  a 
committee  of  three  be  appointed  by  the  chair  to 
consider  the  question  of  holding  a  public  meeting, 
and  be  given  full  powers."  This  may  be  divided 
into  four  parts,  as  follows:  i.  That  a  committee  be 
appointed  to  consider  the  question  of  a  public  meet- 
ing ;  2.  That  it  consist  of  three ;  3.  That  it  be  ap- 
pointed by  the  chair ;  4.  That  it  be  given  full  powers. 

This  gives  opportunity  for  debating  and  amending 
each  proposition  separately,  and  secures  a  quicker 


$8  MOTIONS 

and  fairer  result  than  if  the  whole  complex  motion 
were  under  consideration  at  once.  It  also  simplifies 
the  process  of  amendment. 

If  the  chair  decides  upon  the  division  without  a 
motion,  she  separates  the  motion  into  its  obviously 
distinct  parts,  putting  each  to  vote.  The  motion  to 
divide  is  simply,  "  I  move  that  the  motion  be 
divided,"  without  specifying  the  manner  of  division. 
If  this  is  carried,  the  chair  proceeds  to  divide  the 
motion,  as  in  the  other  case. 

42.  Equivalent  Motions.  When  the  negative 
of  one  motion  amounts  to  the  affirmative  of  another 
and  leaves  no  alternative,  the  decision  of  one  decides 
the  other.  For  an  example,  see  section  50. 

SUMMARY 

The  mover  may  withdraw  her  motion,  by  unani- 
mous consent,  unless  it  has  been  amended  or  mod- 
ified. 

A  motion  may  be  withdrawn  before  it  is  stated,  at 
the  will  of  the  mover. 

A  motion  which  has  two  or  more  distinct  parts 
may  be  divided,  each  part  being  put  to  vote  sepa- 
rately. 

The  chair  decides  upon  the  manner  of  division  ; 


DEB  A  TE  59 

she  may  divide  without  a  motion  u  that  the  motion 
be  divided,"  or  one  may  be  made  to  that  effect. 

A  motion  which  is  another's  equivalent  is  decided 
when  that  other  is  decided. 


CHAPTER   VII 
DEBATE 

THE  RIGHT  OF  DEBATE  ;  DEBATE  DEFINED  ;  WHEN 
DEBATE  is  IN  ORDER  ;  METHOD  OF  DEBATE 
ILLUSTRATED  ;  RULES  FOR  LIMITING  DEBATE  ; 
ILLUSTRATION  ;  THE  ARGUMENTS  ;  CONTESTING 
THE  FLOOR  ;  YIELDING  THE  FLOOR  ;  COURTESIES 
IN  DEBATE  ;  GENERAL  CONSENT. 

43.  The  Right  of  Debate.  After  a  motion  has 
been  made,  and  stated  by  the  chair,  it  is  before  the 
assembly  for  consideration.  It  is  now  the  duty  of 
the  chairman  to  see  that  it  is  fully  and  fairly  consid- 
ered, and  to  secure  the  right  of  the  members  equally 
to  take  part  in  its  discussion.  On  the  other  hand, 
provision  is  often  needed  to  protect  an  assembly 
from  the  tendency  of  members  to  "  talk  against  time." 
To  preserve  the  happy  medium  between  a  tedious  or 


60  MOTIONS 

factious  debate  on  the  one  hand,  and  a  summary 
disposal  of  all  debate  on  the  other,  it  is  well  for  a 
society  to  adopt  a  few  simple  rules  to  guide  and 
guard  its  discussions. 

44.  Debate    Defined.     Strictly  speaking,  "  de- 
bate "  means  remarks  made  on  opposite  sides  of  a 
question  ;  it  presupposes  difference  of  opinion  and 
conflict  of  votes.     But  in  its  more  general  sense,  it 
includes  all  remarks  made  in  relation  to  a  motion, 
even  if  all  on  one  side.     Debate  may  therefore  be 
defined  as  original  remarks,  spoken,  not   read  from 
manuscript,  by  a  member  of  the  assembly  who  has 
obtained  the  floor,  which  remarks  should  be  imper- 
sonal  and   to    the   point.      The   speaker  may  have 
notes  jotted  down  to  aid  her ;  she  may  recite  her 
speech  from  memory,  or  it  may  be  extempore,  but,  as 
Mr.  Crocker  says,  "  debate  is  not  reading  a  speech." 

45.  When  Debate  is  in  Order.     Debate  is  in 
order  only  when  a  motion   is   regularly  before  the 
meeting.     Informal  discussion,  without  a  motion  to 
speak  to,  is  not  debate.     This  is  allowable   as  pre- 
liminary to  a  motion,  but  regular  discussion  is  dis- 
cussion of  a  motion.     The  motion  being  made  and 
stated,    "  debate  "    follows.       Conversely,     debate 
ceases  as  soon  as  the  motion   is  put  to  vote.     The 


DEBATE  6 1 

chair  having  asked,  "  Are  you  ready  for  the  ques- 
tion ?  "  and  no  one  rising  to  speak,  the  motion  passes 
from  the  debatable  stage,  and  is  put  to  vote,  when 
debate  cannot  be  resumed.  By  general  consent, 
however  (that  is,  if  no  one  objects),  debate  may  be 
allowed  after  the  affirmative  vote  is  taken,  but  if  any 
one  does  object,  it  cannot  be  continued.  In  case  it 
is  resumed,  the  vote,  when  finally  taken,  is  taken 
again  on  both  sides.  If  both  sides  have  been  taken, 
debate  cannot  be  resumed  in  any  case,  and  any  talk 
or  discussion  that  may  follow  the  declaration  of  a 
vote  is  of  no  value  ;  the  matter  is  decided.  If  there 
are  special  rules,  these  govern  the  debate  ;  and  if 
the  previous  question  has  been  ordered,  there  can 
be  no  more  debate,  even  by  unanimous  consent. 

46.  Method  of  Debate  Illustrated.  Let  us 
suppose  that  at  a  meeting  of  the  Mendon  Women's 
Club,  a  motion  "  that  a  public  meeting  be  held"  has 
been  made  and  placed  before  the  meeting.  Debate 
is  now  in  order,  and  the  chair  invites  discussion, 
saying  :  "  The  motion  is  now  before  you  for  discus- 
sion, and  the  chair  hopes  the  members  will  all 
express  their  views  freely."  Mrs.  Paine  rises, 
"  addresses  the  chair,"  is  "  recognized,"  and  thus 
"  has  the  floor."  She  proceeds  to  speak  in  favor  of 


62  MOTIONS 

the  public  meeting,  speaking  strictly  upon  that  sub- 
ject alone,  and  giving  such  reasons  as  appear  to  her 
to  be  good.  She  avoids  saying  "  It  seems  to  me  "  if 
possible,  guards  against  repetition  and  prolixity,  and 
is  careful  not  to  indulge  in  any  anti-climax.  If  an 
inexperienced  speaker,  she  will  be  encouraged  by 
the  chair  to  go  on,  even  if  she  does  not  express  her- 
self so  well  as  might  be  —  the  way  of  speaking 
being  secondary  to  the  speaking.  If  she  is  wise,  she 
will  not  apologize  for  her  words,  either  in  beginning 
or  closing,  but  let  them  stand  for  what  they  are.  If 
she  has  occasion  during  her  speech  to  allude  to  any 
other  member,  she  will  not  do  so  by  name,  but  will 
say  instead,  "  the  member  on  my  right,"  or  "  our 
secretary,"  or  u  another  speaker,"  or  "  one  of  my 
opponents,"  or  any  impersonal  term  which  shall  indi- 
cate the  one  meant.  Directly  addressing  one  another 
by  name  is  unparliamentary.  Having  said  all  she 
has  to  say,  she  stops  and  sits  down. 

If  no  one  rises  immediately  to  continue  the  discus- 
sion, the  chair  will  invite  others,  saying,  "  There 
must  be  others  who  have  some  opinion  in  this  matter. 
Do  not  wait  for  one  another,  friends ;  this  question 
should  be  fully  discussed."  It  is  not  well  for  the 
chair  to  call  upon  members  by  name,  except  in  rare 


DEBATE  63 

cases,  as  when  some  particular  person  is  specially 
well-informed  on  a  subject ;  for,  where  this  practice 
is  followed,  those  who  are  not  called  upon,  never  dare 
to  speak,  and  those  who  are,  wait  for  an  invitation  ; 
the  consequence  being  that  the  freedom  and  spon- 
taneity of  debate,  which  make  its  chief  value,  are 
prevented.  It  is  better  for  the  chair  to  wait,  m  the 
midst  of  an  oppressive  silence  (hard  though  this  is), 
for  the  spirit  to  move,  than  to  attempt  to  coerce 
debate  by  indicating  who  shall  speak.  After  a 
time  (which  will  grow  shorter  as  the  members  gain 
courage  by  practice)  some  other  member  rises  and 
gives  her  reasons,  as  well  as  she  can,  for  or  against 
the  project.  Others  follow,  until  all  have  spoken 
who  wish.  No  one  having  the  floor,  or  rising  to 
speak,  the  chair  then  says,  "  Are  you  ready  for  the 
question  ? "  and,  no  one  rising  to  speak,  she  puts 
the  motion  to  vote. 

47.  Rules  for  Limiting  Debate.  In  the  illus- 
tration given  above,  it  is  assumed  that  there  are  no 
rules  limiting  debate,  but  that  all  speak  when  and  as 
long  as  they  wish ;  and  this  is  the  best  and  general 
practice  when  the  discussion  relates  solely  to  business 
to  be  done,  and  also  in  societies  where  it  is  difficult 
to  persuade  members  to  speak  at  all  on  any  subject. 


64  MOTIONS 

A  judicious  and  kindly  president  will  draw  out  all 
the  discussion  possible  from  those  present  who  can 
overcome  their  natural  timidity,  and  rules  limiting 
debate  will  be  undesirable. 

But,  in  societies  where  the  object  is  to  learn  to 
debate,  especially  when  the  members  are  expe- 
rienced, or  on  special  occasions  where  there  is  a 
limited  time  and  general  interest  upon  some  desig- 
nated topic,  it  is  well  to  guard  against  the  monopoly 
of  debate  by  one  or  two  persons,  by  adopting  certain 
rules,  either  for  temporary  or  for  permanent  use. 
These  rules  will  restrict  the  speakers  as  to  the  time 
and  as  to  the  order  of  their  speaking.  The  simple 
rules  for  an  ordinary  debate  are  the  following:  — 

No  one  shall  speak  more  than  once  until  all  have 
spoken  who  wish. 

No  one  shall  speak  longer  than  five  minutes  at  one 
time. 

The  leaders  shall  each  have  ten  miuutes  to  open  the 
debate  and  five  minutes  to  close. 

The  prescribed  time  may  be  longer  or  shorter  of 
course,  and  it  is  not  necessary  that  the  leaders  close  ; 
it  will  be  found  not  desirable  to  have  them,  when 
the  time  is  limited. 

These  few  rules  are  all  that  will  be  necessary  in 


DEB  A  TE  65 

ordinary  societies.  They  should  be  quite  strictly 
observed,  the  chair  seeing  that  they  are  carried  out, 
by  rising  and  rapping  with  the  gavel,  adding,  if 
necessary,  "The  speaker's  time  has  expired,"  or, 
61  You  have  already  spoken.  Are  there  others  who 
wish  to  speak  ?  " 

The  practice  of  extending  a  speaker's  time  is 
correct,  but,  as  it  defeats  the  purpose  of  the  rubles,  the 
extension  should  not  often  be  made.  If  it  be  de- 
sired to  extend  the  time,  some  one  obtains  the  floor 
and  makes  a  motion  "  that  the  speaker's  time  be  ex- 
tended   minutes,"  and  if  this  is  carried,  she  goes 

on.  It  may  be  said  in  general,  upon  this  point,  that, 
having  rules,  it  is  better  to  adhere  to  them,  except 
in  extreme  cases.  It  might  be  well  to  adopt  this 
additional  rule  :  — 

Only  by  a  unanimous  vote  shall  a  speaker's  time  be 
extended. 

48.  Illustration.  The  Mendon  Women's  Club, 
having  progressed  so  far  as  to  discuss  papers  infor- 
mally, decides  to  go  a  step  farther,  and  to  have  a 
formal  debate.  A  resolution  is  prepared,  in  proper 
form,  by  a  member  or  members  appointed  to  do  it,  on 
some  subject  of  interest,  such  as  the  tariff-law,  the 
single-tax  theory,  or  a  local  topic.  This  resolution 


66  MOTIONS 

should  be  affirmative  and  not  negative,  that  is,  it 
should  read,  "  Resolved,  that  the  present  tariff  is  of 
benefit ;"  and  not  "is  not  of  benefit/'  This  is  to 
prevent  confusion  in  the  minds  of  the  debaters  and 
hearers  as  to  which  side  they  are  considering.  Two 
or  four  members  are  then  selected,  either  by  nom- 
ination from  the  floor,  or  by  appointment  of  the 
chair  (as  is  voted),  to  be  the  leaders  in  the  debate. 
It  is  best  to  appoint  them  one  by  one,  in  the  follow- 
ing order ;  and  care  should  be  taken  that  each 
understands  which. side  she  is  on  :  First  affirmative, 
first  negative,  second  affirmative,  second  negative. 
It  is  then  voted  to  guide  the  debate  by  the  rules 
given  in  the  preceding  section. 

When  the  time  arrives,  the  chair  says,  "The 
programme  for  this  afternoon  is  a  debate  upon 
the  following  subject  :  '  Resolved,  that  the  present 
tariff-law  is  of  benefit  to  the  business  interests  of 
our  country/  Mrs.  Paine,  being  first  upon  the 
affirmative,  will  open  the  debate."  Mrs.  Paine 
rises,  addresses  the  chair,  is  recognized,  and  proceeds 
with  her  remarks  until  the  chair  indicates  to  her 
that  her  time  is  up.  The  chair  then  says,  "  Mrs. 
Robbins,  the  first  in  the  negative,  will  continue  the 
debate,"  and  Mrs.  Robbins  follows  Mrs.  Paine's 


DEB  A  TE  67 

example.  She  is  followed  by  Mrs.  Preston  as 
"  second  on  the  affirmative,"  and  she  in  her  turn  by 
Mrs.  Burns,  as  "  second  on  the  negative."  The 
leaders  having  finished,  the  chair  says,  "  The  debate 
is  now  open  to  all  present,  each  being  allowed  not 
more  than  five  minutes ;  "  and  all  then  speak  who 
wish.  If  the  leaders  are  to  close,  time  is  taken  for 
that  purpose  from  the  other  speakers.  If  not,  the 
debate  is  over  when  all  have  spoken  who  wish,  or 
when  the  time  has  come  for  adjournment,  or  when 
the  previous  question  is  ordered.  Debate  having 
closed,  the  chair  puts  the  resolution  to  vote,  as 
follows  :  "Those  in  favor  of  the  resolution,  'that  the 
present  tariff-law  is  of  benefit  to  the  business  inter- 
ests of  the  country/  will  rise  and  stand  until  counted. 
[T/ie  affirmatives  rise,  the  secretary  counts  them  and 
notes  the  result^  Those  opposed  to  the  resolution 
will  rise  and  stand  until  counted.  \The  negatives  rise 
and  are  counted.  Then  the  president,  to  whom  the 
secretary  hands  the  result,  goes  on  :]  Twenty-five 
have  voted  in  the  affirmative,  and  thirty  in  the  nega- 
tive, and  the  resolution  is  lost." 

49.  The  Arguments.  Sometimes  a  vote  is 
taken  upon  the  merits  of  the  arguments,  as  well  as, 
or  instead  of,  the  merits  of  the  question,  the  mem- 


68  MOTIONS 

bers  voting  upon  the  side  which  they  consider  to 
have  been  best  presented,  whether  or  not  they  con- 
cur in  the  views  expressed.  This  is  not  specially 
commendable,  since  it  tends  to  encourage  oratory 
rather  than  sincerity. 

It  should  be  the  aim  of  all  debaters  to  inform 
themselves  as  thoroughly  as  possible  ;  to  be  truthful, 
correct,  and  concise ;  and  at  the  same  time  to  press 
the  merits  of  their  own  side  emphatically,  and  to  use 
any  fair  means  to  show  the  fallacy,  inexpediency,  or 
injustice  of  the  opposing  side. 

50.  Contesting  the  Floor.  As  already  stated, 
the  member  who  is  recognized  by  the  chair,  "  has  che 
floor ; "  and  she  is  entitled  to  speak,  without  inter- 
ruption, for  her  allotted  time,  provided  she  speaks 
in  order.  It  may  happen,  however,  that  two  persons 
rise  and  address  the  chair  at  the  same  moment.  In 
this  case,  unless  one  of  them  yields  [saying,  "  I 
yield  to  Miss ,  Mrs.  President  "]  and  seats  her- 
self, the  chair  decides  between  the  two.  This  she 
does  by  calling  the  name  of  the  one  she  first  saw  or 
heard.  If  she  is  in  doubt,  she  will  recognize  the 
one  farthest  from  her,  or  the  one  who  has  not  spoken, 
or  who  speaks  seldom,  rather  than  the  other;  if  one 
has  risen  and  addressed  the  chair,  and  the  other  has 


DEB  A  TE  69 

risen  only,  or  spoken  only,  the  one  properly  proceed- 
ing has  the  preference. 

If  a  president  is  unfair,  and  intentionally  gives  the 
floor  to  one  not  entitled  to  it,  the  rightful  one  may 
insist  upon  her  privilege,  remaining  standing,  and 
saying  :  "  Mrs.  President,  I  believe  I  addressed  the 
chair  first,"  or  words  to  that  effect.  The  chair  then 
(unless  the  other  member  yields)  puts  the  question 
to  vote,  saying :  "  The  question  is :  which  of  these 
members  was  first  up  ?  Those  in  favor  of  giving  the 
floor  to  "  [mentioning  the  one  she  has  recognized] 
"  will  say  i  Aye.7 ):  If  the  ayes  prevail,  the  other 
person  sits  down  ;  if  the  noes  prevail,  she  has  the 
floor,  and  the  one  recognized  sits  down.  It  is  not 
necessary  to  take  the  vote  upon  the  other  name, 
since  the  decision  of  the  vote  upon  one  name  neces- 
sarily decides  that  upon  the  other,  leaving  no  alter- 
native. This  is  an  example  of  "equivalent  motions." 

If  there  are  more  than  two  contestants,  however, 
as  many  votes  must  be  taken  as  are  necessary  to 
come  to  a  decision.  Such  action  is  called  "  con- 
testing the  floor,"  and  it  rarely  occurs  except  in 
legislatures.  The  members  of  ordinary  societies  will 
generally  acquiesce  in  the  chair's  decision,  or  ami- 
cably yield  one  to  another.  But  this  provision  is 


70  MOTIONS 

useful  in  case  of  unfairness  on  the  part  of  the  chair, 
or  urgency  on  the  part  of  the  speaker's  cause. 

51.  Yielding  the  Floor.  It  often  happens,  dur- 
ing an  interesting  debate,  that  some  member  will 
wish  to  interrupt  another,  to  "ask  a  question,"  either 
in  good  faith  or,  as  often  happens,  to  point  out  a 
fallacy.  In  this  case,  the  member  speaking  may  or 
may  not  allow  the  question  to  be  interjected.  If  she 
does  "  yield  the  floor"  for  that  purpose,  she  loses  the 
floor,  in  case  the  one  interrupting  shall  choose  to 
continue  her  remarks  further,  and  can  only  resume  it 
provided  she  again  succeeds  in  obtaining  it  in  the 
regular  way.  For  example  :  Mrs.  Paine  is  speaking 
concerning  the  public  meeting  of  the  woman's  club, 
and  Mrs.  Granger  wishes  to  ask  her  a  question.  She 
rises  and  says,  "  Mrs.  President,  will  the  speaker  allow 
a  question  ?  "  The  chair  rises  and  says,  "  Will  Mrs. 
Paine  yield  the  floor  for  a  question  ?  "  Mrs.  Paine 
may  say,  "  Certainly,"  remain  standing,  listen  to  the 
question,  reply  to  it  or  not,  and  go  on  after  Mrs. 
Granger  has  seated  herself.  Or,  not  wishing  to  have 
her  train  of  argument  interrupted,  Mrs.  Paine  may 
say,  "  After  I  have  finished,  Mrs.  President,  I  shall 
be  glad  to  answer  any  question,  if  I  am  able,"  and 
proceed  with  her  remarks,  Mrs.  Granger  sitting 


DEBATE  71 

down.  If  she  allows  the  question,  she  runs  the  risk 
of  losing  the  floor,  and,  in  deciding  the  matter,  she 
will  be  guided  by  her  knowledge  of  Mrs.  Granger's 
views,  which,  if  unfavorable  to  her  own,  would  better 
not  be  allowed  at  that  time. 

In  asking  her  question,  Mrs.  Granger  would  use 
this  form :  "  I  would  like  to  ask  the  speaker,  through 
you,  Mrs.  President,  whether  "  etc.  She  may  then 
go  on  to  answer  it  herself,  and  to  make  an  argument, 
in  spite  of  the  fact  that  Mrs.  Paine  is  still  standing. 
Finally,  if  Mrs.  Granger  still  goes  on,  Mrs.  Paine 
will  perforce  sit  down.  She  has  "  lost  the  floor  "  by 
voluntarily  yielding  it  when  she  had  it,  and  only 
after  Mrs.  Granger  has  finished,  can  she  resume. 
This  is  sharp  practice,  it  is  true,  but  since  it  is  par- 
liamentary, it  may  well  be  guarded  against.  Inter- 
ruptions are  disturbing,  both  to  the  speaker  and  the 
hearers,  and  should  be  discouraged.  Warrington 
says :  — 

"An  experienced  debater  will  seldom  lose  any- 
thing by  interruption  ;  an  inexperienced  one  ought 
not  to  be  subjected  to  loss  or  discomfiture  by  any 
such  event." 

When  the  floor,  instead  of  being  voluntarily 
yielded,  is  taken  from  a  member  by  a  question  of 


/2  MOTIONS 

privilege  or  order,  it  is  not  thereby  lost,  but  still 
belongs  to  that  member  who  has  the  first  right  to  it 
after  the  prior  question  is  settled.  The  rule  is  that 
if  one  voluntarily  yields,  she  loses  the  right  to  the 
floor,  while  if  she  yields  of  necessity,  she  retains  that 
right.  See  sections  149  and  153. 

52.  Courtesies  in  Debate.     While  courtesy  is 
always  to  be  regarded,  it  is  not  to  be  carried  so  far 
as  to  endanger  one's  cause.     It  is  not  discourtesy  to 
refuse  to  yield  the  floor,  provided  one  declines  in  a 
courteous  manner.    Neither  is  it  discourteous  to  hold 
the  floor,  having  gained  it,  provided  it  is  gained  fairly. 

A  custom  has  grown  up  in  Congress  of  allowing 
certain  members  precedence  over  other  members  in 
debate.  The  chairman  of  a  committee,  or  the  origin- 
ator of  a  measure,  for  instance,  is  given  opportunity 
and  time  to  the  exclusion  of  the  general  membership. 
This  may  be  necessary  in  Congress,  but  any  tendency 
toward  such  "  courtesies "  (as  they  are  called),  in 
ordinary  societies,  should  be  discountenanced.  To 
give  special  privileges  to  any  member  over  any 
other  is  to  endanger  that  freedom  which  is  the  soul 
of  debate  as  well  as  its  safety. 

53.  "  General   Consent."     A  number  of  pro- 
cedures, otherwise  irregular,   may  be  admitted  by 


DEB  A  TE  73 

"general  consent,"  and  "general  consent"  means 
unanimous  consent.  Routine  business  is  carried  on, 
debate  is  allowed  when  really  out  of  order,  and 
certain  informalities,  instances  of  which  will  be  cited 
here  and  there  in  this  book,  are  admitted.  In  any 
of  these  cases,  if  one  person  objects,  the  presiding 
officer  must  put  the  question  in  the  regular  form. 
Business  may  frequently  be  facilitated  in  this  way, 
but  the  practice  must  be  carefully  guarded  against 
misuse. 

SUMMARY 

Debate  consists  of  spoken  remarks,  made  by  one 
who  has  properly  obtained  the  floor.  They  should 
be  impersonal  and  to  the  point. 

After  a  motion  is  placed  before  the  meeting, 
debate  is  in  order.  Any  remarks  that  precede  the 
making  or  follow  the  putting  to  vote  of  a  motion  are 
not  debate,  and  have  no  influence  upon  action. 

By  unanimous  consent,  debate  may  be  re-opened 
after  the  affirmative  vote  is  taken. 

Members  should  address  the  chair  in  opening, 
wait  for  recognition,  speak  to  the  motion,  and  sit 
down  when  they  have  finished. 

The  chair  should  not  invite  members  to  speak  by 
calling  upon  them  by  name. 


74  MOTIONS 

On  ordinary  occasions,  debate  is  most  successful 
when  unrestricted  by  any  rules,  each  one  speaking 
when  and  as  long  as  she  wishes. 

When  the  time  is  limited,  or  when  leaders  are  ap- 
pointed for  a  formal  debate,  rules  restricting  to  a 
certain  time,  and  prescribing  the  order  of  speaking, 
are  useful. 

A  speaker's  time  may  be  extended,  but  it  is  better 
to  adhere  to  the  rules. 

It  is  better  to  take  the  vote  upon  the  merits  of 
the  question,  rather  than  upon  the  merits  of  the 
arguments. 

The  member  recognized  is  entitled  to  the  floor, 
but  another,  who  thinks  herself  entitled  to  it,  may 
claim  it,  and  the  matter  is  decided  by  vote. 

A  member  who  yields  the  floor  loses  the  right  to 
it.  It  is  not  discourteous  to  refuse  to  yield. 

When  the  floor  is  taken  from  a  speaker,  she  does 
not  lose  the  right  to  it,  but  resumes  it  when  the 
matter  which  interrupted  her  is  settled. 

Special  privileges,  given  to  certain  members  over 
others,  endanger  the  freedom  of  debate. 

"  General  consent,"  means  unanimous  consent. 
By  general  consent,  certain  formalities  may  be  dis- 
pensed with. 


THE  PREVIOUS  QUESTION  ?$ 


CHAPTER   VIII 

THE    PREVIOUS    QUESTION,    OR   THE 
CLOSING   OF    DEBATE 

PREVIOUS  QUESTION  DEFINED  ;  USE  OF  THE  PRE- 
VIOUS QUESTION  ;  ITS  EFFECT  ;  DEBATE  UPON 
IT  ;  ILLUSTRATION  ;  PREVIOUS  QUESTION  vs. 
MAIN  QUESTION  ;  ITS  EFFECT  UPON  OTHER 
MOTIONS  ;  ITS  EFFECT  UPON  A  PART  OF  THE 
MAIN  QUESTION  ;  "  QUESTION  !  QUESTION  !  " 
CLOSING  DEBATE  AT  A  STATED  TIME. 

54.  Previous  Question  Defined.  The  term 
"previous  question'7  is  a  technicality  that  has  come 
down  to  us  from  the  English  Parliament,  but  the  use 
of  which  is  very  different  here.  With  us,  the  mo- 
tion for  the  previous  question  is  a  motion  "  that  the 
vote  upon  the  main  question  be  taken  at  once,  with- 
out further  debate."  It  is  therefore  equivalent  to  a 
motion  "to  close  debate,"  and  the  two  motions: 
"I  move  the  previous  question,"  and  "I  move 
that  debate  be  now  closed,"  are  synonymous.  Mr. 
Fish  and  Mr.  Crocker  recommend  the  simple  form 
"that  debate  be  now  closed."  But  at  present  the 


76  MOTIONS 

form  "  previous  question  "  is  in  general  use.     So- 
cieties may  use  either  form  they  choose. 

55.  The  Use  of  the  Previous  Question.  It 
is  not  universally  agreed  that  a  motion  to  close 
debate  should  be  allowed  as  a  part  of  the  regular 
procedure,  —  the  question  whether  debate  ought 
ever  to  be  closed,  until  all  who  wish  have  spoken, 
being  a  mooted  one.  In  large  assemblies,  this 
motion  would  seem  to  be  necessary,  in  order  to  pre- 
vent interminable  debates,  and  it  can  always  be 
voted  down  by  the  majority.  In  smaller  assemblies, 
it  may  well  be  used  sparingly,  and  should  be  pro- 
hibited by  rule  wherever  there  is  danger  of  its  con- 
stant use  in  choking  discussion  or  preventing  the 
expression  of  the  views  of  the  minority.  When  it 
is  not  prohibited  by  special  rule,  it  is  parliamentary 
to  employ  it.  It  might  be  well  for  societies  to 
make  a  rule  that  it  shall  require  a  two-thirds  vote. 
This  would  guard  against  the  choking  of  debate 
by  the  vote  of  a  bare  majority.  The  motion  to 
close  debate,  in  either  of  its  forms,  is  not  allowed 
in  the  Senate  of  the  United  States,  or  in  the  State 
Senates  of  Massachusetts  and  New  York  ;  it  is 
used  in  the  other  branch  of  these  bodies.  Any 
society  which  does  not  favor  its  use  may  make  a 


THE  PREVIOUS  QUESTION  77 

special  rule  to  the  effect  that  "the  motion  for  the 
previous  question  shall  be  prohibited  in  our  club." 
56.  Its  Effect.  It  has  been  already  stated  that 
when  there  are  no  rules  limiting  debate,  debate  is 
unrestricted;  it  continues  till  all  have  spoken  who 
wish,  or  until  time  for  adjournment,  when  the  chair, 
after  asking,  "Are  you  ready  for  the  question?  "  puts 
the  motion  to  vote.  Debate  thus  ceases  of  its  own 
accord,  so  to  speak.  When  it  is  desired  to  termi- 
nate debate  and  come  to  a  decision,  the  call  for  the 
previous  question  is  the  method  employed.  The 
effect  of  this  call  is  to  close  debate  immediately 
upon  the  subject  before  the  meeting.  That  is,  the 
mere  making  and  stating  of  the  motion  for  the  pre- 
vious question,  before  it  is  decided,  closes  the  debate, 
until  that  motion  is  put  to  vote.  If,  when  put  to 
vote,1  the  motion  for  the  previous  question  is  de- 
feated, the  debate  upon  the  subject  is  resumed.  If 
the  motion  prevails,  that  debate  is  silenced  for  good, 
and  the  subject  is  at  once  put  to  vote.  The  points 
to  be  remembered  in  regard  to  this  motion  are,y£rr/, 
that  it  is  simply  a  motion  to  close  debate  and  noth- 

1  The  form  for  putting  the  question  is  :  "  Shall  the  main  question  be  now 
put?"  This  means:  Shall  further  debate  be  omitted  and  a  vote  taken  at 
once? 


78  MOTIONS 

ing  more;  and,  second,  that  when  it  is  moved  there 
come  before  the  meeting  for  immediate  vote,  two 
motions,  the  primary  motion  (the  main  question 
then  under  discussion),  and  the  secondary  motion 
(to  close  debate).  A  vote  is  to  be  regularly  taken 
upon  both  these  motions ;  first,  upon  the  secondary, 
and  then,  if  this  prevails,  upon  the  primary,  debate 
upon  the  primary  being  meanwhile  suspended.  Of 
necessity,  the  previous  question  applies  only  to 
debatable  motions,  and  it  would  seem  proper  to 
assume,  as  a  general  rule,  that  any  debatable  motion 
is  open  to  the  call  for  the  previous  question. 

57.  Debate  of  the  Motion  for  the  Previous 
-  Question.     The  motion  to  close  debate  may  itself 

be  debated  for  a  limited  time,  usually  fixed  at  ten 
minutes  at  most;  or,  it  may  be  decided  by  rule 
to  be  undebatable.  There  is  nothing  to  be  said, 
except  to  give  some  reason  why  the  main  ques- 
tion should  not  then  be  voted  upon,  and  this  can 
be  said  very  quickly.  If  a  speaker,  in  debating 
this  motion,  branches  off  into  a  discussion  of  the 
main  question,  she  is  out  of  order,  and  the  chair 
will  stop  her. 

58.  Illustration   of  the    Previous   Question. 
The  Mendon  Women's  Club  is  debating  the  ques- 


THE  PREVIOUS   QUESTION  79 

tion  of  holding  a  public  meeting.  Miss  Lovell 
thinks  it  has  been  debated  long  enough,  and  wishes 
it  to  come  to  a  vote.  Mrs.  Paine  having  finished 
her  remarks  and  taken  her  seat,  Miss  Lovell  rises, 
obtains  the  floor  in  the  usual  way,  and  says :  "  I ' 
move  the  previous  question."  The  chair  says: 
"The  previous  question  is  moved.  Shall  the  main 
question  be  now  put?  "  If  there  is  no  debate  (of  the 
motion  for  the  previous  question),  she  goes  on  at 
once,  saying:  "Those  in  favor  *  *  *  "  If  there  is 
debate,  this  is  limited,  and  is  strictly  confined  to 
giving  reasons  why  the  main  question  should  or 
should  not  then  be  voted  upon.  When  the  ten 
minutes  are  up  (or  before,  if  debate  ceases),  the 
chair  says:  "The  limit  of  debate  having  expired, 
the  vote  will  now  be  taken.  Those  in  favor  of  the 
motion  for  the  previous  question  will  say  'Aye, ' 
those  opposed,  '  No.'  *  *  It  is  a  vote,  and  the  pre- 
vious question  is  ordered."  She  then  goes  on  with- 
out pause,  and  puts  to  vote  the  main  question,  say- 
ing: "Those  in  favor  of  the  motion  that  the  club 
hold  a  public  meeting  will  say  'Aye  '  *  *  *  The 
matter  is  thus  ended.  If  any  one  attempts  to 
debate  after  the  previous  question  is  ordered,  she 
is  ruled  out  of  order.  The  club  having  voted  to 


80  MOTIONS 

come  to  a  vote  upon  the  main  question,  nothing 
may  interpose  to  prevent  the  taking  of  such  vote. 

If  the  motion  is  lost,  instead  of  carried,  the  chair 
will  say:  "It  is  not  a  vote;  the  motion  for  the  pre- 
vious question  being  lost,  debate  will  continue." 
The  discussion  is  then  resumed,  to  go  on  until 
the  previous  question  is  moved  again  (which  may  be 
done  any  time),  or  until  it  closes  by  mutual  consent, 
or  by  adjournment,  or  by  some  other  motion  which 
disposes  temporarily  of  the  main  question. 

If  the  other  form  of  the  motion  is  used,  Miss 
Lovell  will  say,  instead:  "I  move  that  the  debate 
do  now  close."  The  chair  will  state  it  in  the  same 
form,  saying :  "  It  is  moved  that  the  debate  do  now 
close.  Are  you  ready?  Those  in  favor  *  *  *  It  is 
a  vote,  and  the  debate  is  closed."  She  then  pro- 
ceeds as  above.  This  latter  form  is  simpler,  but 
not  in  such  general  use,  as  yet.  If  the  form  "  pre- 
vious question  "  is  used,  it  will  be  well,  in  socie- 
ties unfamiliar  with  its  meaning,  for  the  chair  to 
explain  its  effect.  She  may  say:  "The  previous 
question  is  moved.  The  effect  of  this  motion  is  to 
suspend  debate  until  it  is  voted  that  debate  shall,  or 
shall  not  now  close ;  if  it  prevails,  all  debate  upon 
the  main  question  closes,  and  an  immediate  vote 


THE  PREVIOUS  QUESTION  8* 

upon  it  follows.     Shall  the  main  question  be  now 
put  ? "  and  so  on,  as  above. 

59.  "  Previous    Question "  vs.    Main   Ques- 
tion.    The  word  "previous,"  is  a  little  confusing, 
and  care  should  be  taken  that  the  members  under- 
stand that  when  they  are  voting  upon  the  motion  for 
the  previous  question,  they  are  not  voting  upon  the 
main  question  itself,  but  simply  upon  the  motion 
to  dose  debate  upon  the  main  question.      Two  votes 
are  taken,  the  vote  upon  the  previous  question,  and 
then,  in  case  the  vote  for  the  previous  question  pre- 
vails,  the  vote  upon  the  main  question,   the  two 
votes  following  each  other,  with  no  business  inter- 
vening. 

60.  Effect  of  the   Previous   Question  upon 
Other  Motions.     After  the  previous   question    is 
moved  and   stated,   and  before   it   is  put  to  vote, 
the  following  action  can  be  taken:  the  raising  of  a 
question  of  privilege,  or  of  a  question  of  order,  pro- 
vided it  strictly  relates  to  the  subject  (namely,  the  call 
for  the  previous  question) ;  a  motion  to  adjourn,  a 
motion  to  lay  upon  the  table,  and  also,  in  brief,  any 
motion  relating  to  the  verbal  perfecting  of  the  main 
question,  or  to  the  manner  of  taking  the  vote  upon 
it.     Everything   must   be   decided  without  debate. 


82  MOTIONS 

New  amendments  are  not  admissible,  but  a  motion 
or  an  amendment  may  be  withdrawn  under  the  usual 
conditions. 

The  motion  for  the  previous  question  cannot  be 
amended,  nor  can  the  vote  upon  it  be  reconsidered. 

If  the  motion  to  close  debate  is  carried  while  a 
motion  "to  postpone  "  or  a  motion  "to  commit "  is 
pending,  each  of  these  is  "cut  off"  or  negatived, 
thereby.  The  reason  for  this  is  that  when  the 
assembly  votes  to  close  debate,  it  is  a  sign  that  they 
wish  to  come  to  an  immediate  vote,  and  an  immedi- 
ate vote  would  be  invalidated  by  postponement  or 
commitment.  Pending  amendments  are  not  cut  off, 
because  they  tend  to  perfect  the  main  question,  but 
debate  upon  them  is  closed,  and  no  new  ones  can  be 
admitted.  The  previous  question,  therefore,  cuts 
off  debate  upon  everything,  and  also  cuts  off  the 
existence  itself  of  the  two  motions  to  commit  and  to 
postpone.  Its  effect  upon  reconsideration  is  con- 
sidered in  sections  77  and  82. 

61.  Its  Effect  when  Moved  upon  a  Part  of  the 
Main  Question.  There  is  a  conflict  of  authorities 
as  to  whether  the  previous  question  can  be  moved 
upon  a  partoi  the  main  question,  one  opinion  being 
that  whenever  moved,  it  closes  debate  upon  the  whole 


THE  PREVIOUS  QUESTION  83 

subject,  and  that  therefore  it  cannot  be  moved  upon 
a  part  of  it.  In  reply,  it  might  be  said  (in  general) 
that,  of  necessity,  the  only  motions  upon  which  the 
previous  question  can  be  moved  are  debatable  ones, 
and  since  the  only  important  debatable  motions  that 
are  a  part  of  other  motions  are  those  to  postpone,  to 
commit,  to  amend,  and  to  postpone  indefinitely, 
it  is  chiefly  in  regard  to  those  that  the  doubt  arises. 
Can  one  move  the  previous  question  upon  an  amend- 
ment, or  upon  a  motion  to  commit,  to.  postpone,  or 
to  postpone  indefinitely,  and  have  it  apply  simply 
to  that  ?  That  is,  can  a  member  say :  "  I  move  the 
previous  question  upon  the  motion  to  commit,"  for 
instance,  and  not  have  that  motion  apply  to  the 
main  question  also? 

There  seems  to  be  no  good  reason  why  debate 
cannot  be  closed  upon  a  motion  to  commit  or  to 
postpone,  or  (especially)  upon  a  much-debated 
amendment,  distinct  from  the  main  question. 
There  is  certainly  necessity  for  it,  if  the  motion  is 
long  discussed;  and  there  is  no  hardship  attendant 
upon  it.  For  these  reasons,  the  following  practice 
is  recommended:  the  previous  question  may  be 
moved  upon  the  motions  to  postpone,  to  commit, 
and  to  postpone  indefinitely,  and  upon  an  amend- 


84  MOTIONS 

ment  or  its  secondary ;  also  upon  appeals.  If,  after 
it  is  moved  on  the  part,  it  is  also  moved  upon  the 
main  question,  — the  two  motions  being  pending  at 
once,  —  the  motion  to  close  debate  on  the  main 
question  is  put  first.  If  a  motion  to  close  debate  on 
the  main  question  were  made  first,  one  to  close 
debate  on  a  part  could  not  then  be  made. 

When  the  motion  to  close  debate  on  a  part  of  a 
question  is  made,  it  must  be  definitely  stated.  It 
will  then  be,  "  I  move  the  previous  question  upon 
the  amendment,"  etc.,  instead  of  simply,  "I  move 
the  previous  question."  If  made  and  carried,  the 
part  affected  is  put  to  vote  at  once,  and  then  debate 
goes  on  upon  the  rest  of  the  subject. 

62.  "Question!  Question!"  The  calling 
out  of  "  question  "  from  members  while  seated,  is  not 
equivalent  to  the  motion  for  the  previous  question. 
Like  the  calls  "  By  the  chair,"  and  "  From  the  floor," 
in  nominating  officers,  it  is  irregular  and  disorderly, 
and  need  not  be  heeded  by  the  chair.  The  chair 
may,  however,  by  general  consent,  consider  such  a 
call  as  an  indication  that  the  assembly  is  ready  to 
vote,  and  say:  "Are  you  ready  for  the  question?" 
and  then  put  it  to  vote.  But  she  is  not  obliged  to 
do  so,  and  may  allow  debate  to  continue  in  spite  of 


THE  PREVIOUS  QUESTION  85 

it.  One  who  wishes  to  have  the  debate  close  would 
better  properly  obtain  the  floor  and  make  the  regular 
motion  for  the  previous  question. 

63.  Closing  Debate  at  a  Stated  Time. 
Besides  the  motion  for  the  previous  question  (which 
is  a  motion  to  close  debate  at  once),  there  is  the 
motion  to  close  debate  at  some  stated  future  time. 
This  is  the  same  as  any  other  motion,  except  that  it 
maybe  made  when  another  is  pending.  It  is  better 
to  make  it,  if  possible,  before  the  debate  begins,  but 
it  may  be  made  during  the  debate.  Its  use  is  to 
prevent  an  undue,  and  at  the  same  time  to  secure 
a  sufficient,  debate.  The  form  of  this  motion  is  as 
follows :  "  I  move  that  debate  upon  this  motion  shall 
close  at  four  o'clock."  This  is  debated  for  a  lim- 
ited time,  amended  as  to  the  hour  perhaps,  and  put 
to  vote.  If  carried,  when  the  time  comes,  debate 
ceases,  and  the  subject  is  voted  upon.  If  more  debate 
is  desired  by  the  majority,  it  may  be  reconsidered, 
in  common  with  most  other  motions,  and  debate 
be  continued. 

Those  who  wish  to  study  the  previous  question 
further  are  recommended  to  read  Cushing's  manual, 
paragraphs  63-66  and  170;  Warrington's  manual, 
sections  53-60;  Crocker's  Parliamentary  Procedure, 


86  MOTIONS 

sections  55-58;  and  Fish's  Guide  to  the  Conduct  of 
Meetings,  pp.  87-90. 

SUMMARY 

The  motion  "for  the  previous  question"  and  the 
motion  "to  close  debate,"  are  synonymous. 

The  previous  question  is  moved  when  it  is  desired 
by  the  mover  to  close  debate  at  once  upon  the  sub- 
ject before  the  meeting. 

When  it  is  not  prohibited  by  special  rule,  it  is 
parliamentary  to  use  the  previous  question  in  order 
to  shut  off  debate. 

The  effect  of  the  motion  for  the  previous  question 
is  to  suspend  debate  upon  the  main  question  until 
the  vote  upon  the  previous  question  is  taken. 

If  the  motion  for  the  previous  question  prevails, 
the  main  question  is  brought  to  an  immediate  vote, 
without  further  debate. 

If  it  is  lost,  debate  upon  the  main  question  is 
resumed. 

As  a  general  rule,  motions  that  are  debatable 
may  have  the  previous  question  moved  upon  them. 

The  moving  of  the  previous  question  cuts  Qff 
debate  upon  the  main  question,  but  may  itself  be 
debated  for  a  limited  time. 


THE  PREVIOUS  QUESTION  87 

When  the  motion  to  close  debate  is  made,  two 
motions  are  brought  before  the  meeting :  one  upon 
the  previous  question  (or  motion  to  close  debate) , 
and  one  upon  the  main  question  (or  subject  under 
discussion). 

After  the  previous  question  is  called  for,  and 
before  it  is  put  to  vote,  any  of  the  few  motions  that 
may  supervene  must  be  decided  without  debate. 
New  amendments  are  cut  off,  also  pending  motions 
to  postpone  and  to  commit.  Motions  to  adjourn 
an.d  to  table,  questions  of  privilege  and  of  order, 
and  motions  regarding  the  verbal  perfecting  of  the 
measure  and  the  manner  of  voting,  are  the  only 
things  admissible. 

If  the  previous  question  is  moved  upon  an  amend- 
ment or  upon  any  debatable  dependent  motion,  the 
vote  is  taken  upon  the  dependent  question  and 
not  upon  the  main  question.  The  mover  of  such  a 
motion  must  distinctly  state  upon  what  she  wishes 
debate  to  close.  The  simple  motion  "for  the  pre- 
vious question  "  closes  debate  upon,  and  brings  to 
a  vote  the  main  question  itself. 

The  calling  of  "Question,  question"  is  not  the 
motion  for  the  previous  question,  and  need  have  no 
effect  in  closing  debate  or  compelling  a  vote. 


88  MOTIONS 

A  motion  to  close  debate  at  some  stated  future 
time,  is  a  useful  means  for  limiting  debate  within 
fair  limits.  It  is  better  to  make  it  before  the  debat- 
ing begins. 


CHAPTER   IX 
VOTING 

FORM  FOR  PUTTING  A  MOTION  TO  VOTE;  RAISING 
OF  HANDS  AND  RISING;  "THE  USUAL  MANNER;" 
BOTH  SIDES  TO  BE  PUT;  DOUBTING  THE  VOTE; 
TIES;  THE  CHAIR'S  PREROGATIVE  IN  CASE  OF 
TIES;  RIGHT  OF  THE  CHAIR  TO  VOTE  AT  ALL 
TIMES;  THE  ROLL-CALL;  VOTING  BY  BALLOT; 
DECISION  BY  LESS  OR  MORE  THAN  A  MAJORITY. 

64.  Form  for  Putting  a  Motion  to  Vote.    The 

formula  for  voting  has  already  been  given  in  chapter 
five,  it  being  inseparable  from  the  motion  itself; 
but  it  may  well  be  repeated.  After  discussion  has 
closed,  the  chair,  rising,  repeats  the  motion,  and 
puts  it  to  vote  as  follows:  "The  motion  is  that  our 
club  hold  a  public  meeting.  All  those  in  favor  will 
say  'Aye'  [the ayes  respond]  ;  those  opposed,  'No'  [the 


VOTING  89 

noes  respond'}.  It  is  a  vote."  Instead  of  "It  is  a 
vote, "  she  may  say :  "  The  motion  is  carried. "  If  the 
noes  are  in  the  majority,  she  will  say:  "It  is  not  a 
vote,"  or  "the  motion  is  lost."  This  last  utterance 
of  the  chair  is  called  "declaring  the  vote,"  and  this 
"  declaration  "  decides  the  matter.  This  method  is 
called  the  viva  voce  vote. 

If  no  one  responds  at  all,  on  either  side,  by 
general  consent  the  motion  is  presumed  to  be  car- 
ried, the  supposition  being  that  all  who  do  not 
take  the  trouble  to  oppose  are  in  favor.  It  is 
better  to  insist  upon  an  expression  in  such  a  case, 
and  to  take  another  vote,  the  chair  having  the  power 
to  order  the  ayes  and  noes  to  be  taken  again.1 

65.  Raising  of  Hands  and  Rising.  A  vote 
may  also  be  taken  by  a  raising  of  the  right  hand  or 
by  standing.  The  viva  voce  vote  is  shortest  and 
simplest,  and  therefore  the  best  for  ordinary  occa- 
sions. When  a  count  is  desirable,  one  of  these  other 
methods  is  employed.  The  chair  will  then  say: 
"Those  in  favor  will  raise  the  right  hand, "  or,  "rise 
and  stand  until  counted."  The  affirmatives  will 
then  respond  in  the  manner  indicated ;  the  secretary 
(or  two  "tellers  "  appointed  by  the  chair)  will  count 
them,  and  give  the  result  to  the  chair.  The  negative 

1  See  Addenda,  page  228. 


90  MOTIONS 

side  will  then  be  put  in  the  same  way,  the  chair 
finally  declaring  the  vote  as  follows :  "  Fifteen  have 
voted  in  the  affirmative,  and  twenty-five  in  the  nega- 
tive. The  motion  is  lost.'7 

66.  "The    Usual    Manner."      Whichever    of 
these  methods  of  voting  is  used,  it  is  the  place  of 
the  chair  to  indicate  it,  in  asking  for  the  vote.     That 
is,  she  will  say:  " Those  in  favor  will  say  '  Aye  ' 
(or  "will  rise,"  etc.)  and  not  say:  "  All  those  in  favor 
will  manifest  it  in  the  usual  manner."     There  is  no 
"usual  manner,"  and  when  this  phrase  is  used,  an 
assembly  will  not  know  definitely  what  to  do.     Some 
say  "Aye  "  (that  being  their  "usual  manner"),  while 
others   raise   the   hand    (that    being    their   "usual 
manner"),  and  uncertainty  ensues.      Even  in  a  per- 
manent society,  where  the  members  attend  regularly 
and  have  one  way  of  responding,  it  is  better  for  the 
president  to  indicate  the  manner  for  each  vote  to  be 
taken ;  and  in  a  temporary  or  a  mixed  assembly,  it 
is  absolutely  necessary  so  to  do. 

67.  Both  Sides  to  be  Put.     The  vote  is  not 
decided    until    both    sides   have    been    put    and    the 
chair  has  declared  the  result.     If  only  the  affirma- 
tive is  put,  or  if,  both  sides  having  been^put,  the 
vote  is  not  declared,  it  is  not  properly  finished,  nor 


DOUBTING    THE    VOTE  Ql 

legally  binding.  An  inexperienced  chairman  is 
quite  apt  to  forget  this,  and  to  put  the  vote  thus: 
"Those  in  favor  will  say  'Aye;  '  it  is  a  vote;"  or 
again :  "  Those  in  favor  will  say  (  Aye ;  '  those 
opposed,  li  No;  '  "  leaving  out  the  declaration.  The 
motion  is  correctly  put  when  the  following  order  is 
observed:  i.  The  chair  asks  for  the  affirmative 
vote;  2.  The  affirmatives  respond;  3.  The  chair 
asks  for  the  negative  vote;  4.  The  negatives  re- 
spond; 5.  The  chair  declares  the  result. 

68.  Doubting  the  Vote.  When  those  in  favor 
and  those  opposed  are  nearly  or  quite  equal  in  num- 
ber, there  is  apt  to  be  a  doubt  as  to  the  result  of  a 
viva  voce  vote.  After  both  sides  have  responded, 
if  the  chair  cannot  tell  which  is  in  the  majority,  she 
says :  "  The  chair  is  in  doubt.  Will  those  in  favor 
of  the  motion  rise  and  stand  until  counted  ?  "  The 
proceedings  then  follow  the  course  described  in 
section  65. 

Furthermore,  in  case  a  member  does  not  agree 
with  the  chair's  declaration,  that  member  may 
" doubt  the  vote."  Illustration:  a  motion  having 
been  put  to  vote,  and  the  chair  (believing  that 
there  are  more  ayes  than  noes)  having  declared  "  It 
is  a  vote,"  Mrs.  Robbins,  who  thinks  there  are,  or 


92  MOTIONS 

may  be,  more  noes  than  ayes,  rises,  and,  without 
waiting  for  recognition,  says :  u  Mrs.  President,  I 
doubt  the  vote."  She  then  sits,  and  the  chair  says: 
"The  vote  is  doubted;  those  in  favor  will  rise  and 
stand  until  counted,"  and  so  on,  as  in  section  65. 

Instead  of  asking  the  members  to  stand,  the  presi- 
dent may  ask  for  a  show  of  hands,  but  the  rising 
vote  is  less  liable  to  mistake.  In  a  very  large 
audience,  the  voters  may  be  asked  to  divide  into 
two  parties,  one  going  to  the  right,  and  the  other  to 
the  left  side  of  the  hall.  It  is  obvious  that  this 
clumsy  method  is  not  desirable  except  in  extreme 
cases,  and  in  temporary  meetings.  In  large,  perma- 
nent organizations,  with  a  list  of  members,  when  a 
vote  is  doubted,  the  roll-call,  or  what  is  called  in 
legislatures,  "the  yeas  and  nays,"  is  the  proper 
method  to  employ,  unless  the  simple  rising  vote 
prove  sufficient. 

If  a  viva  voce  vote  is  not  doubted,  it  stands  as 
declared  by  the  chair,  even  if  it  be  afterward  ascer- 
tained to  be  wrong,  the  supposition  being  that,  if 
they  do  not  at  once  doubt  it,  the  members  acquiesce 
in  the  chair's  decision. 

69.  Ties.  When  those  who  have  voted  in  the 
affirmative  and  those  who  have  voted  in  the  nega- 


TIE    VOTES  93 

tive  are  exactly  equal  in  number,  there  is  said  to  be 
"a  tie."  In  this  case,  one  side  exactly  neutralizes 
the  other,  and  the  motion  is  therefore  defeated. 
The  reason  why  a  tie  defeats  is  because  a  majority 
is  necessary  to  carry  a  motion,  and  a  tie  is  one  less 
than  a  majority.1  It  defeats  simply  because  it  does 
not  carry. 

70.  The  Chair's  Prerogative.  When  there  is 
a  tie  vote,  it  becomes  the  prerogative  of  the  presid- 
ing officer  (if  she  has  not  voted  already)  to  vote,  and 
thus  determine  the  result.  This  she  is  not  obliged 
to  do,  however,  and  if  she  does  not,  the  tie  remains 
and  the  measure  is  lost.  If  she  is  in  favor  of  the 
motion  she  will,  in  declaring  the  vote,  announce  as 
follows:  " Twenty  have  voted  in  the  affirmative,  and 
twenty  in  the  negative;  the  chair  is  to  be  counted 
in  the  affirmative,  and  the  motion  is  carried."  If 
she  is  opposed,  she  will  say:  "Twenty  have  voted 
in  the  affirmative,  and  twenty  in  the  negative. 
The  measure  is  lost."  Or,  she  may  say:  "The  chair 
is  to  be  counted  in  the  negative,  and  the  measure  is 
lost,"  using  her  own  option  as  to  whether  she  will 
vote  and  make  a  majority,  or  allow  the  motion  to 

1  There  is  one  apparent  exception.  In  appeals  from  the  decision  of  the 
chair  upon  points  of  order,  a  tie  vote  sustains  the  chair.  See  section  155. 


94  MOTIONS 

fail  by  a  tie  alone,  the  result  being  the  same  in 
either  case.  The  only  advantage  in  the  latter 
method  is  that  she  shows  the  courage  of  her  convic- 
tions. 

The  chair  may  also  vote  to  make  a  tie,  and  thus 
defeat  a  motion.  If  twenty  have  voted  in  favor, 
and  nineteen  against,  and  the  chair  wishes  to  defeat 
the  motion,  she  will  say,  in  declaring  the  vote: 
"Twenty  have  voted  in  the  affirmative  and  nineteen 
in  the  negative ;  the  chair  votes  with  the  negative, 
and  the  motion  is  lost." 

71.  Right  of  the  Chair  to  Vote.  The  presi- 
dent, being  a  member  of  the  assembly,  has  the  same 
right  to  express  her  choice  and  to  be  counted,  as 
has  every  other  member.  This  right  is  seldom 
exercised  except  in  case  of  a  tie,  but  it  exists,  the 
only  exception  being  when  the  presiding  officer  is 
not  a  member,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Vice-President 
of  the  United  States,  who,  as  President  of  the 
Senate,  has  no  vote  unless  the  Senate  be  equally 
divided.  The  President  pro  tempore  of  the  U.  S. 
Senate  is  a  member,  and  entitled  to  vote. 

Where  the  roll-call  is  used,  the  presiding  officer's 
name  is  called  in  turn,  with  those  of  the  other  mem- 
bers, and  she  responds  or  not.  If  she  does  respond, 


THE  ROLL-CALL  9$ 

and  the  vote  is  a  tie,  she  cannot  vote  again,  for  no 
one  is  entitled  to  two  votes.  If  she  does  not  re- 
spond and  there  is  a  tie,  she  will,  in  declaring  the 
vote,  declare  her  own  vote  in  the  manner  already 
shown. 

72.  The  Roll-Call.  The  viva  voce  and  the 
rising  vote,  the  show  of  hands  and  the  division  into 
two  groups,  have  already  been  explained.  The  roll- 
call,  unlike  these  others,  is  not  employed  at  the 
option  of  the  chair,  but  by  a  motion  and  vote.  In 
cases  where  it  is  desirable  to  secure  a  record  of 
votes  in  order  to  know  where  persons  stand  upon 
a  certain  measure,  the  yeas  and  nays  are  useful 
and  necessary.  And  since  it  might  be  difficult  to 
secure  a  majority  vote  in  favor  of  having  the  roll 
called,  it  is  usually  provided  by  rule  that  a  small 
proportion  of  the  members  present  (say  one-fifth) 
shall  have  a  right  to  demand  it.  This  provision 
is  almost  universal  in  deliberative  bodies,  and  is 
recommended  for  all  permanent  societies. 

When  the  time  comes  for  the  vote  to  be  taken,  or 
at  any  time  previous,  any  member  who  wishes  a 
record  of  votes,  obtains  the  floor  in  the  usual  way, 
and  moves :  "  That  when  the  vote  is  taken,  it  be  taken 
by  yeas  and  nays."  This  motion  is  put  to  vote 


96  MOTIONS 

without  debate,  and  if  one-fifth  of  those  present  vote 
in  the  affirmative,  the  chair  declares:  "One-fifth 
having  voted  in  the  affirmative,  the  yeas  and  nays 
are  ordered."  The  secretary,  or  clerk,  then  rises, 
takes  the  alphabetical  list,  and  calls  off  each  name, 
slowly  and  clearly,  speaking  it  a  second  time  (but 
not  a  third)  if  the  person  does  not  respond  at  first 
Each  member,  as  her  name  is  called,  answers 
"Yes991  or  "IVo"  (not  "Yea"  and  "Nay"),  the 
clerk  marking  each  name  with  a  cross  or  other  sym- 
bol, and  indicating  in  some  way  which  are  yeas  and 
which  nays.  A  good  way  is  to  mark  the  yeas  on 
the  right  of  the  name,  and  the  nays  on  the  left,  and 
then  they  will  be  all  ready  to  count  in  columns. 
The  votes  are  then  counted  by  the  secretary,2  and  the 
result  announced  by  the  chair  in  the  same  way  as  in 
declaring  the  rising  vote.  This  is  called  "  taking  the 
yeas  and  nays,"  not  "the  ayes  and  noes." 

73.  Voting  by  Ballot.  When  secrecy  is 
desired,  a  vote  is  taken  by  ballot.  This  method 
has  already  been  explained  in  section  14.  It  is  a 
long  and  slow  process,  desirable  chiefly  in  elections 

1  In  distinction  from  -viva  voce  voting,  wher.  the  response  is  "  Aye." 

2  An  experienced  clerk  will  sometimes  count  as  she  goes  along,  marking 
j,  2,  3,  4,  against  the  names  on  each  side,  as  they  respond. 


VOTING  BY  BALLOT  97 

to  membership  and  to  office,  and  in  securing  an  ex- 
pression of  opinion  upon  questions  where  members 
are  prevented,  for  personal  reasons,  from  debating 
and  voting  openly.  A  motion  for  a  ballot  is  made 
and  put  to  vote  like  any  ordinary  motion,  and  is 
decided  by  the  majority. 

74.  Deciding  by  Less  or  More  than  a 
Majority.  It  is  the  general  rule  that  a  majority, 
for  or  against,  decides  a  vote ;  and  this  is  true  in 
all  except  a  few  cases.  Only  a  one-fifth  vote  is 
required  for  the  calling  of  the  yeas  and  nays,  as  has 
been  said,  and  in  certain  matters,  such  as  amending 
a  constitution,  expulsion  of  members,  or  suspension 
of  rules,  a  two-thirds,  a  three-fourths,  or  even  a  unan- 
imous vote  may  be  required.  Any  special  matter, 
the  carrying  of  which  by  a  bare  majority  would  work 
hardship,  should  be  protected  by  a  rule  requiring  a 
larger  vote,  and  such  rule  should  be  inserted  in  the 
by-laws  of  the  society  in  question. 

SUMMARY 

The  three  ordinary  ways  of  voting  are  by  respond- 
ing "Aye"  and  "No"  (called  a  viva  voce  vote),  by 
raising  the  right  hand,  and  by  rising.  If  no  one 


98  MOTIONS 

responds  on  either  side,  the  motion  is  presumed  to 
be  carried. 

Whichever  method  is  employed,  the  chair  should 
indicate  it  in  putting  the  motion  to  vote.  She 
should  not  say:  "  Manifest  it  in  the  usual  manner." 

In  putting  to  vote,  both  the  affirmative  and  the 
negative  sides  must  be  put,  and  the  result  must  be 
declared  by  the  chair. 

Any  viva  voce  vote  may  be  doubted,  either  by  the 
chair  or  by  a  member.  When  doubted,  the  sense  of 
the  meeting  is  taken  over  again  by  a  rising  vote,  or 
by  some  other  method  which  secures  a  count. 

A  tie  vote  is  one  in  which  both  sides  are  equal 
in  number.  A  tie  defeats  the  motion. 

In  case  of  a  tie,  the  chair  may  vote  in  the  affirm- 
ative, thus  carrying  the  motion ;  or  she  may  vote  in 
the  negative  or  not  vote  at  all,  thus  refusing  to  break 
the  tie  and  defeating  the  motion.  She  may  also  vote 
so  as  to  make  a  tie. 

The  chairman,  when  a  member,  may  always  vote, 
but  usually  will  not,  except  in  case  of  a  tie. 

If  one-fifth  of  those  present  desire  it,  a  vote  may 
be  taken  by  the  roll-call  of  members.  They  then 
respond  "Yes"  or  "No." 

Where  secrecy  is  desired,  voting  by  written  or 
printed  ballot  is  employed. 


RECONSIDERATION  OF   VOTES         99 

Motions  are  usually  decided  by  the  majority. 
More  or  less  than  a  majority  may  decide  certain 
questions,  and  each  society  will  adopt  its  own  special 
rules  on  these  matters. 


CHAPTER  X 
RECONSIDERATION  OF  VOTES 

RECONSIDERATION  DEFINED;  NATURE  OF  THE 
MOTION  TO  RECONSIDER;  ITS  EFFECT;  TECHNI- 
CAL RECONSIDERATION;  WHEN  THE  MOTION  TO 
RECONSIDER  is  MADE;  WHO  MAY  MAKE  IT;  A 
POSSIBLE  COMPROMISE  OF  CONFLICTING  OPINIONS; 
DEBATE  UPON  RECONSIDERATION;  THE  "PRE- 
VAILING SIDE"  ;  ILLUSTRATION;  VOTES  THAT 
CANNOT  BE  RECONSIDERED;  THIS  MOTION  TO  BE 
SPARINGLY  EMPLOYED. 

75.  Reconsideration  Defined.  After  the  vote 
has  been  taken  upon  a  motion,  and  that  motion  is 
carried,  or  lost,  the  general  rule  is  that  the  matter 
is  ended.  It  is  supposable,  however,  that  members 
may  change  their  minds,  and  wish  to  change  their 
votes,  and,  in  order  to  provide  for  this,  parliamen- 


100  MOTIONS 

tary  practice  admits  of  what  is  called  "the  motion 
to  reconsider.'7  As  its  name  implies,  this  is  a  motion 
to  consider  again,  and  its  legitimate  use  is  to  pre- 
vent or  reverse  hasty  or  ill-considered  action. 

76.  Nature  of  the    Motion   to   Reconsider. 
The  motion  to  reconsider  is  a  motion  to  reconsider 
a  vote,  and  not  to  reconsider  a  motion.     It  is  applied 
to   a  question  after  the  vote  upon  it  is  has  been 
taken,   and   its  object  is   to  "reconsider,"  or  take 
again,  such  vote.  . 

77.  Its  Effect.     The  effect  of  this  motion,  if  it 
prevails,  is  to  place  again  before  the  meeting  the  sub- 
ject, (the  vote  upon  which  has  been  reconsidered,) 
in  precisely  the  same  condition  as  if  the  vote  had 
never  been  passed.    It  cancels  the  vote,  and  re-opens 
the  topic  for  discussion.     Debate  is  resumed  (this 
is   true  whether   the   previous  question   had   been 
moved  upon  the  vote  or  not),   the  question  is  re- 
opened for  any  and  all  action,  and  is  finally  voted 
on  again. 

The  effect  of  this  motion,  if  it  is  lost,  is  to  deny 
the  re-opening  of  the  subject,  and  to  clinch  or  re-af- 
firm the  vote  upon  it ;  it  closes  the  matter,  in  short, 
finally  and  for  good;  for  it  is  a  parliamentary  prin- 
ciple that  no  vote  can  be  twice  reconsidered,  This 


RECONSIDERATION  OF   VOTES        JO  I 

means  that  only  one  motion  to  reconsider  can  be 
made  in  reference  to  any  one  vote.  Whether  the 
motion  prevails  or  not,  it  cannot  be  repeated; 
having  been  once  reconsidered,  the  vote  stands. 
The  measure'  can  then  come  up  again  only  at 
some  time  far  enough  distant,  and  in  some  form 
sufficiently  different,  to  make  of  it  a  substantially 
new  proposition. 

78.  Technical  Reconsideration.  In  conse- 
quence of  the  effect  of  the  motion  to  reconsider  when 
defeated,  there  has  grown  into  use  another  kind  of 
reconsideration,  the  object  of  which  is  directly  op- 
posite to  that  of  genuine  reconsideration,  though  its 
effect  is  the  same.  While  a  genuine  motion  to 
reconsider  is  made  in  good  faith,  for  the  purpose  of 
gaining  fresh  discussion  and  another  vote,  the  tech- 
nical or  disingenuous  motion  to  reconsider  is  made 
for  the  purpose  of  preventing  fresh  discussion,  by 
closing  the  matter  at  once. 

In  other  words,  it  checkmates  a  possible  genuine 
reconsideration  by  clinching  the  vote,  and  thus 
closing  the  matter  for  good.  Unlike  the  genuine 
motion,  which,  in  common  with  other  motions,  is 
made  by  a  person  who  wishes  it  to  pass,  this 
motion  is  made  by  one  who  wishes  it  to  be  defeated, 


102  MOTIONS 

and  desires  the' matter  not  to  be  really  reconsidered, 
but  to-be  ended.  A  member  of  the  party  which 
has  carried  or  defeated  a  measure  will  make  a 
motion  to  reconsider  immediately  after  the  vote 
has  passed;  her  constituents  will  then  join  with  her 
to  defeat  it,  and  thus,  by  denying  the  reconsidera- 
tion, clinch  the  vote  and  secure  at  once  their  object, 
safe  from  reversal. 

79.  When    the    Motion    to   Reconsider    is 
Made.     This  motion  is  made  only  at  the  same  ses- 
sion, or  at  the  session  following  the  one,  at  which 
the  vote  it  relates  to  was  taken.     If  made  at  the 
same  session,  it  may  be  considered  at  once,  or  put 
in  the  order  of  business  for  the  succeeding  session ; 
if  made  at  the  second  session,  it  is  considered  at 
once.     It  does  not  follow,  however,  in  either  case, 
that  the  measure  shall  be  at  once  decided.     If  the 
motion  prevails,  and  the  matter  is  re-opened,  it  is 
subject  to  postponement,  as  well  as  to  any  and  all 
other  action.     If  the  motion  is  lost,  that  decides  the 
measure  finally. 

80.  Who  May  Move  to  Reconsider.     In  one 
important  respect,  the  motion  to  reconsider  differs 
from  other  motions.     Other  motions  may  be  made 
by  any  member  of  the  meeting,  while  this  particular 


RECONSIDERATION  OF   VOTES       103 

motion  may  be  made  only  by  a  member  who  voted  with 
the  prevailing  side.  The  chief  reason  for  this  restric- 
tion is  that  after  a  matter  is  decided,  it  is  not  fair 
to  the  party  which  has  decided  it,  that  they  should 
be  made  liable  to  the  danger  of  a  reconsideration 
when  they  may  be  deficient  in  numbers.  A  member 
of  the  defeated  side  would  naturally  wish  to  get 
another  vote,  and  be  ready  to  move  a  reconsidera- 
tion when  the  prevailing  side  was  weak.  It  seems 
fair,  therefore,  that  only  a  member  of  the  successful 
party  shall  have  this  privilege.  Furthermore,  if 
there  is  some  good  reason  for  re-opening  a  ques- 
tion, it  will  be  easy  for  the  minority  to  persuade  a 
member  of  the  prevailing  party  to  move  to  recon- 
sider, for  the  sake  of  fairness.  The  rule  is  there- 
fore a  good  one,  because  it  works  fairly. for  both 
sides. 

The  general  supposition  is  that  every  question 
is  fully  discussed  and  fairly  voted  upon  in  the  first 
place,  and  that  only  for  some  excellent  reason 
should  it  be  re-opened.  Restrictions  are  for  pro 
tection,  and  to  guard  against  surprises.  This  re- 
striction prevails  generally  in  legislatures  and  large 
assemblies;  it  seems  to  the  writer  to  be  a  correct 
principle,  supported  by  reason  and  justice,  and  it 


104  MOTIONS 

is  therefore  recommended.  If  thought  undesirable 
by  any  society,  however,  a  special  rule  may  be 
adopted  to  the  effect  that  the  motion  to  reconsider 
may  be  made  by  any  member.  It  should  be  added 
also,  that  certain  authorities  teach  that  in  absence  of 
a  special  rule,  any  member  may  move  to  recon- 
sider, whether  of  the  prevailing  side  or  not.  Like 
all  other  parliamentary  rules  which  are  not  yet  so 
firmly  established  as  to  become  absolutely  binding, 
this  rule  may  be  adopted  or  not,  and  any  society, 
in  deciding  the  matter,  will  follow  the  authority  it 
adopts  as  its  guide;  or  it  may  make  special  rules 
for  itself. 

81.  A  Possible  Compromise  of  Conflicting 
Opinions.  A  compromise  between  these  two 
methods  seems  to  the  writer  to  be  desirable ;  and  in 
the  hope  that  some  such  compromise  may  ultimately 
be  adopted  to  take  their  place,  the  following  is  sug- 
gested as  a  good  rule :  a  motion  to  reconsider,  when 
made  at  the  same  meeting,  at  which  the  vote  is  taken, 
may  be  moved  by  any  member;  when  made  at  the  suc- 
ceeding meeting,  it  may  be  made  only  by  a  member  of 
the  prevailing  side.  This  would  guard  against  sur- 
prise at  the  succeeding  meeting,  and,  at  the  same 
time,  make  possible  the  introduction  of  new  argu- 


RECONSIDERATION  OF   VOTES        105 

ments  at  the  time.  The  necessity  for  these  could 
be  shown  in  the  debate  upon  the  motion  to  recon- 
sider, and  thus  an  affirmative  vote  might  possibly 
be  secured,  and  the  question  be  re-opened. 

82.  Debate  upon  Reconsideration.     The  de- 
bate upon  this  motion,  like  the  debate  upon  the 
previous  question,  is  limited  as  to  time,  say  to  ten 
minutes  or  less,  the  obvious  reason  being  that  there 
will  be  little  to  say  except  to  give  reasons  why  more 
debate   is   needed,    and   these   can  be   given  very 
quickly.     If  the  debate  encroaches  upon  the  main 
question,  the  speaker  is  called  to  order.     It  is  also 
true  that  the  previous  question  may  be  ordered  upon 
the  motion  to  reconsider,   as  upon  all  other  inde- 
pendent motions,  thus  cutting  off  all  debate  what- 
ever.    If  this  is  done,  it  is  a  pretty  sure  indication 
that  the  majority  do  not  wish  to  hear  any  more,  and 
have  made  up  their  minds  not  to  reconsider. 

83.  The  "  Prevailing  Side."    The  "prevailing 
side  "  is  not  necessarily  the  affirmative  side  or  the 
majority.     If  the  motion  or  proposition  is  defeated, 
it  is  one  of  the  negative  voters  who  is  of  the  pre- 
vailing side,  and  who  may  move  the  reconsideration. 
In  the  case  of  a  two-thirds  vote  being  necessary  to 
carry  a  measure,  if  the  measure  is  defeated,   it  is 


106  MOTIONS 

one  of  the  one-third  who  is  of  the  prevailing  side. 
In  case  of  a  tie  vote,  one  of  those  who  voted  "  No  "  is 
of  the  prevailing  side,  and  where  a  unanimous  vote 
is  necessary,  and  is  not  secured,  some  one  who  pre- 
vented unanimity  is  of  the  prevailing  side;  even  if 
it  be  but  one  person,  she  alone  can  move  the  recon- 
sideration. 

84.  Illustration  of  Reconsideration.  In  this 
illustration  it  is  assumed  that  the  making  of  this 
motion  is  restricted  to  a  member  of  the  prevailing 
side. 

The  Mendon  Women's  Club  has  passed  the 
motion  "that  the  club  hold  a  public  meeting.'7  The 
vote  has  been  regularly  taken  and  recorded,  and 
presumably  the  matter  is  ended.  But  Mrs.  Allen, 
coming  in  late  and  not  getting  a  chance  to  speak, 
wishes  to  give  some  reasons  why  the  project  is  not 
feasible  at  that  time.  Either  at  the  same  meeting 
or  at  the  following  one,  she  obtains  the  floor,  and 
says:  "Mrs.  President,  I  move  a  reconsideration  of 
the  vote  by  which  our  club  has  voted  to  hold  a 
public  meeting."  She  then  sits,  and  the  president 
says:  "A  reconsideration  can  be  moved  only  by  a 
member  of  the  prevailing  side.  If  Mrs.  Allen  voted 
for  this  measure,  the  motion  is  in  order;  otherwise 


RECONSIDERATION  OF   VOTES        1 07 

not."  Then,  if  a  yea  and  nay  vote  had  been  taken, 
the  record  is  scanned  to  see  if  Mrs.  Allen  was  on 
the  prevailing  side.  If  there  is  no  recorded  vote 
by  names,  Mrs.  Allen  will  reply.:  "  I  voted  with  the 
prevailing  side,"  or,  "I  did  not  vote  with  the  pre- 
vailing side,"  as  the  case  may  be.  If  she  did  not, 
her  motion  is  not  in  order,  and  unless  some  mem- 
ber of  the  prevailing  side,  out  of  courtesy  for  her, 
renews  the  motion  for  her,  it  is  not  stated  by  the 
chair. 

If  Mrs.  Allen  voted  with  the  prevailing  side,  the 
chair  says:  "A  motion  is  made  to  reconsider  the 
vote  whereby  the  club  decided  to  hold  a  public 
meeting.  Are  you  ready?  \A  limited  debate  may  fol- 
low, confined  strictly  to  giving  reasons  why  the  question 
should  or  should  not  be  re-opened  for  debate, ,]  Those 
in  favor  of  reconsideration  will  say  'Aye; '  *  *  those 
opposed,  '  No. '  *  *  It  is  a  vote.  The  vote  is  re- 
considered and  the  subject  is  again  before  you  for 
discussion."  If  the  noes  are  in  the  majority,  the 
chair  will  say  instead  :  "It  is  not  a  vote.  The 
motion  to  reconsider  is  lost,  and  the  vote  to  hold  a 
public  meeting  stands." 

85.  Votes  that  Cannot  Be  Reconsidered. 
Votes  upon  the  following  motions,  whether  decided 


108  MOTIONS 

affirmatively  or  negatively,  cannot  be  reconsidered 
at  all:  to  adjourn,  to  lay  upon  the  table,  for  the 
previous  question,  to  commit  (after  the  committee 
has  gone  to  work),  to  reconsider;  also,  appeals, 
elections,  and  ballots.  Of  course,  no  vote  can  be 
reconsidered  which  has  been  acted  upon. 

86.  Reconsideration  to  be  Sparingly  Em- 
ployed. Mr.  Fish,  in  his  "  Guide  to  the  Conduct 
of  Meetings,"  says:  "The  motion  to  reconsider  is  of 
American  origin,  and  is  properly  used  only  when  the 
object  cannot  be  attained  in  any  other  way."  It  is 
best,  in  other  words,  to  do  all  the  debating  that  is 
necessary  before  the  vote  is  taken,  and  to  consider 
every  question  fully  and  fairly,  so  that  there  will 
be  no  excuse  for  reconsideration.  If  this  is  done, 
there  will  be  little  need  for  reconsideration;  it 
will  then  be  employed  only  in  emergencies,  and 
therefore,  as  has  been  said,  the  motion  may  well  be 
restricted  to  the  prevailing  side. 

Enough  has  been  said  of  this  matter  to  suffice  for 
ordinary  use.  Those  who  may  wish  to  study  it 
further  are  referred  to  chapter  fourteen  of  Cushing's 
manual,  sections  71-80  of  Warrington's  manual,  and 
chapter  twenty  of  Crocker's  Parliamentary  Proce- 
dure. 


RECONSIDERATION  OF   VOTES        109 

SUMMARY 

A  vote,  having  been  taken  and  declared,  is  settled, 
unless,  at  the  same  or  the  next  succeeding  session, 
it  is,  by  vote,  considered  again. 

The  effect  of  the  motion  to  reconsider,  if  carried, 
is  to  cancel  the  vote  and  re -open  the  question  for 
discussion.  Its  effect,  if  lost,  is  to  close  the  ques- 
tion for  good. 

No  vote  can  be  twice  reconsidered. 

The  motion  to  reconsider  may  be  made  only  by  a 
member  who  voted  with  the  prevailing  party.  Some 
authorities  say  it  may  be  made  by  any  member.  A 
good  rule  for  assemblies  to  make  would  be  a  com- 
promise between  these  positions,  allowing  any  mem- 
ber to  make  the  motion  when  made  the  same  day, 
and  only  a  member  of  the  prevailing  side  to  make  it 
when  it  is  made  at  the  succeeding  session. 

The  motion  to  reconsider  may  be  debated  for  a 
limited  time. 

The  "prevailing  party"  may  be  the  affirmative 
or  the  negative  side;  it  is  the  side  that  prevails,  or 
by  which  the  matter  is  decided. 

A  vote  cannot  be  reconsidered  after  it  has  influ- 
enced subsequent  action.  Certain  technical  motions 
are  not  open  to  reconsideration. 


110  MOTIONS 

Reconsideration  is  to  be  used  only  as  a  last  re- 
sort. 

Propositions  would  better  be  fully  discussed 
before  they  are  decided,  than  to  be  re-opened  by 
reconsideration. 


PART    III 

AMENDMENT 


CHAPTER  XI 
NATURE    AND   EFFECT  OF   AMENDMENT 

NATURE  OF  AMENDMENT;  AMENDMENTS  MUST  BE 
GERMANE;  EFFECT  OF  A  MOTION  TO  AMEND; 
PRIMARY  AND  SECONDARY  AMENDMENT;  ILLUS- 
TRATION; MORE  THAN  ONE  AMENDMENT  AT 
ONCE;  GIVING  NOTICE;  ACCEPTING  THE  AMEND- 
MENT. 

87.  Nature  of  Amendment.  Thus  far,  we 
have  considered  the  simple  motion,  one  not  altered 
in  any  way,  but  voted  upon  in  its  original  form. 
With  the  complex  motion,  the  mode  of  procedure 
is  the  same.  It  is  made,  stated,  put,  withdrawn, 
debated,  and  reconsidered  in  the  same  way  as  the 
simple  one.  A  motion,  however,  may  be  altered, 
enlarged,  or  changed  into  an  entirely  different  one, 
and  the  process  of  altering  the  form  and  sense  of  a 
motion  is  called  "amendment."  The  legitimate  use 
of  amendment,  as  its  name  implies,  is  "to  make 
better"  the  matter  under  consideration;  but,  since 


1 1 4  AMENDMENT 

minds  differ  as  to  what  is  better,  the  real  practice 
of  amending  is  to  alter  in  any  way,  even  if  thereby 
the  purpose  of  the  measure  or  the  intent  of  the 
mover  is  contradicted. 

88.  Amendments  Must  be  Germane.  There 
is  one  restriction  upon  amendment.  Any  proposed 
change  must  be  "germane,"  or  relevant,  to  the  origi- 
nal measure.  No  matter  how  hostile  it  may  be  ;  if 
it  is  germane,  it  is  permissible.  But  if  it  is  on  a 
different  subject,  it  is  ruled  out  of  order,  either  by  the 
chair  or  by  a  point  of  order,  as  "  not  germane."  An 
amendment  also  must  not  be  "obviously  trivial,"  or 
foolish.  Illustrations :  The  Mendon  Women's  Club 
has  under  consideration  a  motion  "  That  the  treasurer 
be  instructed  to  ascertain  the  price  of  the  several 
halls  in  town,  with  a  view  to  securing  a  permanent 
place  of  meeting  for  the  club."  Mrs.  Burns  moves 
to  amend  by  striking  out  the  words  "  the  treasurer  " 
and  inserting  the  words  "  the  president ; "  or,  to 
amend  by  adding,  after  the  word  "halls,"  the  words 
"and  vestries;"  or,  to  amend  by  striking  out  all 
after  the  word  "  instructed  "  and  inserting  instead, 
the  words  "to  hire  a  hall  for  a  permanent  place  of 
meeting."  All  these  are  relevant  amendments, 
though,  as  will  be  seen,  they  change  the  intent  of 


NATURE  OF  AMENDMENT          US 

the  original  motion.  But  suppose  Mrs.  Burns  should 
move  to  amend  by  striking  out  the  words:  "a  per- 
manent place  of  meeting  for  the  club/'  and  inserting 
the  words:  "a  place  for  a  public  entertainment;  " 
this  would  be  irrelevant  and  would  be  ruled  out  of 
order  as  "not  germane,"  because  it  is  an  entirely 
different  question.  The  chair  would  say:  "The 
motion  of  Mrs.  Burns  to  amend  by  inserting  the 
words  "a  place  for  a  public  entertainment"  instead 
of  the  words  "  a  permanent  place  of  meeting  "  is  out 
of  order,  the  proposed  amendment  not  being  germane 
to  the  subject  under  consideration,  which  is  the 
finding  of  a  place  for  our  regular  meetings  and  not 
the  holding  of  an  entertainment." 

Again,  if  Mrs.  Burns  had  moved  that  the  word 
"Vermont "  be  inserted  in  place  of  the  word  "town," 
this  would  be  ruled  out  of  order  as  "obviously 
trivial."  The  general  practice  in  regard  to  this 
matter  is  thus  concisely  stated  in  the  rule  of  the 
United  States  House  of  Representatives:  "No 
motion  or  proposition  on  a  subject  different  from 
that  under  consideration  shall  be  admitted  under 
color  of  amendment,"  and  Warrington  adds:  "A 
member  who  offers  a  proposition  in  good  faith  is 
entitled  to  a  vote  upon  it  unembarrassed  by  other 


1 16  AMENDMENT 

subjects,  though  he  must  submit  to  hostile  amend- 
ments on  the  same  general  subject/'  There  is 
no  hardship  in  admitting  amendments  which  change 
the  intent  of  the  motion,  for  "the  assembly  is  sup- 
posed to  know  what  it  wants,  and  will  reject  them 
if  it  desires  to  do  so. "  1 

89.  Effect  of  a  Motion  to  Amend.  The  effect 
of  an  offered  amendment  is  to  place  two  motions 
before  the  assembly,  the  motion  to  amend  and  the 
main  question.  And,  since  a  question  must  be  per- 
fected before  it  is  put  to  vote,  the  amendment  is  first 
considered  and  voted  upon  ;  and  then,  when  that  is 
decided,  the  main  question,  "as  amended,"  is  dis- 
cussed and  voted  upon. 

Illustration :  The  motion  "  that  the  treasurer  be 
instructed  to  ascertain  the  prices  of  the  several  halls 
in  town,"  etc.,  being  under  consideration,  Mrs.  Paine 
obtains  the  floor  and  says:  "I  move  to  amend  by 
inserting,  after  the  word  *  halls, '  the  words  '  and  ves- 
tries. '"  The  chair  says:  "You  hear  the  motion  of 
Mrs.  Paine  to  insert  the  words  '  and  vestries, '  after 
the  word  '  halls. '  Are  you  ready  for  the  question  ?  " 
Debate  follows,  upon  the  amendment  only,  and  it  is 
then  put  to  vote,  like  any  other  motion.  If  it  is 

1  Warrington's  manual,  sections  89  and  121. 


EFFECT  OF  AMENDMENT  II 7 

adopted,  the  words  "  and  vestries "  become  a  part 
of  the  main  question,  and  when  the  vote  is  finally 
taken  upon  that,  the  chair  will  say:  "The  question 
is  upon  the  original  motion  as  amended.  The  mo- 
tion is  as  follows.  [She  repeats  it  in  its  present  form, 
with  whatever  amendments  have  been  incorporated 
in  it,  and  then  puts  it  to  voteJ\ 

90.  Primary  and  Secondary  Amendment. 
Besides  the  one  amendment,  there  may  also  be 
offered  an  amendment  to  an  amendment ;  that  is,  a 
modification  of  the  amendment  may  be  proposed, 
which  bears  the  same  relation  to  it,  as  it  in  turn,  bears 
to  the  main  question.  In  this  case,  the  former  may  be 
called  the  "  primary,"  and  the  latter  the  " second- 
ary "  amendment.  The  former  is  an  amendment  to 
the  original  motion;  the  latter  is  an  amendment 
to  the  amendment,  and,  through  it,  to  the  original 
motion.  The  secondary  amendment  is  first  decided 
(because  the  primary  amendment,  before  being 
voted  upon,  is  to  be  perfected),  and  the  vote  is 
then  taken  upon  "the  amendment  as  amended." 
There  are  thus  three  motions  to  be  put  to  vote  :  i. 
The  vote  on  the  secondary;  2.  The  vote  on  the 
primary ;  3.  The  vote  on  the  perfected  main  question. 

This  is  as  far  as  the  amending  can  go ;  there  can  be 


1 1 8  AMENDMENT 

no  amendment  to  an  amendment  to  an  amendment, 
because  confusion  would  result. 

After  one  amendment  is  decided  upon,  -whether  it 
be  adopted  or  defeated,  another  may  be  offered,  then 
another,  and  another,  and  so  on.  This  is  true  of 
both  the  primary  and  the  secondary  amendment. 
The  reason  for  this  is  because  after  the  amendment 
is  voted  upon,  there  remains  only  the  one  question 
(or  the  two  in  case  of  the  secondary)  before  the 
meeting,  and  the  restriction  in  regard  to  amending 
extends  only  to  forbidding  more  than  three  motions  at 
a  time:  i.  The  original;  2.  The  primary  amendment; 
3.  The  secondary  amendment.  Therefore,  as  soon 
as  one  secondary  is  disposed  of,  the  way  is  left  open 
for  another,  and  so  on.  The  principle  is  that  an 
amendment,  if  adopted,  becomes  an  integral  part  of  the 
motion  to  which  it  relates,  which  motion  then  takes 
on  the  new  form,  and  is  considered  in  the  new  form 
as  if  it  were  that  originally;  one  amendment  with 
its  secondaries  being  disposed  of,  another  may  be 
moved  and  then  another,  until  the  original  motion 
is  in  the  form  desired  by  the  majority;  and  then  it 
is  put  to  vote. 

91.  Illustration  of  Primary  and  Secondary 
Amendment,  The  Mendon  Women's  Club  has 


ILLUSTRATION  OF  AMENDMENT        1 19 

under  consideration  the  motion  "that  the  club  estab- 
lish a  library  of  books  and  magazines  for  the  use  of 
the  members."  The  chair  has  placed  the  motion 
before  the  club,  and  it  has  been  discussed.  Mrs. 
Robbins  wishes  to  offer  an  amendment,  and  the 
following  process  is  followed  :  — 

Mrs.  Robbins  (rising).     Mrs.  President. 

The  Chair  (rising).     Mrs.  Robbins. 

Mrs.  Robbins.  I  move  to  amend  this  motion  by 
inserting  the  word  " newspapers"  after  the  word 
"  magazines  "  *  (sits). 

The  Chair.  You  hear  the  motion  of  Mrs.  Robbins ; 
to  insert  the  word  "  newspapers "  after  the  word 
"magazines,"  so  that  the  motion  shall  read  —  "a 
library  of  books,  magazines,  and  newspapers."  Are 
you  ready  for  the  question  ? 

Mrs.  Paine.     Mrs.  President. 

The  Chair.     Mrs.  Paine. 

Mrs.  Paine.  I  move  to  amend  this  amendment 
by  inserting  the  word  "weekly"  before  the  word 
"'newspapers." 

The  Chair.  Mrs.  Paine  moves  to  insert  the  word 
"weekly"  before  the  word  "newspapers."  Are  you 

1  It  is  to  be  noted  that  she  says  "  the  word  newspapers,"  and  not 
simply  "newspapers." 


1 2O  A  MENDMENT 

ready  ?     [Debate  follows  upon  the  insertion  of  the  word 
"weekly."] 

The  Chair.  The  first  question  is  upon  the  motion 
to  amend  the  amendment,  by  inserting  the  word 
" weekly.''"  Those  in  favor  will  say  "Aye;"  *  * 
those  opposed,  "No."  *  *  It  is  a  vote.  The  ques- 
tion now  comes  upon  the  amendment  as  amended, 
namely,  the  insertion  of  the  words  "and  weekly 
newspapers  "•  after  the  word  " magazines."  Are  you 
ready  to  vote?  [Debate  upon  the  amendment  as 
amended.]  Those  in  favor  will  say  "Aye;  *  *  those 
opposed,  "  No."  *  *  It  is  carried,  and  the  words  are 
inserted.  The  question  now  comes  upon  the  origi- 
nal motion  as  amended;  namely,  "that  the  club 
establish  a  library  of  books,  magazines,  and  weekly 
newspapers  for  the  use  of  the  members."  Are  there 
any  further  amendments?  \If  there  are,  they  are 
moved  in  the  same  way, ,]  If  not,  those  in  favor  of 
the  motion  in  its  present  amended  form  will  say 
"Ave  "  *  *  *l 

1  "  If  the  amendment  to  the  amendment  is  agreed  to,  it  becomes  a  part  of 
the  amendment  first  moved,  and  the  last  named  is  then  susceptible  of  a  new 
attempt  to  amend;  and  so  if  the  amendment  to  the  amendment  is  negatived. 
And  this  process  may  be  repeated,  unless  the  will  of  the  assembly  intervene* 
by  the  previous  question,  or  in  some  other  way."  —  Harrington's  manual, 
section  120. 


MORE   THAN  ONE  AMENDMENT    121 

It  will  be  noted  that  the  debate  is  restricted  to 
the  question  directly  before  the  meeting.  This  is  an 
elastic  rule,  however,  and  when  an  amendment,  or  its 
secondary,  is  closely  related  to  the  main  question, 
the  debate  will  necessarily  extend  to  the  whole 
question,  and  a  presiding  officer  will  seldom  enforce 
the  restriction,  though  she  may  do  so,  and  should, 
when  in  her  judgment  the  two  propositions  are  suf- 
ficiently distinct. 

92.  More  than  One  Amendment  at  Once. 
It  is  the  practice  in  experienced  bodies,  sometimes 
to  admit,  at  the  same  time,  more  than  one  primary 
amendment,  each  one  being  related  to  a  different 
part  of  the  main  question.  But  in  inexperienced 
societies,  it  is  better  to  observe  the  general  practice 
of  admitting  only  one  at  a  time,  acting  upon  that, 
and  then  admitting  others,  one  by  one.  Mr.  Crocker 
well  expresses  this  practice  in  the  following  words: 
"When  an  amendment  is  pending,  another  amend- 
ment cannot  be  entertained  unless  such  subsequent 
amendment  is  an  amendment  to  the  pending  amend- 
ment." 

Illustration :  In  the  motion  quoted  above,  in 
section  91,  Mrs.  Robbins,  having  moved  to  amend 
by  inserting  the  word  "newspapers,"  and  that 


122  AMENDMENT 

motion  being  before  the  meeting,  Miss  Lovell  moves 
to  amend  by  striking  out  the  word  "members,"  and 
inserting  the  word  "public."  The  chair  will  say, 
in  this  case:  "Only  one  amendment  can  be  consid- 
ered at  a  time.  Miss  Lovell's  motion  is  not  now 
in  order,  the  question  being  upon  Mrs.  Robbins's 
motion,  which  must  first  be  decided."  Miss  Lovell's 
motion  introduced  a  new  proposition,  which,  not 
being  "an  amendment  to  the  pending  amendment/' 
is  not  then  in  order. 

93.  Giving  Notice.  When  one  wishes  to  offer 
an  amendment  which  is  not  then  in  order,  she  may 
"give  notice"  that  she  intends  so  to  do  when 
there  is  opportunity.  This  will  prepare  the  way  for 
her  motion;  and  the  assembly,  thus  notified,  may 
vote  differently  upon  the  matter  before  them. 

Illustration :  Miss  Lovell  having  made  the 
motion,  as  in  section  92,  and  the  chair  having  ruled 
it  out  of  the  order,  Miss  Lovell  may  proceed  to  say: 
"  I  desire  to  give  notice,  then,  that  at  the  proper 
time  I  shall  move  to  insert  the  word  '  public  '  in 
place  of  the  word  'members. J?  She  then  sits,  the 
consideration  of  Mrs.  Robbins's  motion  proceeds, 
and  when  that  is  decided,  Miss  Lovell  obtains  the 
floor  and  offers  her  amendment,  the  way  being  now 
clear. 


ACCEPTING    THE  AMENDMENT    I2J 

This  method  of  giving  notice  is  specially  valuable 
when  one  secondary  amendment  has  been  offered, 
and  some  one  wishes  to  offer  another.  The  latter, 
being  out  of  order  till  the  former  is  voted  upon, 
notice  of  it  will  often  change  the  vote  upon  the 
former.  For  example,  suppose  Miss  Lovell  wishes 
to  have  the  word  "daily"  inserted,  instead  of  the 
word  "  weekly, "  before  the  word  "  newspapers. "  (See 
section  91.)  She  cannot  make  that  as  a  motion, 
because  already  a  primary  and  a  secondary  amend- 
ment are  under  consideration.  But  she  may  give 
notice,  saying:  "I  desire  to  give  notice  that  if  the 
motion  to  insert  the  word  'weekly'  is  rejected,  I 
shall  move  to  insert  the  word  'daily,'  "  thus  giving 
a  hint  to  any  others  who  may  also  favor  her  pro- 
posal. 

94.  Accepting  the  Amendment.  The  simplest 
way  of  disposing  of  an  amendment  is  for  the  mover 
of  the  original  proposition  to  "accept"  any  amend- 
ment proposed  by  another  person.  When  this  is 
done,  the  amendment  becomes  a  part  of  the  motion, 
as  if  the  mover  had  originally  included  it,  and  is 
not  separately  voted  upon.  A  secondary  amend- 
ment may  also  be  accepted  by  the  mover  of  a 
primary  amendment.  Of  course  the  mover  will 


1 24  A  MENDMENT 

accept  an  amendment  only  when  she  favors  it.  If 
she  disapproves  of  it,  she  simply  remains  silent, 
and  the  amendment  takes  its  proper  course  as  a 
separate  proposition,  succeeding  or  failing  on  its 
own  merits.  It  is  better  for  the  chair  not  to  ask  if 
the  amendment  is  accepted,  but  to  leave  the  mover 
free. 

Illustration:  The  motion  in  regard  to  the  library 
of  books  and  magazines  (see  section  91)  being  before 
the  club,  Mrs.  Burns  moves  "  to  amend  by  inserting 
the  word  ' newspapers  '  after  the  word  ' magazines. ' ' 
During  the  discussion  Mrs.  Packard  moves  "to 
amend  the  amendment  by  inserting  the  word  'weekly ' 
before  the  word  '  newspapers. ' '  Mrs.  Burns,  if  she 
favors  this,  may  rise  and  say:  " Mrs.  President,  I 
accept  the  amendment."  The  motion  then  before 
the  meeting  becomes:  "to  amend  by  inserting  the 
words  'weekly  newspapers, '  "  and  as  such  it  is  stated 
by  the  chair  and  voted  upon.  The  same  is  true  of  a 
primary  amendment,  as  well  as  of  a  secondary,  the 
only  restriction  being  that  a  motion,  or  an  amend- 
ment to  it,  does  not  "belong"  to  the  mover  for  this 
purpose,  after  it  has  been  changed  in  any  way.  If, 
for  instance,  Mrs.  Burns's  motion  to  amend  by  in- 
serting "  newspapers  "  had  been  further  amended  by 


SUMMARY  OF  AMENDMENT         12$ 

adding  "pamphlets,"  it  would  no  longer  be  in  her 
power  to  accept  Mrs.  Packard's  motion  to  insert 
"weekly,"  the  motion  having  passed  out  of  Mrs. 
Burns's  hands  and  being  solely  in  the  hands  of  the 
assembly  itself. 

SUMMARY 

An  amendment  is  a  change  proposed  to  the  ques- 
tion under  discussion. 

It  may  alter  the  proposition  in  any  way,  provided 
it  is  "germane,"  or  relevant,  to  it. 

The  effect  of  a  motion  to  amend  is  to  place  two 
motions  before  the  meeting,  the  motion  to  amend 
and  the  motion  to  be  amended. 

The  amendment  is  considered  and  voted  upon 
first;  the  vote  is  then  taken  on  the  "motion  as 
amended." 

Besides  the  amendment  to  the  motion,  there  may 
be  also  an  amendment  to  the  amendment.  These 
are  then  called  the  "primary"  and  the  "secondary" 
amendment. 

The  secondary  amendment  is  decided  first;  the 
vote  is  then  taken  upon  the  "amendment  as 
amended,"  and  lastly,  upon  the  original  motion. 

There  can  be  no  tertiary  amendment 


126  A  MENDMENT 

After  one  amendment,  either  primary  or  second- 
ary, is  decided,  another  may  be  offered,  and  so  on. 

An  amendment,  whei  adopted,  becomes  an  inte- 
gral part  of  the  motion. 

One  amendment,  with  its  secondaries,  is  disposed 
of  before  another  is  entertained. 

"  Notice "  of  other  amendments  may  be  given 
while  one  is  pending. 

The  mover  of  the  original  motion  may  "  accept " 
an  amendment ;  it  then  becomes  a  part  of  her  mo- 
tion. The  same  is  true  of  a  secondary  amendment. 


WAYS  TO  AMEND  A   PROPOSITION   I2/ 


CHAPTER  XII 
WAYS    TO    AMEND    A    PROPOSITION 

THE  THREE  WAYS  OF  AMENDING;  FORMS  FOR 
STATING  THE  QUESTION;  THE  METHOD  BY 
INSERTING;  EFFECT  OF  A  NEGATIVE  VOTE  ON 
INSERTION;  A  CHANGE  IN  MEANING  NECES- 
SARY; THE  METHOD  BY  STRIKING  OUT;  EFFECT 
OF  A  NEGATIVE  VOTE  ON  STRIKING  OUT;  FORM 
FOR  PUTTING  TO  VOTE;  REJECTED  WORDS  IN  A 
DIFFERENT  PLACE;  THE  WORD  "NOT";  THE 
METHOD  BY  STRIKING  OUT  AND  INSERTING; 
EFFECT  OF  A  NEGATIVE  VOTE  ON  STRIKING  OUT 
AND  INSERTING;  SUBSTITUTION. 

95.  The  Three  Ways  of  Amending.  A 
motion  may  be  made  to  amend  a  motion,  or  proposi- 
tion, in  three  ways:  i.  By  inserting  words;  2.  By 
striking  out  words;  3.  By  striking  out  words  and 
inserting  other  words  in  their  place. 

Illustrations:  i.  Inserting.  The  motion  "that 
the  club  establish  a  library  of  bcoks  and  magazines 
for  the  use  of  the  members  "  being  under  discussion, 


128  AMENDMENT 

Mrs.  Ellis  moves  "to  amend  by  inserting  the  word 
'circulating  '  before  the  word  'library';"  or,  "to 
amend  by  inserting  the  words  'and  their  friends ' 
after  the  word  'members' ;  "  or,  "to  amend  by  insert- 
ing the  word  'newspapers  '  after  the  word  'maga- 
zines." 2.  Striking  Out.  In  the  same  matter, 
Miss  Sawyer  moves  "to  amend  the  motion  by  strik- 
ing out  the  words  'and  magazines,'  "  or,  "to  amend 
by  striking  out  the  words  'for  the  use  of  the  mem- 
bers.'' 3.  Striking  Out  and  Inserting.  Mrs.  Paine 
moves  "to  amend  by  striking  out  the  words  'the 
members'  and  inserting  the  words  'the  public;" 
or,  "  to  amend  by  striking  out  the  words  '  books 
and  magazines,'  and  inserting  the  words  'periodi- 
cals and  newspapers. '  ?  Each  of  these  is  a  primary 
amendment,  and  each  may  be  amended  secondarily, 
one  at  a  time. 

96.  Forms  for  Stating  the  Question.  The 
chair,  in  putting  an  amendment  to  vote,  not  only 
repeats  the  amendment,  but  also  states  how  the 
question  will  stand  if  amended.  The  three  forms 
are  as  follows:  i.  "  It  is  moved  to  amend  by  insert- 
ing the  words after  the  words ,  so  that  the 

motion  will  read  as  follows:"  2.   "It  is  moved  to 
strike   out   after  the  word  -    -  the  words ,  so 


TO  AMEND  BY  INSERTING  1 29 

that  the  motion  will  read:"  3.  "It  is  moved 

to  strike  out  the  words ,  and  insert  in  their 

place  the  words ,  so  that  the  motion  will  read 

as  follows: " 

97.  The  Method  by  Inserting.  Any  words 
relevant  to  the  subject  maybe  inserted  by  a  majority 
vote.  Once  inserted,  the  same  identical  words,  or 
a  part  of  them,  cannot  afterward  be  stricken  out, 
except  by  a  reconsideration,  the  rule  being,  that 
the  same  matter  cannot  twice  be  acted  upon.  But,  cer- 
tain words  having  been  once  inserted,  other  words 
may  be  added  to  them  by  another  amendment ;  and 
then  the  whole  can  be  stricken  out  by  still  another 
motion  to  amend. 

Illustration:  The  motion  "that  the  club  estab- 
lish a  library  of  books  and  magazines  for  the  use  of 
the  members  "  being  under  consideration,  the  fol- 
lowing action  takes  place :  — 

Mrs.  Paine  (after  obtaining  the  floor).  I  move 
to  insert  the  word  "circulating"  before  the  word 
4 'library/' 

I^he  Chair.  You  hear  the  motion  of  Mrs.  Paine, 
to  insert  the  word  "circulating,"  before  the  word 
"library,"  so  that  the  motion  will  read:  "that  the 
club  establish  a  circulating  library,"  etc.  Are  you 


130  AMENDMENT 

ready  for  the  question  ?  *  *  *  Those  in  favor  will 
say  "Aye."  *  *  *  Those  opposed,  "No."'  *  *  *  It 
is  a  vote.  Are  there  any  further  amendments  ? 

Mrs.  Robbins  (after  obtaining  the  floor) .  I  move 
to  insert  the  word  "free"  before  the  word  "circu- 
lating," so  that  it  will  read:  "free  circulating 
library  for  the  use  of  the  members." 

The  Chair.  You  hear  the  motion :  to  amend  by 
inserting  the  word  "free,"  so  that  the  motion  before 
you  will  read  as  follows:  [she  repeats  //.]  Those  in 
favor  *  *  *  It  is  carried. 

Mrs.  Robbins.  I  now  move  to  strike  out  the 
words  "free  circulating"  before  the  word  "library." 
\_The  chair  repeats  and  puts  this  motion  to  voteJ\ 

The  object  of  Mrs.  Robbins  in  making  her  first 
motion  was  to  get  another  vote  upon  Mrs.  Paine's 
amendment  to  insert  the  word  "circulating,"  to 
which  she  was  presumably  opposed.  The  amend- 
ment was  carried,  however,  and  could  not  be  voted 
upon  again,  except  by  a  reconsideration ;  and  the  re- 
sult of  this  might  be  uncertain.  Mrs.  Robbins  there- 
fore secured  another  vote,  and  so  another  chance 
of  defeating  it,  by  moving  to  add  the  word  "free," 
and  then,  this  being  adopted,  by  moving  to  strike 
out  the  whole.  She  thus  secured  two  opportuni- 


TO  AMEND  BY  INSERTING  131 

ties  for  debate  and  two  votes,  and  doubled  the  chance 
of  defeating  the  motion  she  objected  to.  Mrs. 
Paine's  motion,  of  course,  was  made  with  no  ulterior 
motive  in  view. 

The  reason  why  this  double  action  is  permissi- 
ble is  because  the  new  word  "free, "  added  to  the 
adopted  amendment,  made  of  it  a  different  ques- 
tion. It  could  then  be  acted  upon  regardless  of 
the  fact  that  it  had  already  been  once  acted  upon 
—  the  restriction  being  only  that  the  same  matter,  or 
a  part  of  it,  cannot  be  stricken  out  by  amendment  when 
once  inserted.  , 

98.  Effect  of  a  Negative  Vote  for  Inserting. 
Conversely,  if  certain  words  are  proposed  to  be 
inserted,  and  the  motion  to  amend  in  this  way  is 
rejected,  those  same  words,  or  a  part  of  them,  cannot 
be  afterward  added.  But  a  motion  can  be  made  to 
add  the  same  words,  or  a  part  of  them,  with  other 
words  ;  this  being  a  different  proposition.  In  the  mo- 
tion under  consideration,  if  Mrs.  Paine  had  moved  to 
insert  the  word  "newspapers,"  and  her  motion  had 
been  rejected,  she  could  afterward  move  to  insert  the 
words  " religious  newspapers"  or  " periodicals  bear- 
ing upon  women's  work,"  this  being  a  new  question, 
which,  while  embodying  her  defeated  amendment, 


132  A  MENDMENT 

also  includes  other  matter,  and  thus  makes  a  differ- 
ent proposition. 

99.  A  Change  in  Meaning  Necessary.     It  is 
important  to  note  that  mere  verbal  changes  are  not 
enough  to  make  of  the  rejected  motion  a  "  new  prop- 
osition."    The  added  words  must  change  the  mean- 
ing, or  scope,  of  the  rejected  amendment,  else  it  will 
be  the  same  matter,   and  as  such  cannot  twice  be 
acted  upon.     Mrs.  Paine  could  not  have  moved  to 
insert  "daily  newspapers,"  because  these  words  are 
in  meaning  (though  not  verbally)  the  same  as  the 
word  "newspapers,"  and  that  had  already  been  re- 
jected;   but    "periodicals   bearing    upon   women's 
work"    or  "religious    newspapers"   is    a    different 
matter  from  "  newspapers ;  "  and  the  club  might  be 
willing  to  vote  for  such  a  limited  proposition,  while 
opposed  to  the  more  general  one. 

100.  The   Method    by   Striking    Out.     The 
motion  to  amend  by  striking  out,  is  so  closely  allied 
to  the  motion  to  amend  by  inserting,  that  the  con- 
sideration of   the   one  almost  necessarily  involves 
that  of   the  other.     The   same   rules   apply.     Any 
words  may  be  stricken  out ;  but  the  same  matter,  or 
a  part  of  it,  having  been  once  stricken  out,  cannot 
be  added   again   except  by   reconsideration.     The 


TO  AMEND  BY  STRIKING   OUT       133 

words  stricken  out,  or  a  part  of  them,  can  after- 
ward be  added  provided  other  material  is  com- 
bined with  them  so  as  to  make  a  different  propo- 
sition. 

Illustration :  The  same  motion  being  under 
consideration,  Miss  Sawyer  moves  "to  amend  by 
striking  out  the  words  c  and  magazines. ' '  The 
chair  states  the  motion,  puts  it  to  vote,  and  it  is 
carried.  These  identical  words  ("and  magazines") 
are  now  stricken  out  for  good,  unless  there  is  a 
reconsideration.  But  it  may  happen  that  Miss 
Lovell  is  opposed  to  their  being  stricken  out,  and 
wishes  to  get  them  in  again.  She  may  move  "to 
amend  by  inserting  the  words  'pamphlets  and  peri- 
odicals bearing  upon  our  work. ' '  This  will  include 
certain  magazines,  but  is  not  a  motion  to  insert  the 
word  "magazines"  alone,  and  is  therefore  a  differ- 
ent proposition  from  the  one  already  acted  upon. 

loi.  Effect  of  a  Negative  Vote  on  Striking 
Out.  Conversely,  if  a  motion  to  strike  out  certain 
words  is  lost,  those  identical  words  stand  as  an 
integral  part  of  the  motion,  and  cannot  again  be 
acted  upon  without  reconsideration.  But  a  motion 
can  be  made  to  strike  out  these  words,  or  a  part  of 
them,  with  others,  this  being  a  new  proposition.  In 


134  A  MENDMENT 

the  illustration  in  section  100,  if  Miss  Sawyer's  mo- 
tion  to  amend  by  striking  out  "  magazines  "  had  been 
lost,  she  could  afterward  move  "to  strike  out  the 
words  (  books  and  magazines  '  "  because  this,  while 
it  includes  the  rejected  motion,  is  really  a  different 
one.  To  repeat,  in  the  words  of  Mr.  Crocker:  "A 
proposition  which  has  once  been  acted  upon,  can- 
not be  renewed  as  an  amendment." 

102.  Form  for  Putting  to  Vote  the  Motion 
to  Strike  Out.  Motions  are  usually  put  to  vote 
in  the  form  in  which  they  are  made,  the  chair  ex- 
actly repeating  the  motion.  According  to  Gush- 
ing,1 the  motion  to  strike  out  differs  in  this  particu- 
lar from  others.  The  chair,  in  putting  the  motion 
to  vote  says:  "The  motion  is  to  strike  out  after  the 
word  ' books  '  the  words  '  and  magazines.'  Shall 
the  words  '  and  magazines '  stand  as  a  part  of 
the  motion  ? "  This  gives  the  advantage  of  the 
affirmative  vote  to  the  opponents  of  the  measure, 
reversing  the  usual  effect  of  a  vote,  which  is  to 
give  the  affirmative  advantage  to  the  affirmative 
side. 

It  is  not  easy  to  see  any  good  reason  for  this  ex- 

1  Also  Robert,  in  his  "  Rules  of  Order,"  a  manual  which  is  not  so  good 
a  guide  as  the  others  mentioned,  on  account  of  its  being  based  too  strictly 
upon  the  procedure  of  the  U.  S.  House  of  Representatives. 


THE    WORD   "NOT"  135 

ception,  and  it  is  not  sanctioned  by  Warrington, 
Fish,  or  Crocker.  It  is  also  somewhat  confusing  to 
beginners.  For  these  reasons,  it  is  not  recom- 
mended here.  The  form  recommended  is  as  fol- 
lows: — 

The  Chair.  The  motion  is  made  to  strike  out, 
after  the  word  "library,"  the  words  " books  and 
magazines."  Shall  these  words  be  stricken  out? 
Those  in  favor  *  *  *  It  is  a  vote." 

103.  Rejected  Words  in  a  Different  Place. 
Words  once  rejected  (either  by  an  affirmative  vote 
on  a  motion  to  strike  out,  or  by  a  negative  vote  on  a 
motion  to  insert)  may  .sometimes  be  inserted  into 
the  main  proposition   in   a  different  place.     This 
can  happen  only  when  the  main  question  has  been 
materially  altered  by  amendment,  so  that  new  con- 
siderations have  become  involved,  and  the  meaning 
of  the  text  has  been  changed. 

104.  The   Word    "  Not."     An  amendment  to 
insert  or  to  strike  out  the  word  "not,"  so  as  to  make 
the  motion   its   exact  opposite,   is  not  admissible, 
and   is   to  be  ruled   out   of   order.     The   same    is 
true   of    any   other   words   which  simply   negative 
the  words  under  discussion,   like  "  impossible  "  for 
"possible,"  etc.    When  it  is  desired  to  negative  a 


136  AMENDMENT 

motion,  the  proper  way  is  to  vote  against  it  when  it 
is  acted  upon. 

105.  The  Method  by  Striking  Out  and  In- 
serting. Any  words  may  be  stricken  out  of  a 
proposition,  and  any  others,  relevant  thereto,  may 
be  inserted  in  their  place.  Having  been  inserted, 
they  can  be  stricken  out  only  under  the  conditions 
explained  in  section  100.  The  motion  ato  strike  out 
and  insert "  is  one  motion  ;  it  is  a  combination,  so  to 
speak,  of  the  motion  "to  strike  out"  and  the  motion 
"to  insert,"  and  is  a  motion  "to  strike  out  A,  and 
insert  B.  "  It  cannot  be  divided  into  two  motions 
(one  to  strike  out  A,  and  another  to  insert  B),  either 
by  the  chair  or  by  a  vote ;  but,  having  been  made 
as  one  motion,  is  put  as  one  motion.  The  reason 
for  this  is  because  the  mover  has  a  right  to  have  a 
vote  upon  the  words  she  wishes  to  take  the  place  of 
the  words  she  wishes-  stricken  out. 

If  the  motion  could  be  divided  (words  being 
stricken  out  and  the  place  left  blank),  other  words 
than  those  she  desires  might  then  get  inserted  in- 
stead, thus  thwarting  her  intention.  Therefore,  the 
motion  to  strike  out  and  insert  is  indivisible. 

Illustration:  The  motion  "to  establish  a  library 
of  books  and  magazines  for  the  use  of  the  members," 


STRIKING   OUT  AND  INSERTING      137 

being  under  consideration,  Miss  Faxon  obtains  the 
floor  and  says :  "  I  move  to  strike  out  the  word 
'  members  '  and  insert  the  word  'public. '  ' 

The  Chair.  You  hear  the  motion  of  Miss  Faxon, 
to  strike  out  the  word  "members"  and  insert  the 
word  " public,"  so  that  the  motion  will  read  "a 
library,  etc.,  for  the  use  of  the  public."  Are  you 
ready  for  the  question  ?  *  *  *  Those  in  favor  of 
striking  out  the  word  "  members  "  and  inserting  in 
its  place  the  word  "public,"  will  say  "Aye."  *  *  * 
If  the  motion  prevails,  the  word  "public"  becomes 
a  part  of  the  original  motion,  instead  of  the  word 
"members."  Any  one  who  wishes  to  get  the  word 
"public"  out,  must  either  move  a  reconsideration, 
or  proceed  as  described  in  section  100. 

106.  Effect  of  a  Negative  Vote  for  Striking 
Out  and  Inserting.  If  the  motion  to  strike  out 
certain  words  and  insert  others  is  defeated,  the 
original  words  stand,  and  must  continue  to  stand, 
unless  the  motion  is  reconsidered.  But,  by  incor- 
porating other  matter  with  the  original  words,  and 
thus  making  a  different;  proposition,  the  same  words 
may  again,  indirectly,  be  acted  upon  by  amend- 
ment. 

In  order  to  get  a  second  vote  on  words  already 


138  AMENDMENT 

acted  upon  (by  this  motion  to  strike  out  and  insert) 
certain  motions  may  be  made ;  and  these  are  formu- 
lated by  Gushing  somewhat  as  follows :  — 

1.  To  strike  out  (without  inserting). 

2.  To  strike  out  the  same  words  and  insert  differ- 
ent ones  from  those  before  proposed. 

3.  To  strike  out  the  same  words  and  insert  the 
proposed  words,  with  others. 

4.  To  strike  out  the  same  words  and  insert  part 
of  the  proposed  words,  with  others. 

5.  To  strike  out  the  same  words  with  others  and 
insert  the  proposed  words. 

6.  To  strike  out  part  of   the  same  words  with 
others  and  insert  the  proposed  words. 

7.  To  strike  out  other  words  and  insert  the  pro- 
posed words. 

8.  To  insert  the  desired  words  (without  striking 
out). 

It  would  be  difficult  to  illustrate  all  these  methods 
by  one  motion,  and  probably  in  no  single  motion 
could  all  of  them  be  used.  They  are  expedients, 
some  one  of  which  may  often  be  employed,  in  an 
attempt  to  reverse  the  decision  upon  a  rejected 
motion  to  strike  out  and  insert,  and  thus  to  get  rid 
of  words  which,  by  vote,  have  been  retained. 


SUBSTITUTION  139 

Mr.  Crocker  says :  "  The  motion  to  strike  out  and 
insert  can  be  amended  both  as  to  the  words  to  be 
stricken  out  and  as  to  the  words  to  be  inserted." 

107.  Substitution.  A  whole  new  motion  may 
be  substituted  for  another  already  before  the  meet- 
ing, provided  the  subject  of  it  be  germane  to  that 
other.  This,  being  simply  a  motion  to  strike  out 
and  insert,  is  put  as  one  motion.. 

Illustration :  The  motion  in  regard  to  a  library 
being  under  discussion,  Mrs.  Ellis  says :  "  I  move  to 
amend  by  substituting  for  the  pending  motion  the 
following:  "That  during  the  summer  the  president 
ascertain  the  probable  expense  of  a  library  suitable 
to  our  needs;  and  that  contributions  for  that  pur- 
pose be  solicited."  The  chair  says :  "  It  is  moved  to 
substitute  for  the  motion  now  before  us  (which  is, 
4  To  establish  a  library  of  books  and  magazines  for 
the  use  of  the  members  ')  the  following  motion : 
'  That  during  the  summer  the  president  ascertain 
the  probable  expense  of  a  library  suitable  to  our 
needs;  and  that  contributions  be  solicited.'" 

The  question  now  is  upon  substituting  one  for  the 
other.  The  proposed  substitute,  being  simply  an 
amendment,  may  be  amended  before  the  vote  is 
taken  upon  substitution;  .it  may  also  be  divided, 


140  AMENDMENT 

since  it  contains  two  distinct  propositions.  It  is 
debated,  like  any  other  amendment,  and  finally 
voted  upon  (in  its  original  form,  or  as  further 
amended),  and  if  the  vote  is  in  the  affirmative,  the 
substitute  takes  the  place  of  the  original  motion. 
This  vote  is  the  vote  upon  it  as  the  amendment. 
Another  vote  is  then  taken  upon  it  as  the  motion  as 
amended. 

These  two  votes  are  put  in  the  following  form: 

1.  "  Those  in  favor  of  substituting  this  motion  for 
the  pending  one  will  say  'Aye. '       *  *  It  is  carried, 
and  the  motion   is  substituted.      2.   Those  now  in 
favor  of  the  motion  as  amended  ('that  the  president 
ascertain,  etc/)  will  say  '  Aye'  *  *  *  it  is  carried." 

SUMMARY 

A  proposition  may  be  amended:   i.   By  inserting; 

2.  By  striking  out;  3.    By  striking  out  and  insert- 
ing. 

In  stating  the  motion  to  amend,  the  chair  (i) 
repeats  the  words  proposed ;  (2)  indicates  the  place 
in  the  motion  where  they  are  proposed  to  be  in- 
serted, or  omitted;  and  (3)  reads  the  motion  in  the 
form  it  will  stand  if  amended. 

Any  words  relevant  to  the  subject  may  be  in- 


WAYS   TO  AMEND  A    PROPOSITION    141 

serted.  Once  inserted,  the  same  words,  or  a  part  of 
them,  cannot  be  stricken  out;  but  other  words  may  be 
added  to  them,  and  then  the  whole  be  stricken  out. 

If  a  motion  to  amend  by  inserting  is  negatived, 
the  same  words  or  a  part  of  them  cannot  afterward 
be  added.  But  the  same  words,  or  a  part  of  them, 
with  others,  may  be  added. 

The  added  words  must  change  the  meaning,  and 
not  produce  a  mere  verbal  change. 

Any  words  may  be  stricken  out.  Once  out,  they 
cannot  afterward  be  inserted,  unless  other  words  are 
added  to  them. 

If  a  motion  to  amend  by  striking  out  is  negatived, 
the  words  stand,  and  cannot  afterward  be  acted  upon 
unless  combined  with  others. 

The  motion  to  strike  out  is  put:  Shall  the  words 
be  stricken  out?  and  not  "Shall  the  words  stand?  " 

Rejected  words  may  sometimes  be  inserted  in  a 
different  place. 

The  word  "not,"  or  any  other  word  which  simply 
negatives  the  meaning  of  a  motion,  cannot  be  offered 
in  amendment. 

A  motion  may  be  made  to  strike  out  any  words 
and  to  insert  any  others,  relevant  thereto,  in  their 
place.  This  is  one  motion. 


142  AMENDMENT 

The  motion  to  strike  out  and  insert  is  indivisible. 

When  the  motion  to  strike  out  and  insert  is  nega- 
tived, the  original  words  stand,  but  they  may  after- 
ward be  stricken  out,  by  a  motion  which  changes 
either  the  words  to  be  stricken  out,  or  the  words  to 
be  inserted. 

A  whole  new  motion  may  be  substituted  for  an- 
other, provided  it  is  relevant  thereto. 

Rule :  The  same  proposition  cannot  twice  be  acted 
upon. 


CHAPTER   XIII 
EXCEPTIONS    REGARDING   AMENDMENT 

SUMS  AND  TIMES,  OR  FILLING  BLANKS  ;  NAMES; 
MOTIONS  NOT  SUBJECT  TO  AMENDMENT  ; 
EFFECT  OF  THE  PREVIOUS  QUESTION  ;  RECON- 
SIDERATION; THE  ORDER  IN  AMENDING. 

108.  Sums  and   Times,   or   Filling   Blanks. 

There  is  one  apparent  exception  to  the  rule  that  a 
proposition  cannot  be  amended  beyond  the  second 
degree  (that  is,  that  there  can  be  no  amendment  to 
an  amendment  to  an  amendment.)  In  case  a  number 
is  in  question,  and  it  is  proposed  to  change  it  to 


SUMS  AND    TIMES  143 

some  other  number,  as  many  suggestions  are  re- 
ceived as  the  members  wish  to  offer,  and  then  these 
suggestions  are  voted  upon, one  by  one,  in  a  certain 
order,  the  rule  that  the  second  takes  precedence  of 
the  first  not  applying  here. 

The  number  to  be  supplied  is  usually  a  sum  (of 
money)  or  a  time  (of  day),  and  when  a  motion  is 
made,  or  a  proposition  offered,  which  contains  refer- 
ence to  a  sum  or  a  time,  and  there  is  any  motion  to 
change  that  sum  or  time,  such  a  motion  is  not  re- 
garded as  an  amendment,  but  the  space  containing 
the  number  is  considered  to  be  blank  or  empty,  and 
suggestions  are  then  received  for  filling  it.  These 
suggestions  are  noted  down  by  the  chairman  or  sec- 
retary, and  then  the  vote  is  taken  upon  each,  one 
by  one,  beginning  with  the  largest  sum,  or  the  longest 
time,  and  continuing  down  until  an  affirmative  vote 
is  reached  on  some  one  of  the  numbers  proposed. 
This  same  process  is  also  followed  whenever  there 
is  before  a  meeting  any  proposition  containing  a 
blank  space  to  be  filled  by  a  sum  or  a  time. 

Illustration :  A  motion  is  made  "  that  the  time 
for  the  club  to  assemble  be  fixed  at  two  o'clock." 

The  chair  having  placed  the  motion  before  the 
meeting,  Mrs.  Paine  obtains  the  floor  and  moves 


144  AMENDMENT 

"that  the  hour  be  three  o'clock;"  (not  "to  amend 
by  striking  out  'two  '  and  inserting  'three. ')  " 

2'he  Chair.  We  will  proceed  as  in  filling  blanks, 
and  the  chair  will  receive  other  suggestions. 

Mrs.  Packard.  I  move  that  the  hour  be  half-past 
two. 

Mrs.  Burns.     I  move  that  it  be  half-past  three. 

Miss  Long.     I  move  that  it  be  four,  Mrs.  President. 

The  Chair.  The  motion  is  in  regard  to  the  hour 
of  meeting  of  our  club.  Motions  have  been  made 
that  the  hour  be  two,  three,  half-past  two,  half-past 
three  and  four  o'clock.  These  motions  are  before 
you  for  discussion.  (The  suggestions  are  debated^) 

The  Chair.  Are  you  ready  for  the  question? 
Those  in  favor  of  four  o'clock  will  say  "Aye."  *  *  * 
It  is  lost.  Those  in  favor  of  half-past  three  will 
say  "Aye."  *  *  *  It  is  lost.  Those  in  favor  of 
three  o'clock  will  say  "Aye."  It  is  lost. 

Those  in  favor  of  half-past  two  o'clock  will  say 
"Aye."  *  *  *  It  is  carried,  and  the  blank  is  filled 
by  the  insertion  of  the  words  "half-past  two." 
Those  now  in  favor  of  the  motion  "that  the  time 
for  the  club  to  assemble  be  fixed  at  half -past  two 
o'clock"  will  say  "Aye;"  those  opposed,  "No."  It 
is  a  vote.  The  hour  of  assembling  is  half -past  two. 


SUMS  AND   TIMES  145 

At  first  thought,  the  taking  of  two  votes  upon  the 
words  "  half-past  two  "  seems  unnecessary,  but  the 
first  vote  (on  inserting)  is  a  vote  upon  an  amend- 
ment, as  explained  in  section  107,  and  it  does  not 
necessarily  follow  that  all  those  who  vote  for  "half- 
past  two,"  are  also  in  favor  of  the  main  question. 
There  might  be  members  who  object  to  fixing  any 
time  for  assembling. 

There  are  cases  where  this  would  be  still  more 
apparent,  especially  where  a  question  of  appropriat- 
ing money  is  under  consideration.  Members  might 
favor  one  sum  rather  than  another,  but  be  opposed 
to  any  appropriation.  For  example:  a  motion  "to 
subscribe  ten  dollars  toward  the  fresh-air  fund " 
being  offered,  motions  are  offered  to  make  the  sum 
twenty,  fifteen,  and  five  dollars.  The  chair  will  put 
these  to  vote,  beginning  with  the  largest,  and  then 
say:  "The  blank  is  filled  by  the  word  'fifteen/ 
Those  now  in  favor  of  the  original  motion,  as 
amended,  to  subscribe  fifteen  dollars  for  the  fresh- 
air  fund  will  say  'Aye  '  *  *  *  "  Members  opposed 
to  any  subscription  would  now  have  a  chance  to 
vote  against  the  main  question.  Rule.  —  A  vote  /> 
first  taken  upon  filling  the  blank,  this  being  a  form  of 
amendment,  and  then  a  vote  is  taken  upon  the  motion 
itself. 


146  AMENDMENT 

In  rare  cases,  the  shortest  number  precedes  the 
longest,  in  putting  to  vote;  but  the  general  rule  is 
the  other  way,  the  reason  being  that  usually  the 
greater  number  is  the  more  inclusive,  leading  up, 
so  to  speak,  to  the  others,  and  bringing  the  question 
more  readily  to  a  conclusion. 

109.  Names.  Where  the  names  of  several 
persons  are  put  in  nomination  for  one  office,  these 
are  not  treated  as  amendments,  but  the  same  pro- 
cess is  followed  as  that  described  in  the  preceding 
section  in  regard  to  sums  and  times.  The  names 
are  put  to  vote  in  the  order  nominated,  beginning 
with  the  one  mentioned  in  the  original  motion  or 
report.  For  an  illustration  see  chapter  one. 

no.  Motions  Not  Subject  to  Amendment. 
There  are  certain  motions  that  cannot  be  amended. 
The  principal  ones  are:  to  adjourn;  to  lay  upon, 
and  to  take  from,  the  table ;  for  the  previous  ques- 
tion; to  reconsider;  to  postpone  indefinitely;  also, 
questions  of  privilege  and  of  order,  and  appeals. 
Rule.  — Any  motion  may  be  amended  that  can  be 
amended  without  changing  it  into  a  distinctly  different 
motion. 

in.  Effect  of  the  Previous  Question.  It 
may  be  well  to  repeat,  that  after  the  debate  is 


THE   ORDER  IN  AMENDING          147 

closed,  no  new  amendments,  except  verbal  ones,  are 
admissible.  Changes  in  meaning  cannot  then  be 
offered,  because  they  cannot  be  discussed.  Also, 
when  an  amendment  is  before  the  meeting,  the 
debate  is  confined  to  the  amendment,  except  in  cases 
where  such  amendment  necessarily  opens  the  whole 
question. 

112.  Reconsideration.     If,  after  a  motion  has 
been  adopted,  it  is  desired  to  reconsider  the  vote 
upon  an  amendment  to  that  motion,  the  vote  upon 
the  whole  question  must  first  be  reconsidered,  in 
order  to  open  the  way  for  action  upon  the  amend- 
ment. 

113.  The   Order  in   Amending.     As   already 
explained,  when  several  primary  amendments  to  one 
proposition  are  before  a  meeting,  they  are  considered 
in  the  order  moved ;  when  there  is  a  primary  and  a 
secondary,  the  latter  is  voted  upon  and  then  the 
former.     When   there    is  a   series  of   propositions 
combined  in  one,  like  the  by-laws  of  a  society  for 
instance  (see  section  77),  it  is  best  to  consider  these 
section  by  section,  amending  them  in  their  order. 
It  is  not  well,  however,   to  "  adopt "  them  one  by 
one,  as  this  prevents  the  assembly  from  going  back 
and   considering  them  over  again.     This  is  often 


148  AMENDMENT 

necessary,  and,  if  they  are  simply  amended  and  left, 
it  can  be  done  at  any  time  before  the  by-laws  are 
"adopted  as  a  whole."  When  all  the  amending  is 
done  and  the  meeting  is  ready,  a  motion  is  made  (or 
the  chair  may  put  to  vote  without  a  motion)  "  to  adopt 
the  by-laws  as  a  whole."  If  this  is  carried,  the 
matter  is  closed,  not  to  be  re-opened,  except  by 
reconsideration. 

SUMMARY 

Numbers  and  names  are  not  treated  as  amend- 
ments. Blanks  are  presumed  to  exist,  and  these 
'  are  filled  by  voting  upon  the  proposed  numbers  or 
names,  one  by  one. 

The  largest  sum  or  the  longest  time  is  put  to 
vote  first,  and  so  on  down,  till  one  is  adopted. 

One  vote  is  to  be  taken  upon  filling  the  blank  in 
the  motion  and  another  vote  upon  the  motion  as 
amended,  (the  blank  being  filled.) 

Names  are  put  to  vote  in  their  order,  beginning 
with  the  one  first  named. 

Any  motions  may  be  amended,  except  such  as 
cannot  be  changed  without  destroying  their  nature. 

After  the  previous  question  is  ordered,  none 
except  verbal  amendments  are  admissible. 


SUMMARY  OF  EXCEPTIONS          149 

When  an  amendment  is  under  consideration, 
debate  is  confined  to  that  amendment,  unless  it 
necessarily  involves  the  main  question. 

In  order  to  reconsider  an  amendment,  the  main 
question  must  first  be  reconsidered. 

When  there  is  a  series  of  propositions  combined 
into  one,  these  are  amended  section  by  section  and 
finally  adopted  "as  a  whole." 


PART   IV 
THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 


CHAPTER  XIV 
THE    RANK    OF    DEPENDENT   MOTIONS 

"PRECEDENCE"  DEFINED;  "INDEPENDENT  "  vs. 
"DEPENDENT"  MOTIONS;  THE  SEVEN  DEPEND- 
ENT MOTIONS  AND  THEIR  RANK;  ILLUSTRATION 
OF  THE  PRECEDENCE  OF  MOTIONS;  OBJECT  OF 
THE  SEVEN  MOTIONS;  REASONS  FOR  THE  PRE- 
SCRIBED ORDER. 

114.  "  Precedence  "  Defined.    The  word  "pre- 
cedence "  in  this  connection,  refers  to  the  order  in 
which  motions  are  to  be  considered.     The  general 
rule    is    that   motions    take  precedence    in   the   order 
moved,  the  one  first  made  being  first  considered  and 
decided.     There  are  exceptions  to  this  rule  in  the 
case  of  certain  motions  which,  from  their  nature, 
take  precedence  of  the  motion  pending,  and  which 
also   have    a    precedence,    or   rank,   among    them- 
selves. 

115.  "Independent0  vs.  "Dependent  Mo- 
tions."     A  motion  which  stands  for  itself,  unre- 

'53 


154      THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

lated  to  any  other,  and  the  effect  of  which  is  to 
place  before  the  meeting  a  new  question,  is  an  "  in- 
dependent "  motion.  With  all  independent  motions, 
the  general  rule  of  precedence  prevails,  namely,  an 
independent  motion  may  be  made  when  no  other 
motion  is  pending,  and  one  independent  motion  is 
decided  before  another  is  in  order. 

A  "  dependent "  motion  is  one  which  may  be  made 
while  another  motion  is  pending.  It  is  related  to, 
or  dependent  upon,  an  independent  motion,  and 
tends  in  some  way  to  modify  or  to  dispose  of  it.  The 
motions  to  close  debate  and  to  amend  are  examples 
of  dependent  motions.  A  dependent  motion  is 
necessarily  acted  upon  before  the  independent 
motion  to  which  it  relates.  The  dependent  motions 
have  a  prescribed  order  among  themselves,  certain 
ones  taking  precedence  of  certain  others  and  ruling  . 
out  those  others  even  when  the  latter  are  first  made. 

116.  The  Seven  Dependent  Motions  and 
their  Rank.  There  are  seven  dependent  motions 
which  are  in  constant  use  in  the  conduct  of  meet- 
ings; and  among  all  the  motions  of  this  nature 
which  are  possible  in  practice,  these  are  the  only 
ones  necessary  to  be  mastered  by  the  ordinary  par- 
liamentarian. Two  of  these  have  been  considered 


RANK  OF  DEPENDENT  MOTIONS     155 

already  in  the  connections  where  they  belong:  the 
motion  to  amend,  which,  being  the  most  important 
and  most  common,  is  considered  in  Part  III.,  by 
itself;  and  the  motion  for  the  previous  question, 
which  is  considered  in  chapter  eight,  in  connection 
with  debate.  The  other  five  are:  the  motions  to 
adjourn,  to  lay  upon  the  table,  to  postpone  to  a 
definite  time,  to  commit  or  to  refer  to  a  committee, 
and  to  postpone  indefinitely  or  to  repress.  The  rank 
of  these  motions  is  as  follows :  — 

1.  To  adjourn. 

2.  To  lay  upon  the  table. 

3.  For  the  previous  question. 

4.  To  postpone. 

5.  To  commit. 

6.  To  amend. 

7.  To  postpone  indefinitely. 

Each  of  these  dependent  motions  takes  precedence 
of  the  main  question ;  in  other  words,  when  a  propo- 
sition is  pending,  and  one  of  these  motions  is  made, 
that  motion  is  considered  and  put  to  vote  before  the 
main  proposition,  which  is  interrupted  in  its  course 
by  the  dependent  motion  and  variously  modified 
thereby. 

When  a  proposition  is  under  consideration  and 


IS6      THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

one  of  these  seven  motions  is  made,  if  another  of 
the  seven  is  made  afterward,  it  can  be  considered  if 
it  stands  above  the  first  one  in  this  list.  If  it  stands 
below,  it  is  not  admissible.  For  example:  suppose 
an  independent  motion  to  be  under  discussion, 
and  that  a  motion  has  been  made  "to  postpone." 
While  this  is  under  consideration,  the  motions 
which  can  now  be  made  are:  to  adjourn,  to  lay  on 
the  table,  and  for  the  previous  question,  while  those 
which  cannot  be  made  are :  to  commit,  to  amend, 
and  to  postpone  indefinitely.  The  motions  which 
stand  above  the  dependent  motion  pending  are  said 
to  "have  precedence  over  it; "  those  below,  are  said 
to  be  "preceded  by"  it.  If  the  independent  motion 
(or  main  question)  with  a  number  of  amendments, 
were  pending,  any  of  the  dependent  motions  is 
admissible  except  the  seventh,  that  only  being 
"preceded  by"  motions  to  amend.  If  they  all  are 
made,  in  proper  order,  they  are  voted  upon,  one  by 
one,  in  their  order  of  precedence,  the  main  question 
being  held  in  abeyance  till  they  are  settled. 

117.  Illustration  of  the  Precedence  of 
Motions.  A  motion  having  been  made  "that  the 
Mendon  Women's  Club  take  steps  to  become  incor- 
porated," the  following  action  ensues:  — 


RANK  OF  DEPENDENT  MOTIONS     I  $7 

Mrs.  Robbins}  I  move  to  amend  by  inserting, 
after  the  word  "steps,"  the  words  "during  the 
summer  vacation." 

The  Chair.  You  hear  the  motion,  —  to  amend  by 
inserting  certain  words  so  that  the  motion  shall 

read :  " take  steps  during  the  summer  vacation 

to  become  incorporated."  Are  you  ready?  [This 
may  be  debated] 

Miss  Long.     I  move  to  commit. 

The  Chair.  It  is  moved  to  refer  the  matter  to 
a  committee.  This  motion  takes  precedence  of  the 
motion  to  amend.  Are  you  ready  to  vote  upon  the 
motion  to  commit?  [Debatable.'] 

Mrs.  Paine.  I  move  to  postpone  the  matter  for 
one  week. 

The  Chair.  A  motion  is  made  to  postpone. 
[Debatable.] 

Mrs.  Burns.     I  move  the  previous  question. 

The  Chair.  The  previous  question  is  moved. 
Shall  the  main  question  be  now  put?  {Limited 
debate] 

Mrs.  Allen.  I  move  to  lay  upon  the  table.  [Not 
debatable.] 

1  In  this  illustration,  the  form  of  obtaining  the  floor  is  omitted  for  sake  of 
brevity.  The  reader  must  supply  it. 


I $8      THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

The  Chair.  It  is  moved  to  lay  on  the  table. 
Those  in  favor  — 

Mrs.  Packard  (interrupting).     Mrs.  President. 

The  Chair.     The  motion  to  table  is  not  debatable. 

Mrs.  Packard.  I  was  not  intending  to  debate, 
Mrs.  Chairman,  but  to  move  that  we  adjourn. 

The  Chair.  The  Chair  stands  corrected.  A 
motion  to  adjourn  is  now  in  order,  that  taking 
precedence  of  all  other  motions.  The  vote  comes 
first  upon  the  motion  to  adjourn.  Those  in  favor 
of  adjournment  will  say  "Aye"  *  *  *  It  is  lost. 
Those  in  favor  of  laying  the  question  upon  the 
table  *  *  *  It  is  lost.  The  next  motion  is  for  the 
previous  question.  Shall  the  main  question  be  now 
put?  (If  this  prevails,  it  will  cut  off  the  motions  to 
postpone  and  to  commit,  and  bring  us  to  an  imme- 
diate vote  on  the  main  question  and  its  amend- 
ments.1) Those  in  favor  *  *  *  It  is  lost.  Are  you 
ready  for  the  question  upon  the  motion  to  postpone 
for  one  week?  Those  in  favor  *  *  *  It  is  lost. 

Miss  Lovell.     I  move  to  postpone  indefinitely. 

The  Chair.  Motions  to  commit  and  to  amend 
being  before  the  meeting,  the  motion  to  postpone 

1  This  explanation  of  the  president  is  desirable,  to  prevent  inexperienced 
members  from  misunderstanding  the  effect  of  their  vote.  It  is  well  for  the 
chairman  to  explain  other  difficult  motions. 


RANK  OF  DEPENDENT  MOTIONS     159 

indefinitely  is  not  in  order.  Are  you  ready  to  vote 
upon  commitment?  Those  in  favor  *  *  *  It  is 
lost.  The  question  now  recurs  upon  t  Mrs.  Robbins' 
motion  to  amend  by  inserting  the  words  "  during  the 
summer  vacation."  Are  you  ready?  Those  in 
favor  *  *  *  It  is  carried.  Those  now  in  favor  of 
the  motion  as  amended  — 

Miss  Lovell  (interrupting).  I  now  move  to  post- 
pone indefinitely. 

The  Chair.  That  motion  is  now  in  order.  Those 
in  favor  of  repressing  the  motion  will  say  "Aye" 

*  *  *     It  is  lost.     Those  in  favor  of  the  motion  as 
amended,  namely  [she  repeats  //],  will  say  "Aye" 

*  *  *  It  is  carried. 

This  illustration  shows  the  effect  of  the  dependent 
motions,  when  each  one  (except  that  to  amend)  is 
lost.  Illustrations  of  the  effect  when  each  one  is 
carried  are  given  in  the  three  following  chapters. 
When  any  one  of  them  is  moved  and  is  not  in  order 
because  of  the  precedence  of  others,  it  is  treated  as 
shown  in  Miss  Lo  veil's  motion  to  postpone  indefi- 
nitely. 

Any  of  these  motions,  having  once  been  defeated, 
may  again  be  made  at  a  later  stage  in  the  pro- 
ceedings, provided  "substantial  business  "has  in- 


100      THE   PRECEDENCE    OF  MOTIONS 

tervened  in  the  meantime.  For  example,  another 
motion  to  table  might  have  been  made  at  the  close ; 
or  between  the  consideration  of  any  other  two 
motions.  So  with  the  other  dependent  motions, 
subject  always  to  the  rule  of  precedence.  Only  the 
dependent  motion  distinctively  under  consideration 
may  be  debated,  unless  it  necessarily  involves  the 
main  question. 

When  a  motion  is  made  which  takes  precedence  of 
others,  these  others  are  simply  suspended,  or  held  in 
abeyance,  till  the  one  that  outranks  them  is  decided. 
If  it  is  decided  in  the  negative,  they  follow  in  their 
order,  as  shown  in  the  illustration. 

118.  Object   of  the    Seven    Motions.     The 
object  of  three  of  these  motions  (to  adjourn,  to  table, 
and  to  postpone)  is  to  delay  action ;  of  one  (to  close 
debate),  to  hasten  action;   of  two  (to  commit  and  to 
amend),  to  perfect  or  change;  and  of  one,  the  last, 
to  finally  dispose  of.     For  the  effect  of  the  previous 
question   upon  the  other   dependent  motions,   see 
sections  60  and  61. 

119.  Reasons   for    the    Prescribed    Order. 
This  order  has  been  found,  by  experience,  to  be 
well  suited  to  secure  both  the  fair  and  the  speedy 
transaction  of  business.     The  undebatable  motions 


RANK  OF  DEPENDENT  MOTIONS     l6l 

precede  the  debatable  ones,  in  order  to  prevent 
delays;  and  opportunity  is  given  to  secure,  first, 
the  temporary  disposition  of  the  subject,  then  the 
suspension  of  tiresome  debate,  then  the  perfecting 
in  form  and  the  securing  of  more  time,  and  lastly, 
repression.  The  order  is  varied  by  some  authorities 
and  disregarded  by  others ;  any  society  may  there- 
fore vote  not  to  adopt  it  as  their  guide,  if  they 
wish;  but  it  will  be  found  simple  and  helpful,  and 
is  therefore  recommended.  Presiding  officers  would 
do  well  to  commit  this  order  to  memory,  or  to  have 
it  by  them  for  reference  when  presiding. 

SUMMARY 

The  general  rule  regarding  precedence  is  that 
motions  take  precedence  in  the  order  moved.  There 
are  exceptions  regarding  certain  technical  motions. 

An  independent  motion  is  one  that  is  unrelated  to 
any  other;  a  dependent  motion  is  one  that  exists 
because  of  an  independent  one.  The  former  is 
made  when  no  other  motion  is  pending;  the  latter, 
when  another  is  pending.  The  seven  dependent 
motions  in  general  use  are :  i.  To  adjourn;  2.  To 
lay  on  the  table;  3.  For  the  previous  question;  4. 
To  postpone;  5.  To  commit;  6.  To  amend;  7.  To 


1 62      THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

postpone  indefinitely.  These  take  precedence  of 
one  another  in  the  order  given. 

When  one  of  these  is  made,  it  takes  precedence 
of  the  main  question ;  when  one  is  made,  and  then 
another,  that  other  is  admissible  if  its  place  in  the 
list  is  above  the  one  first  made. 

When  one  of  these  has  been  defeated,  it  may  be 
renewed  after  substantial  business  has  intervened. 

Undebatable  motions  take  precedence  of  debat- 
able motions.  This  order  has  been  proved  by 
experience  to  facilitate  both  full  and  speedy  action. 


CHAPTER   XV 

THE  MOTIONS  TO  ADJOURN  AND  TO  LAY 
UPON  THE  TABLE 

THE  MOTION  TO  ADJOURN;  THE  INDEPENDENT 
MOTION  TO  ADJOURN;  LIMITATIONS;  EFFECT  OF 
ADJOURNMENT;  FIXING  THE  TIME;  THE  MO- 
TION TO  LAY  UPON  THE  TABLE;  ITS  EFFECT; 
TAKING  FROM  THE  TABLE. 

120.     The  Motion  to  Adjourn.     The  depend- 
ent motion  first  in  order  is  the  motion  to  adjourn. 


THE  A1OTION   TO  ADJOURN          163 

This  takes  precedence  of  all  other  motions.  The 
reason  for  its  high  rank  is  that  the  assembly  has  the 
right,  at  any  time,  to  terminate  its  session  at  the 
will  of  the  majority.  It  is  considered  at  once,  and 
decided  without  debate.  It  cannot  be  amended, 
tabled,  committed,  postponed,  repressed,  or  recon- 
sidered ;  all  that  can  be  done  to  it  is  simply  to  vote 
upon  it. 

121.  The  Independent  Motion  to  Adjourn. 
Besides  being  dependent,  the  motion  to  adjourn  is 
also,  at  times,  an  independent  motion.      It  is  such 
when    made   after  all   business    is   done,    or  while 
no  motion   is  pending.      It   is  still  subject  to  the 
same  restrictions.     By  unanimous  consent,  however, 
it  can  be  briefly  debated,  reasons  being  given  why 
the  assembly  ought  not  to  adjourn  at  once.    Usually, 
an  independent  motion  to  adjourn  is  made  as  a  for- 
mality, at  the  close  of  a  session,  and  will  be  readily 
withdrawn  by  the  mover,  if  any  one   indicates  that 
there  is  business  which  ought  to  be  considered. 

122.  Limitations.     It  is  commonly  said  that "  a 
motion  to  adjourn  is  always  in  order."     This  is  not 
strictly  true.     A  motion  to  adjourn  cannot  be  made: 

1.  when    a   member   has    possession  of   the   floor; 

2.  during   the    progress    of   voting;    3.  when    the 


1 64      THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

previous  question  has  been  ordered;  4.  when  a 
previous  motion  to  adjourn  has  been  the  next  pre- 
ceding motion,  and  no  substantial  business  has 
intervened.  By  "substantial  business"  is  meant 
further  debate,  another  motion  and  its  considera- 
tion, or  any  action  which  changes  the  environment 
of  the  renewed  motion  so  that  it  is  really  a  new  one 
and  not  the  same  one.  This  provision  is  needful,  to 
guard  against  factious  manoeuvres  on  the  part  of  the 
minority.  It  has  been  decided  also  that  a  defeated 
motion  to  table  is  not  "substantial  business." 
Whether,  in  addition  to  these  limitations,  there  can 
also  intervene,  to  delay  the  putting  of  a  motion  to 
adjourn,  a  question  of  privilege  or  of  order,  is  not 
certain.  It  would  seem,  however,  in  view  of  the 
urgent  nature  of  these  questions,  that  they  would 
be  in  order  even  when  a  motion  to  adjourn  was 
pending.1 

With  these  few  limitations,  the  motion  to  adjourn 
is  always  first  in  order. 

123.  Effect  of  Adjournment.  A  member 
obtains  the  floor,  in  the  usual  way,  and  says:  "I 
move  that  we  adjourn,"  or  "that  the  assembly  do 
now  adjourn."  The  chair  says:  "A  motion  to 

1  See  Sections  147  and  158  for  the  further  consideration  of  this  poinU 


THE  MOTION  TO  ADJOURN          165 

adjourn  is  made.  Those  in  favor  of  adjourning 
will  say  "Aye"  *  *  *  It  is  carried,  and  the  club 
stands  adjourned  to  Tuesday  next."  The  vote  can 
be  doubted,  like  any  other. 

If  the  motion  to  adjourn  is  lost,  the  business 
interrupted  is  resumed.  If  it  is  carried,  the  busi- 
ness interrupted  is  taken  up  again  at  the  next  ses- 
sion, at  the  point  where  it  was  left,  unless  there  is  no . 
further  session,  in  which  case  an  adjournment  kills 
the  measure  under  discussion.  If  there  is  a  regular 
order  of  business,  and  a  regular  adjournment,  any 
measure  interrupted  by  adjournment,  takes  its  turn 
at  the  next  session  as  "unfinished  business,"  and 
when  it  comes  up,  consideration  upon  it  is  resumed 
at  the  point  interrupted. 

124.  Fixing  the  Time.  In  organizations 
which  have  a  stated  time  for  adjourning,  when  that 
time  arrives,  the  chair,  interrupting  business,  says: 
"The  time  for  adjournment  has  arrived;  "  then,  after 
waiting  a  moment  (to  give  a  chance  for  a  motion 
"that  the  time  be  extended"  or  for  a  motion  to 
adjourn)  she  adds:  "the  club  stands  adjourned." 
If  it  is  desired  to  continue  the  session,  an  independ- 
ent motion  to  extend  the  time  (either  indefinitely  or 
definitely)  is  made,  put  to  vote,  and  acted  upon 
accordingly. 


1 66      THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

Where  there  is  no  fixed  time,  a  motion  may  be 

made  "that  the  club  adjourn  at o'clock,"  and 

this  takes  its  place  with  other  independent  motions, 
having  no  right  of  precedence. 

Associated  also  with  the  motion  to  adjourn,  is  the 
motion  to  fix  the  time  to  which  to  adjourn,  or  for 
re-assembling.  In  societies  with  a  stated  time,  this 
is  not  needed;  it  is  of  use  only  in  temporary  assem- 
blies, adjourning  from  day  to  day.  It  is  debatable, 
amendable,  and  has  no  right  of  precedence.  It  is 
sometimes  said  to  be  entitled  to  precedence  over  the 
motion  to  adjourn,  but,  being  debatable,  it  is  not  so 
entitled.  When  a  motion  to  adjourn  has  been  made  and 
the  time  for  the  next  meeting  has  not  been  fixed,  the 
chair,  whose  duty  it  is  to  see  that  matters  are  properly 
conducted,  will  remind  the  mover  that  no  time  has 
been  fixed  for  the  next  session,  and  she  will  with- 
draw her  motion  to  make  way  for  one  fixing  the  time 
for  re-assembling,  she  retaining  the  right  to  renew 
the  motion  to  adjourn  afterward.  If  she  refuses  to 
withdraw  the  motion  to  adjourn,  it  must  be  put  to 
/ote,  and  the  assembly,  which  "  is  supposed  to  know 
what  it  wants,"  as  Warrington  says,  will  vote  it 
down,  unless  they  desire  no  further  sessions. 

The  form  of  this  motion  is :  "  I  move  that  when 


TO  LAY  UPON  THE   TABLE  167 

we  adjourn,  we  adjourn  to  meet  on  Tuesday  next  at 
three  o'clock." 

125.  The  Motion  to  Lay  upon  the  Table. 
Second  in  rank  comes  the  motion  to  lay  upon  the 
table.     Its  use  is  to  delay  final  action,  or  to  give  time 
for  further  investigation.      It    cannot   be   debated, 
amended,   committed,   postponed,   repressed,  or  re- 
considered.    It  yields  only  to  the  motion  to  adjourn 
and  to  questions  of  privilege  and  order;  once  de- 
feated, it  can  be  renewed  only  under  the  same  con- 
ditions as  the  motion  to  adjourn :  a  defeated  motion 
to  adjourn  not  being  "substantial  business." 

126.  Its  Effect.     A   motion  to   lay   upon   the 
table,    lays  upon  the  table  both  the  measure  under 
consideration  and  all  the  questions  dependent  upon 
it.     It  cannot  be  applied  to  a  part  of  a  question, 
but,  whenever  made  in  reference  to  a  part,  applies  to 
the  whole.     If  the  motion  prevails,  the  whole  mat- 
ter, with  its  pending   amendments  and  dependent 
motions,  goes  to  the  table,  that  is,  it  is  laid  aside, 
suspended ;  and  some  other  business  is  taken  up. 

127.  Taking  from   the  Table.     Immediately 
afterward  or  at  any  later  time,  either  at  the  same  or 
at  a  future  session,  the  subject  may  be  taken  from 
the  table.     The  motion  to  take  from  the  table,  how- 


1 68       THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

ever,  is  not  a  dependent  motion.  It  has  no  right  of 
precedence,  and  takes  its  chance  with  other  inde- 
pendent motions.  Its  effect,  if  carried,  is  to  resume 
the  subject  at  the  point  interrupted.  If  a  question 
is  tabled,  and  no  motion  is  afterward  made  to  take 
it  from  the  table,  it  is  killed.  Thus,  a  motion 
to  table,  temporarily  or  permanently  disposes  of 
the  whole  subject  under  consideration. 

Illustration.  (See  Section  117.)  The  independent 
motion  with  its  various  amendments  being  under 
consideration,  the  dependent  motions  to  commit 
and  to  postpone  are  made;  finally  Mrs.  Allen  says: 
"I  move  to  lay  upon  the  table."  The  chair  says: 
"  It  is  moved  to  lay  the  question  upon  the  table. 
Those  in  favor  *  *  *  It  is  carried,  and  the  ques- 
tion of  the  club  becoming  incorporated  goes  to  the 
table.  What  is  now  the  pleasure  of  the  meeting?  " 
[Other  business  is  doneJ\  Mrs.  Allen  later,  there 
being  no  business  before  the  meeting,  obtains  the 
floor  and  says :  "  I  move  to  take  from  the  table  the 
motion  'that  the  club  take  steps  to  become  incorpo- 
rated. ' ?  The  chair  states  the  motion,  and,  if  it  is 
carried,  says :  "  The  motion  is  again  before  us,  and 
the  first  question  is  upon  the  pending  motion  to 
postpone."  She  then  proceeds  to  put  to  vote  that 


TO  LAY  UPON  THE   TABLE          169 

motion,  and,  if  it  is  lost,  the  other  dependent 
motions,  to  commit  and  to  amend,  and  finally, 
unless  otherwise  disposed  of,  the  main  question. 

It  is  advisable  for  the  chair,  in  putting  to  vote  a 
motion  to  lay  upon  the  table,  to  warn  the  members 
that  this  motion  carries  to  the  table,  not  only  the 
main  question,  but  also  all  its  attachments. 


SUMMARY 

The  motion  to  adjourn  takes  precedence  of  all 
other  motions.  When  an  independent  motion,  it 
may  be  briefly  debated ;  when  dependent,  no  action 
can  be  taken  except  to  vote  upon  it. 

A  motion  to  adjourn  is  always  first  in  order, 
but  it  cannot  be  made,  i.  When  a  member 
has  possession  of  the  floor;  2.  During  voting;  3. 
After  the  previous  question  is  moved;  4.  When  a 
previous  motion  to  adjourn  immediately  precedes 
it,  with  no  substantial  business  intervening.  Ques- 
tions of  privilege  and  of  order  may  delay  the  putting 
of  the  motion  to  adjourn. 

A  rejected  motion  to  table  is  not  "substantial 
business." 

If   a   dependent   motion  to    adjourn    is   carried, 


1/0       THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

at  the  next  session  business  is  resumed  at  the 
point  interrupted. 

If  a  meeting  adjourns  at  its  regular  time,  any 
unfinished  business  takes  its  place  in  the  order  of 
business  for  the  next  session. 

When  the  time  for  adjournment  is  fixed,  the 
chair  adjourns  the  meeting  at  that  time,  unless  a 
motion  is  made  to  extend  the  session. 

A  motion  may  be  made  to  fix  the  time  to  adjourn. 
This,  with  the  motion  to  fix  the  time  for  re-assem- 
bling, is  an  independent  motion,  having  no  right  of 
precedence. 

The  motion  to  lay  upon  the  table  yields  only  to 
the  motion  to  adjourn.  It  is  subject  to  the  same 
limitations  as  that  motion. 

A  motion  to  lay  upon  the  table  carries  to  the  table 
the  whole  subject,  with  all  its  dependent  motions. 
If  made  upon  a  part,  it  applies  to  the  whole. 

The  subject  may  be  taken  up  again  at  any  future 
time  by  an  independent  motion  to  take  from  the 
table,  the  question  being  resumed  at  the  point 
interrupted. 


THE  MOTIONS   TO  POSTPONE        1 7 1 

CHAPTER   XVI 
THE   MOTIONS   TO    POSTPONE 

To  POSTPONE  TO  A  STATED  TIME;  ITS  EFFECT; 
LIMITATION;  To  POSTPONE  INDEFINITELY;  ITS 
EFFECT. 

128.  To  Postpone  to  a  Stated  Time.  This 
motion  is  fourth  in  the  list,  being  preceded  by  the 
motions  to  adjourn,  to  table,  and  for  the  previous 
question.  When  a  motion  to  postpone  is  pending, 
if  the  previous  question  is  ordered  upon  the  main 
question,  such  motion  to  postpone  is  "cut  off,"  and 
not  simply  deferred.  On  the  contrary,  if  the  motion 
to  adjourn  or  to  table  prevails  while  the  motion  to 
postpone  is  pending,  it  is  then  simply  suspended  or 
laid  aside,  coming  up  again  in  company  with  the 
main  question  to  which  it  is  attached  whenever  that 
is  resumed.  The  motion  to  postpone  may  be  debated 
and  amended  (as  to  the  hour),  but  cannot  be  com- 
mitted, tabled,  repressed,  or,  of  course,  postponed. 
It  cannot  be  reconsidered,  unless  this  is  done 
immediately.  Its  object  is  to  assign  the  subject  to 


t; '2       THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

some  specified  time,  in  order  to  gain  fuller  consid- 
eration. The  effect  upon  it  of  the  previous  question 
is  considered  in  section  61. 

129.  Its  Effect.  Like  the  motion  to  table,  this 
motion  suspends  action  upon  the  question;  but, 
while  that  suspends  indefinitely,  this  assigns  defi- 
nitely. When  the  subject  which  was  postponed 
comes  up  again,  it  is  called  a  "special  assignment." 
A  motion  to  postpone,  postpones  the  whole  subject. 
If  the  motion  to  postpone  is  lost,  it  can  be  renewed 
after  substantial  business  intervenes. 

If  the  motion  to  postpone  is  carried,  the  subject 
postponed  is  laid  aside,  being  taken  charge  of  by 
the  secretary,  until  the  time  comes  to  which  it  was 
postponed.  Then,  whatever  may  be  doing,  it  is  in 
order.  The  chair  interrupts  other  business  and 
calls  it  up,  or,  she  failing,  the  secretary  or  any 
member  may  call  for  it. 

Illustration.  The  same  motion  being  under  dis- 
cussion as  in  section  117,  and  motions  having  been 
made  to  amend,  and  to  commit,  Mrs.  Paine  obtains 
the  floor,  as  in  that  section,  and  says :  "  I  move  to 
postpone  the  consideration  of  this  question  for  one 
week,"  or,  "  I  move  to  postpone  for  one  week."  She 
may  make  the  time  more  definite  still,  as,  "one 


TO  POSTPONE   TO  A    STATED    TIME     173 

week  from  to-day  at  three  o'clock,"  but  she  must 
assign  some  time,  and  not  move  simply  "to  post- 
pone." The  chair  then  says:  "It  is  moved  to  post- 
pone this  question  to  one  week  from  to-day  at  three 
o'clock.  Are  you  ready  for  the  question  upon  post- 
ponement?" This  may  be  discussed,  may  be 
amended  by  altering  the  day  or  hour,  and  is  finally 
put  to  vote  in  the  usual  way.  If  it  is  carried  (instead 
of  lost,  as  in  section  117),  the  chair  says:  "It  is  a 
vote,  and  the  consideration  of  the  motion  regarding 
the  incorporation  of  our  club  is  postponed  till  next 
Tuesday  at  three  o'clock."  When  next  Tuesday 
arrives,  other  business  is  done  until  three  o'clock, 
and  then  the  president  says :  "  The  time  has  arrived 
to  which  was  assigned  the  consideration  of  the 
question  of  incorporation.  That  matter  is  now 
properly  before  us." 

If  it  be  desired  to  finish  some  other  business,  a 
motion  maybe  made  "to  lay  the  special  assignment 
upon  the  table ; "  and  if  this  prevails,  it  is  laid  aside, 
to  be  taken  up  again  later.  But,  if  the  special 
assignment  is  not  laid  aside  (or,  when  it  is  again 
taken  up),  the  president  continues:  "The  first  ques- 
tion is  on  the  motion  to  commit "  (this  having  been 
pending  when  t-he  main  question  was  postponed) ; 


174       THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

she  then  proceeds  to  put  the  motion  to  commit 
to  vote,  and  then  whatever  other  motions  are  neces- 
sary for  the  disposal  of  the  whole  measure. 

If  the  chair  fails  to  call  up  the  question  at  the 
specified  hour,  any  one  may  rise  and  say:  "Mrs. 
President,  has  not  the  time  arrived  for  the  special 
assignment?  "  She  may  specify  it  by  name  also. 

If  there  is  no  hour  assigned,  but  simply  a  day,  it 
comes  up  under  the  head  of  unfinished  business. 

The  interrupted  business  is  laid  aside  without  any 
motion  to  do  so.  It  is  simply  held  in  abeyance  till 
the  special  assignment  is  disposed  of,  to  be  resumed, 
either  after  that  is  settled  or  at  the  next  meeting,  as 
unfinished  business. 

130.  Limitation.    The  motion  to  postpone  can  be 
amended  only  as  to  the  time.     It  cannot  be  changed 
into  the  motion  to  postpone  indefinitely.     Neither 
can  a  motion  be  made  to  postpone  to  a  day  when 
the  association  will  not  be   in  session,    since   this 
is  equivalent  to  a  motion  to  postpone  indefinitely. 

131.  To  Postpone  Indefinitely.     This  is  not, 
properly    speaking,   a    motion    to    postpone,   but  a 
motion  to  reject  or  repress;  it  postpones  or  adjourns 
a  question  sine  die.     It  is  used  when  there  is  a  de- 
sire to  summarily  dispose  of  the  main  question.      It 


TO  POSTPONE  INDEFINITELY        175 

stands  lowest  in  the  order  of  precedence,  being  allow- 
able only  when  no  other  dependent  motion  is  pend- 
ing. It  may  be  debated,  but  it  cannot  be  amended, 
postponed,  committed,  tabled,  or  reconsidered,  and 
if  defeated  it  cannot  be  renewed  upon  the  same 
subject.  The  effect  upon  it  of  the  previous  ques- 
tion is  considered  in  section  61. 

132.  Its  Effect,  When  this  motion  prevails, 
it  simply  kills  the  question  to  which  it  applies.  Its 
effect  is  the  same  as  that  of  a  vote  taken  upon  the 
question  itself,  and  decided  in  the  negative.  It  is 
as  if  the  question  were  put  to  vote  in  the  opposite 
from  the  regular  way,  as  follows:  " Those  not  in 
favor  will  say  'Aye.' '  This  gives  the  advantage  of 
the  affirmative  vote  to  the  opponents  of  the  measure, 
instead  of  to  its  advocates.  This  advantage  is  not 
great,  however,  except  when  members  are  indifferent 
to  the  result.  The  motion  is  chiefly  useful  as  a 
trial  of  the  strength  of  the  opposition.  When  the 
opponents  are  sure  of  a  majority,  it  is  a  quick  way 
of  killing  a  measure.  Another  name  for  it,  and  one 
that  defines  its  effect,  is  the  motion  to  repress. 

Illustration.  The  illustration  in  section  117 
shows  the  form  of  making  this  motion.  If  Miss 
Lovell's  motion  had  been  carried  instead  of  lost, 


176     THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

the  chair  would  have  said :  "  It  is  a  vote,  and  the 
question  of  the  incorporation  of  the  club  is  indefi- 
nitely postponed."  This  ends  the  matter.  In 
order  to  bring  it  again  before  the  club  a  new 
motion  must  be  made  at  some  future  time. 

SUMMARY 

The  motion  to  postpone  is  fourth  in  the  order  of 
precedence. 

It  may  be  debated,  and  amended  (as  to  the  time). 

It  is  "cut  off"  by  the  previous  question. 

Its  effect  is  to  assign  to  some  definite  future  time 
the  main  question  with  its  attachments,  which  is 
then  called  a  "special  assignment." 

The  motion  to  postpone  indefinitely  is  last  in 
the  list. 

Its  effect  is  to  postpone  sine  die,  or  repress,  the 
main  question;  it  may  be  debated. 

Its  use  is  to  try  the  strength  of  the  opposition,  and 
to  kill  a  measure  without  waiting  for  the  regular 
vote. 


THE  MOTION  TO   COMMIT  1 77 

CHAPTER   XVII 
THE   MOTION    TO    COMMIT 

COMMITMENT;  EFFECT  OF  THE  MOTION  TO  COM- 
MIT; To  COMMIT  WITH  INSTRUCTIONS;  PART  OF 
A  QUESTION;  COURTESIES  IN  APPOINTMENT;  THE 
INDEPENDENT  MOTION. 

133.  Commitment.  "To  commit "  means 
"to  refer  to  a  committee."  This  motion  is  used 
when  it  is  desirable  to  have  a  measure  put  in  better 
shape,  or  to  gain  more  information  concerning  it. 
It  stands  fifth  in  the  order  of  precedence,  being 
superior  only  to  the  motions  to  amend  and  to 
repress.  The  effect  upon  it  when  the  superior 
dependent  motions  are  moved  is  the  same  as  that 
given  in  section  128  in  regard  to  the  kindred  motion 
to  postpone,  namely,  it  is  cut  off  by  the  previous 
question  and  deferred  by  the  others.  The  motion 
itself  may  be  debated,  but  can  be  neither  post- 
poned, repressed,  tabled,  nor,  of  course,  committed. 
The  simple  motion  "  to  commit  "  cannot  be  amended ; 
but  a  motion  to  commit  with  instructions,  or  a 
motion  indicating  the  size  of  the  committee,  or  the 


178      THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

manner  of  its  appointment,  can  be  amended.  It 
may  be  reconsidered,  if  it  is  done  at  once ;  but  after 
the  committee  has  been  formed,  and  has,  even  in 
the  slightest  degree,  taken  up  its  work,  the  motion 
to  commit  is  not  open  to  reconsideration.  If  lost, 
it  can  be  renewed  after  substantial  business  has 
intervened.  The  effect  upon  it  of  the  previous 
question  is  considered  in  section  61. 

Allied  to  the  motion  to  commit  is  the  motion  "to 
go  into  committee  of  the  whole."  This  means  that 
the  whole  assembly  resolve  itself  into  a  committee, 
for  a  less  formal  discussion  of  the  subject  in  hand. 
When  it  is  desired  to  go  into  committee  of  the  whole, 
a  motion  is  made  "  that  the  assembly  do  now  resolve 
itself  into  a  committee  of  the  whole."  If  this 
motion  is  carried,  the  presiding  officer  calls  some 
other  member  to  the  chair,  and  takes  her  place  on 
the  floor  of  the  house;  the  new  chairman  calls  the 
committee  to  order,  and  consideration  of  the  ques- 
tion committed  follows.  There  is  seldom  any 
occasion  for  committee  of  the  whole  in  ordinary 
assemblies.  See  Section  rjg. 

134.  Effect  of  the  Motion  to  Commit. 
When  a  measure  is  pending,  and  a  motion  is  made 
"to  commit,"  the  effect  of  this  motion,  if  carried, 


THE  MOTION   TO   COMMIT  179 

is  to  refer  to  some  committee,  the  whole  measure 
under  consideration.  For  the  time  being,  it  is 
removed  from  the  assembly  and  placed  in  the  hands 
of  a  committee.  It  becomes  necessary,  therefore, 
to  form  that  committee  at  once,  and  to  instruct 
them.  They  then  take  the  matter  in  charge,  do  as 
they  are  instructed,  and  report  back  to  the  assembly, 
at  some  future  time,  the  measure  as  revised  by 
them,  adding  whatever  recommendations  they  may 
see  fit.  It  follows  that  if  any  amendments  are 
pending  when  the  motion  to  commit  is  carried, 
these  are  considered  by  the  committee  and  reported 
upon  also,  being  incorporated  in  the  main  question 
if  favored  by  them,  and  omitted  if  not.  A  pending 
motion  to  repress  would  be  cut  off  by  commitment* 
there  could  be  no  other  dependent  motions  pending, 
since  the  other  four,  if  made,  would  have  been 
decided  before  the  motion  to  commit. 

Illustration.  The  motion  regarding  incorporation 
being  under  consideration  [see  section  117],  Mis? 
^Long  obtains  the  floor  and  says :  "  I  move  to  com- 
mit,"  or,  "  to  refer  the  matter  to  a  committee."  The 
chair  says:  "It  is  moved  to  commit.  Are  you  ready 
for  the  question  ?  *  *  *  Those  in  favor  *  *  *  It  is 
carried,  and  the  question  whether  the  club  shall  be- 


l8o      THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

come  incorporated  is  referred  to  a  committee.     Of 
how  many  shall  that  committee  consist? " 

Mrs.  Robbins  says:  "I  move  that  it  consist  of 
five."  This  is  discussed,  if  other  numbers  are 
suggested  the  number  is  decided  upon  as  shown  in 
section  108,  and  is  settled  by  vote.  The  chair  then 
says :  "  How  shall  that  committee  be  appointed,  - 
by  the  chair,  or  from  the  floor?  "  A  motion  is  made 
"that  it  be  appointed  by  the  chair"  or  "that  it  be 
nominated  from  the  floor;  "  and  this  is  put  to  vote. 
If  it  is  the  former,  the  chair  appoints,  either  at  once, 
or  before  the  close  of  the  session,  five  members  to 
serve  as  this  committee,  the  one  first  named  acting 
as  chairman  until  the  committee  meets  and  elects  its 
chairman ;  or,  the  chair  may  appoint  one  as  the  chair- 
man. If  the  motion  to  nominate  from  the  floor  pre- 
vails, the  process  is  that  described  in  sections  6  and 
15.  The  committee  may  then  be  instructed  in  any 
way,  or  it  may  be  given  "full  powers."  A  motion 
is  made,  i.  "That  the  committee  be  instructed  to 
consult  a  lawyer  in  regard  to  incorporation,  and 
report  at  the  next  meeting;"  or,  2.  "That  the 
committee  be  given  full  powers  upon  the  question 
of  incorporation."  See  Section  14.0. 

If  a  question  is  referred  to  a  standing  commit- 


THE  MOTION  TO  COMMIT  l8l 

tee,  instead  of  to  a  special  one,  the  proper  motion 
is,  "  that  the  question  be  referred  to  the  committee 

on ."  If  this  is  carried,  the  matter  goes  to  that 

committee  at  once. 

Instead  of  the  simple  motion  "to  commit,"  a 
more  definite  motion  maybe  made,  as:  "that  the 
subject  be  referred  to  a  committee  of  five,  to  be 
appointed  by  the  chair."  This  can  be  put  as  one 
motion,  but  it  is  better  to  "  divide "  it  [see  section 
4i\  into  its  three  distinct  parts,  putting  each  one 
separately.  The  form  of  putting  this  motion  and 
its  effect,  are  the  same  as  in  the  simple  motion  to 
commit,  and  it  is  subject  to  the  same  rules;  it  may 
be  debated  and  amended  at  each  stage. 

135.  The  Motion  to  Commit  with  Instruc- 
tions. If  a  motion  to  commit  is  made,  including 
certain  instructions  to  the  committee,  these  in- 
structions cannot  be  divided  from  the  rest  of  the 
motion,  but  must  be  put  to  vote  with  the  motion 
to  commit.  If  it  is  desired  to  get  rid  of  the 
instructions,  or  to  commit  without  instructions, 
a  motion  is  made  "to  amend  by  striking  out  the 
instructions."  For  example,  a  motion  "to  refer 
the  subject  to  a  committee  of  five,  to  be  appointed 
by  the  chair,  and  to  instruct  the  committee  to 


182      THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

consult  a  lawyer,"  cannot  be  divided  into  its  four 
parts,  but  can  be  divided  into:  i.  A  motion  to 
refer  to  a  committee,  and  instruct  them  to  consult  a 
lawyer;  2.  That  the  number  be  five;  3.  That  it 
be  appointed  by  the  chair.  The  first  motion  can  then 
be  amended  by  a  motion  "  that  the  instructions  be 
stricken  out,"  and  it  will  then  be  the  simple  motion 
to  commit.  Other  instructions  may  or  may  not 
be  inserted  afterward.  Rule.  —  The  motion  to  commit 
with  instructions  is  not  divisible. 

136.  Part  of  a  Question.     Any  intrinsic  part 
of  a  subject  can  be  committed,  the  other  portions 
continuing    to    be    acted    upon   while    this    is    in 
committee,  — final    action    on    the    whole    being 
deferred   till   the   part   referred    is   reported  back. 
This    will     usually    happen     when     mere     verbal 
improvement  is  wished  for. 

137.  Courtesies   in    Appointment.     An    im- 
pression prevails  that  the  mover  of  the  motion  to 
form  a  committee,  must  necessarily  be  appointed  its 
chairman.      This   is  one  of   the  courtesies  "more 
honored  in  the  breach  than  the  observance,"  and 
one  which,  since  it  endangers  freedom  and  equality, 
should  fall  into  disuse.     The  chair  should  appoint, 
or  the  assembly  nominate,  those  members  who,  from 


THE  MOTION  TO   COMMIT  183 

interest  in  the  matter,  or  from  general  ability,  are 
best  fitted  to  serve,  appointing,  as  often  as  suitable, 
one  or  more  new  members  to  serve  with  the  more 
experienced  ones.  If  the  mover  is  one  of  those  best 
fitted,  she  will  naturally  be  chosen  on  the  commit- 
tee, though  not  necessarily  as  its  chairman.  It  has 
already  been  said  that  the  one  nominated  first  is 
not  necessarily  the  chairman,  except  for  the  purpose 
of  calling  the  first  meeting.  It  is  well  to  have  a 
committee  consist  of  an  uneven  number,  in  order  to 
avoid  ties.  If  persons  not  present  are  appointed, 
they  are  notified  of  their  appointment  by  the  secre- 
tary of  the  society,  and  of  the  first  meeting  by  the 
acting  chairman  of  the  committee. 

Having  been  committed,  the  subject  is  closed  for 
the  time  being,  so  far  as  the  society  is  concerned, 
and  other  business  is  taken  up.  The  mode  of  pro- 
cedure when  the  committee  makes  its  report  is  con- 
sidered in  the  next  chapter. 

138.  The  Independent  Motion.  Besides  the 
dependent  motion,  relating  to  the  main  question, 
there  may  be  made,  at  any  time  when  no  motion  is 
pending,  .a  motion  to  form  a  committee  for  any  pur- 
pose. This  is  an  independent  motion,  entitled  to  no 
precedence,  and  subject  to  any  action  by  means  of 


1 84      THE   PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

any  of  the  dependent  motions.     It  is  itself  the  main 
question. 

SUMMARY 

The  motion  to  commit. is  a  motion  to  refer  to  a 
committee,  or  to  go  into  committee  of  the  whole, 
for  conference  on  a  stated  matter. 

It  stands  fifth  in  the  order  of  precedence.  It  is 
subject  to  the  same  restrictions  as  the  motion  to 
postpone. 

Its  effect  is  to  refer  to  some  committee,  standing 
or  special,  the  whole  subject  under  consideration, 
for  revision  or  investigation,  the  committee  to  re- 
port back  to  the  association. 

The  motion  to  commit  may  designate  also  the 
number  of  members  and  their  manner  of  appoint- 
ment; in  this  case  it  would  better  be  "divided." 

If  instructions  are  included  in  the  motion  to 
commit,  they  cannot  be  divided  from  that  motion 
and  put  separately  to  vote ;  but  they  may  be  stricken 
out  by  amendment. 

Part  of  a  measure  may  be  committed. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  appoint  or  nominate  on 
a  committee  the  one  who  makes  the  motion  to 
commit.  Persons  not  present  when  appointed  are 
notified  by  the  secretary. 


THE  COMMITTEE  AND  ITS  REPORT    185 

A  motion  to  form  a  committee  for  a  specified 
purpose  may  also  be  made;  this  is  an  independent 
motion,  unrelated  to  another,  and  is  made  when  no 
other  is  pending. 


CHAPTER   XVIII 
THE   COMMITTEE   AND   ITS    REPORT 

NATURE  OF  THE  COMMITTEE;  ITS  POWERS;  THE 
REPORT;  PRESENTATION  OF  THE  REPORT;  ITS 
RECEPTION;  THE  MINORITY  REPORT;  ILLUSTRA- 
TION OF  REPORTING;  RECOMMITMENT. 

139.  Nature  of  the  Committee.  A  committee 
is  a  dependent  body,  accountable  only  for  what  it 
is  instructed  to  do,  and  subject  to  the  society  which 
appoints  it.  Having  been  appointed,  it  meets  and 
organizes  as  described  in  sections  4,  5,  and  9. 

A  committee  meeting  is  conducted  according  to 
general  parliamentary  usages,  but  it  may  dispense 
with  such  formalities  as  rising  to  speak  and  sitting 
in  regular  order.  Matters  may  be  talked  over  in  a 
conversational  manner;  but  all  action  is  decided  by 
means  of  motions  and  votes  in  the  formal  way.  A 


1 86      THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

correct  record  is  kept  by  the  secretary,  or,  if  there  is 
no  secretary,  the  chairman  notes  down  all  the  votes 
taken.  Only  those  persons  chosen  to  serve  upon 
a  committee  are  competent  to  take  part  in  its  delib- 
erations. No  officer,  not  even  the  president,  is  a 
member  of  any  committee  unless  she  is  explicitly 
put  upon  it.  She  is  not  a  member  ex  qfficio,  and  any 
attempt  on  her  part  to  manipulate  or  advise  com- 
mittees should  be  resisted. 

The  committee  of  the  whole  is  simply  a  committee 
meeting  of  the  whole  body.  The  rules  binding  upon 
the  assembly  when  in  formal  session  are  suspended, 
debate  is  unrestricted,  the  previous  question  is  not 
allowed,  and  the  informalities  common  to  all  com- 
mittees are  permissible.  When  the  conference  is 
over,  the  committee  of  the  whole  "rises,"  instead 
of  adjourning,  the  regular  presiding  officer  resumes 
the  chair,  and  again  calls  the  assembly  to  order, 
the  chairman  of  the  committee  formally  reports  its 
action  to  the  assembly,  and  this  is  then  acted  upon 
as  if  it  were  the  report  of  a  small  committee. 

140.  Its  Powers.  When  a  committee  is 
instructed,  its  powers  extend  only  to  what  it  is 
instructed  to  do;  when  a  measure  is  committed 
without  instructions,  the  committee  revises  the 


THE  COMMITTEE  AND  ITS  REPORT    187 

measure  as  to  its  form,  incorporates  in  it  whatever 
amendments  have  been  passed,  and  makes  some 
recommendation  in  regard  to  it,  in  a  form  suitable 
to  be  discussed  and  voted  upon  by  the  association. 
A  committee  should  be  careful  not  to  exceed  its 
powers. 

When  a  committee  is  given  "full  powers,"  it  is 
empowered  to  act  as  if  it  were  an  independent  body. 
A  committee  is  given  full  powers  when  something 
is  to  be  accomplished,  which  the  society  has  voted 
to  do,  and  can  trust  to  the  committee  to  finish,  or, 
when  the  decision  of  a  mooted  question  can  be  left 
to  such  committee.  Its  action  is  final. 

Illustrations.  The  motion  "that  the  club  take 
steps  to  become  incorporated,"  being  under  discus- 
sion, a  simple  motion  "to  commit"  is  carried.  A 
committee  is  appointed  forthwith,  and  the  motion  is 
referred  to  it.  The  committee  considers  the  feasi- 
bility of  incorporation,  and  ascertains  what  is 
necessary  to  be  done.  At  the  proper  time,  it  reports, 
through  its  chairman,  "that  the  club  ought  (or 
ought  not)  to  become  incorporated,"  giving  the 
reasons,  and  the  process  necessary. 

If,  instead,  a  motion  had  been  made  "to  refer  to 
a  committee  with  instructions  to  consult  a  lawyer," 


1 88      THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

the  committee  simply  consults  a  lawyer  and  reports 
what  he  says,  making  no  recommendation. 

If  the  motion  had  been  "to  refer  the  matter  of 
incorporation  to  a  committee  with  l  full  powers,'  ' 
this  would  mean  that  the  committee  should  proceed 
to  get  the  club  incorporated,  and,  after  it  had  been 
done,  to  report  to  that  effect;  or,  if  after  investi- 
gation, it  disapprove  of  incorporation,  to  report 
"that  incorporation  of  the  club  is  inexpedient."  If 
the  club  prefers,  it  can  first  vote  to  become  incor- 
porated, and  then  form  a  committee  with  "full 
powers."  Such  a  committee  would  then  proceed  to 
get  the  club  incorporated. 

141.  The  Report.  When  the  work  of  the 
committee  is  done,  its  chairman  (or  some  member 
instructed  to  do  it)  prepares  a  report  which  covers 
all  the  points  referred,  with  the  committee's  conclu- 
sions concerning  them.  If  the  members  disagree, 
the  minority  may  prepare  another  report  (called  a 
"minority  report"),  embodying  their  conclusions. 
Reports  are  couched  in  simple,  concise  language, 
and  if  necessary  close  with  some  recommendation. 
For  example :  a  committee  instructed  "  to  ascertain 
the  price  and  desirability  of  the  halls  and  vestries 
in  town,"  will  prepare  its  report  somewhat  as 


THE  COMMITTEE  AND  ITS  REPORT    1 89 

follows:  "Your  committee  find  the  prices  of  the 
various  halls  and  vestries  to  be  as  follows :  Univer- 
sal ist  vestry,  $2.00  for  an  afternoon;  Methodist 
vestry,  $3.00;  Pythian  Hall,  $1.50  "  and  so  on;  then 
continuing:  "we  respectfully  suggest  that  the  two 
places  first  named  seem,  for  the  price,  the  most 
desirable.  Respectfully  submitted,  Julia  E.  Carter, 
for  the  Committee" 

Again,  a  committee  to  whom  was  referred  a  prop- 
osition without  instructions,  would  report:  "Your 
committee  recommend  the  passage  of  the  measure  in 
the  following  form"  etc.,  or,  "recommend  that  the 
measure  ought  not  to  be  adopted "  (giving  the 
reasons),  and  close  in  the  same  way  as  above. 

When  given  full  powers  it  will  report:  "Your 
committee  has  done  the  duty  assigned  to  it,  and  the 
Methodist  vestry  is  secured  as  our  place  of  meeting." 

142.  Presentation  of  the  Report.  A  com- 
mittee may,  or  may  not,  be  instructed  to  report  on  a 
specified  day.  If  it  is  so  instructed,  when  the  day 
comes,  the  chair  will  call  for  the  report,  when  she 
comes,  in  the  order  of  business,  to  "reports  of  com- 
mittees." If  not  so  instructed,  when  the  committee 
is  ready,  the  one  appointed  to  report  will  obtain 
the  floor,  at  some  time  when  no  other  business  is 


1 90      THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

pending,  or  when  reports  of  committees  are  called 
for,  and  say:  "Mrs.  President,  your  committee 
upon—  —is  ready  to  report."  The  chair  will  then 

say:  "Shall  the  report  of  the  committee  on be 

now  received?  Those  in  favor  *  If  decided 

in  the  negative,  the  committee  must  wait  till  some 
later  time,  when  the  floor  must  be  again  obtained 
and  the  same  procedure  followed.  If  decided  in 
the  affirmative,  as  it  usually  will  be,  the  committee's 
representative  says :  "  The  committee  to  whom  was 
referred  the  question  of  -  —  respectfully  reports  as 
-follows."  She  will  then  read  her  report. 

After  the  report  is  read,  the  committee's  work  is 
done.  There  need  be  no  vote  to  discharge  the  com- 
mittee ;  it  expires  with  the  presentation  of  its  report, 
and  its  members  have  in  future  no  more  to  do  with 
the  matter  than  any  other  members,  unless  they  are 
again  instructed  to  do  something  further,  in  which 
case  they  are  virtually  another  committee. 

143.  Reception  of  the  Report.  The  com- 
mittee having  made  its  report,  that  report,  which 
should  be  in  writing,  is  handed  to  the  presiding 
officer,  and  the  matter  in  its  new  form  is  then 
before  the  meeting  for  action. 

If  a  motion  is  then  made  that  the  "report  be 


THE  COMMITTEE  AND  ITS  REPORT    IQI 

accepted,"  and  this  motion  is  carried,  the  report, 
with  its  recommendations,  whatever  these  may  be, 
becomes  thereby  adopted,  and  the  matter  finally 
closed,  such  a  vote  being  equivalent  to  a  vote  by 
the  assembly  itself,  upon  the  whole  measure  re- 
ported, and  being  decisive  of  that  measure.  A 
motion,  therefore,  that  the  report  be  "accepted"  or 
"adopted  "  (the  terms  are  synonymous),  should  not 
be  made  except  when  no  discussion  and  no  other 
action  is  desired  upon  the  subject,  except  a  simple 
vote  approving  the  committee's  acts  and  adopting 
the  same  as  the  acts  of  the  assembly.  The  only 
times  when  this  is  the  correct  motion  to  make  are 
when  a  committee  has  been  given  full  powers,  or 
when  a  committee  has  been  appointed  to  do  a  cer- 
tain thing  (to  audit  accounts,  for  instance),  and  has 
done  it,  leaving  nothing  further  which  can  be  done 
by  the  assembly,  and  containing  no  recommendation. 
When  the  report  is  simply  a  report  upon  some 
measure,  revising  it  for  fresh  discussion  or  present- 
ing new  facts  for  the  consideration  of  the  assembly, 
—  when  it  is  not  final,  in  other  words,  —  a  motion 
"  that  the  report  be  accepted  "  is  not  correct,  since 
such  a  motion  will,  if  carried,  cut  off  all  further 
consideration.  Being  in  order,  the  report  comes 


I92       THE  PRECEDENCE    OF  MOTIONS 

before  the  meeting  without  any  vote  "  to  accept "  or 
"  to  adopt "  it. 

A  motion  may  be  made  "to  receive"  a  report 
simply  as  a  formality,  but  this  is  not  necessary;  the 
reports  having  been  made,  and  being  in  order,  is 
perforce  "received,77  and  the  only  time  when  this 
motion  is  proper  is  in  such  cases  as  the  one  cited  in 
section  142.  A  motion  "that  the  report  be  accepted 
and  adopted77  is  tautological,  either  term  being 
sufficient  alone,  and  meaning  :  that  the  assembly 
adopt,  without  further  discussion,  the  recommendations 
or  acts  of  the  committee. 

If  the  time  has  come  for  the  presentation  of  a 
report,  and  the  chair  or  the  committee  fails  to 
present  it,  a  member  may  move  "  that  the  report  of 

the  committee  on be  now  received,77  or  "that 

it  be  called  for.77  If  this  prevails,  the  committee 
must  report,  or  explain  why  they  do  not.  If  they 
are  not  ready,  they  may  ask  for  further  time,  and  a 
motion  may  be  made  "that  the  committee  be 
granted  further  time  and  instructed  to  report  on 
(naming  some  day)"  If  they  wish  to  be  discharged, 
a  vote  is  taken  upon  a  motion  "that  the  committee 
be  discharged  from  the  consideration  of  the  ques- 
tion of ."  It  then  comes  before  the  assembly 


THE  COMMITTEE  AND  ITS  REPORT    193 

in    its  original  form,  and  any  action  may  be  taken 
upon  it. 

144.  The    Minority    Report.      This     report, 
being  simply  the  dissent  of  the  minority,  is  not  a 
report,   properly   speaking.     It   is   read,    after   the 
report,  as  a  matter  of  courtesy,  but  no   action  need 
be  taken  upon  it.     It  is  not  before   the  meeting  for 
consideration.     The  only  thing  that  can  be  done 
with  the  minority  report  is  to  substitute  it  for  the 
report  of  the  majority.     This   is  the  same  as   an 
amendment  to  the  report,   and  it  is  entitled  to  no 
precedence  over  other  amendments. 

145.  Illustration  of  Reporting.     The  question 
of    the    incorporation    of    the   club    having    been 
referred   to    a   special    committee,    that   committee 
meets  and  prepares  its  report.     The  club  being  in 
session,    and    the    item    "  reports    of    committees " 
having  been   reached,  the  chair  says  :  "  Are  there 
any  committees  to  report  to-day?" 

Mrs.  Carter.  Mrs.  President,  your  committee  on 
incorporation  is  ready  to  report. 

The  Chair.  If  there  is  no  objection,  the  report 
will  be  now  received.  Or:  We  will  listen  to  the 
report  of  the  committee  on  incorporation,  instructed 
to  report  at  this  time. 


194      THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

Mrs.  Carter  (reading).  Your  committee  to  whom 
was  referred  the  question  of  the  incorporation  of 
our  club,  respectfully  reports  that  the  proceed- 
ings necessary,  although  a  little  complicated,  can 
easily  be  undertaken  under  the  guidance  of  a 
friendly  gentleman  who  understands  the  matter;  we 
therefore  recommend,  in  view  of  the  advantages  of 
incorporation  (which  have  been  forcibly  stated  by 
the  members,  and  therefore  need  not  be  repeated), 
that  the  club  take  steps  at  once  to  become  a  corpo- 
rate body. 

Respectfully  submitted. 

JULIA  E.   CARTER,  for  the  Committee. 

The  Chair  (receiving  the  report  from  Mrs.  Carter). 
You  hear  the  report  of  your  committee  and  its 
recommendation.  The  matter  is  now  before  you, 
the  question  recurring  upon  the  motion,  now 
favorably  recommended  by  the  committee,  "that 
the  club  take  steps  to  become  incorporated," 
What  is  your  pleasure  ? l  Debate  is  then  in 
order  upon  the  question  whether  the  club  shall 

1  The  chair  may  say  instead:  "You  have  heard  the  report  of  your  com- 
mittee. The  matter  of  incorporation  is  now  betore  you,  and  the  chair  awaits 
any  motion."  A  motion  could  then  be  made  "that  the  club  become  incor- 
porated," and  this  would  be  the  basis  for  action 


THE  COMMITTEE  AND  ITS  REPORT      1 95 

become  incorporated,  and  any  other  action  may 
follow. 

It  is  better  for  the  chair  not  to  say :  "  You  have 
heard  the  report;  what  will  you  do  with  it?" 
Having  been  made,  the  report  is  properly  before  the 
meeting,  and  the  question  is  open  for  debate. 

146.  Recommitment.  If  the  report  of  a  com- 
mittee is  not  satisfactory  to  the  assembly,  or  if, 
after  fresh  discussion,  new  questions  arise,  the 
measure  may  be  recommitted,  either  to  the  same 
or  to  another  committee.  The  motion  "  to  recom- 
mit" is  subject  to  the  same  rules  as  the  motion  to 
commit. 

SUMMARY 

A  committee  is  a  dependent  body,  whose  acts  are 
not  final;  it  may  dispense  with  certain  formalities, 
but  must  decide  matters  by  motion  and  vote;  its 
members  are  those  who  are  appointed  by  the  chair, 
or  nominated  from  the  floor,  to  serve  upon  it,  and 
none  others. 

The  committee  of  the  whole,  being  an  informal 
conference  of  the  assembly  as  a  whole,  is  released 
from  the  formalities  of  the  assembly,  and  subject  to 
the  same  rules  as  any  committee. 


196     THE  PRECEDENCE   OF  MOTIONS 

The  powers  of  the  committee  extend  (i)  to  what 
it  is  instructed  to  do ;  (2)  to  revision  of  the  form 
of  the  measure  and  investigation  of  facts  concern- 
ing it;  or  (3)  (in  case  it  is  given  "full  powers"), 
to  carry  out  the  work  assigned  to  it  as  if  it  were  an 
independent  body,  and  to  report  results  which  are 
final. 

A  written  report  of  what  has  been  done,  made  as 
concise  as  may  be,  is  prepared  by  some  member  so 
instructed  in  committee.  This  is  usually  followed 
by  some  recommendation. 

The  report  is  presented  when,  in  the  order  of 
business,  the  item  " reports  of  committees"  is 
reached,  or,  at  any  time  when  ready,  it  may  report 
by  obtaining  the  floor  for  that  purpose.  It  may 
also  be  instructed  to  report  at  a  specified  time. 

Having  reported,  the  committee's  work  is  done, 
and  it  is  tacitly  discharged,  no  vote  to  discharge  it 
being  necessary. 

A  motion  "  that  the  report  be  accepted "  is  in 
order  only  when  such  report  is  one  which  is  final 
and  is  not  to  be  considered  by  the  association. 
A  vote  "to  accept,"  adopts  all  the  recommendations 
of  the  committee  without  further  discussion,  and 
closes  the  matter. 


THE  COMMITTEE  AND  ITS  REPORT      197 

A  motion  "to  receive"  the  re-port  is  not  neces- 
sary (except  when  leave  is  asked  to  report  out  of 
the  proper  time),  because,  having  reported,  the 
report  is  necessarily  "received,"  and  is  before  the 
assembly  for  consideration  without  the  formality  of 
a  vote  to  receive. 

In  case  of  a  report  by  the  minority,  this  is  not 
properly  before  the  meeting,  and  can  be  brought 
before  it  only  by  a  motion  to  amend  by  substitution. 

A  measure  once  committed  may  be  recommitted, 
either  to  the  same  or  to  a  new  committee. 

Reports  of  committees,  and  any  other  official 
papers,  belong  to  the  society  and  are  to  be  pre- 
served by  it.  But  a  paper  or  lecture  read  before  a 
society,  either  by  a  member  01  a  non-member,  belongs 
to  the  writer,  unless  she  gives  to  the  society  the 
right  to  hold,  print,  or  otherwise  dispose  of  it. 


PART    V 

QUESTIONS   OF  PRIVILEGE  AND 
ORDER 


CHAPTER  XIX 
QUESTIONS    OF   PRIVILEGE 

NATURE  OF  THESE  QUESTIONS  ;  QUESTION  OF  PRIV- 
ILEGE DEFINED;  ITS  EFFECT;  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

147.  Nature  of  these  Questions.  It  has  been 
pointed  out  in  chapter  five,  that  the  regular  action 
of  an  assembly  is  properly  carried  on  by  means  of 
motions.  It  will  sometimes  happen,  however,  that 
something  occurs  requiring  immediate  action,  and 
which  cannot  wait  until  a  new  motion  would  be  in 
order.  A  rule  is  broken,  a  mistake  is  made,  or  an 
urgency  arises.  These  must  be  met;  and  the  means 
for  meeting  them  are  called  questions  of  privilege 
and  questions  of  order.  These  are  not  motions  ;  they 
take  precedence  of  all  motions,  are  always  in  order, 
may  interrupt  any  business  (even  to  taking  the  floor 
from  a  member),  and  are  decided,  temporarily  at 
least,  before  the  pending  business  is  resumed. 
When  they  are  settled,  the  business  is  taken  up 
again  at  the  point  interrupted.  A  question  of 


202  QUESTIONS  OF  PRIVILEGE 

privilege  is  superior  to  a  question  of  order,  in  the 
line  of  precedence. 

In  section  122,  it  was  queried  whether  among  the 
limitations  to  the  rule  that  "a  motion  to  adjourn 
is  always  first  in  order, "  might  not  also  be  reckoned 
the  raising  of  a  question  of  privilege  or  of  order,  the 
claim  being  that  their  urgency  gives  them  the  right 
of  precedence  over  even  this  imperative  motion. 

Since  these  questions,  if  not  raised  immediately, 
are  not  admissible  at  all,  it  would  seem  only  right 
to  admit  them  when  a  motion  to  adjourn  is  pending, 
as  well  as  when  any  other  motion  is  pending.  A 
question  of  privilege,  if  not  really  urgent,  could  be 
ruled  inadmissible  by  the  chair  after  it  was  stated 
by  the  member,  and  this  would  dispose  of  the  diffi- 
culty so  far  as  that  is  concerned;  while  in  regard  to 
the  question  of  order,  inasmuch  as,  to  be  admissible, 
//  must  relate  to  the  matter  pending  (see  sections  151 
and  153),  it  could  never  interrupt  a  motion  to  adjourn 
except  in  a  case  where  the  mover  of  that  motion,  in 
making  it  broke  one  of  the  four  rules  given  in  sec- 
tion 122,  and  the  question  of  order  were  raised  to 
correct  her  error.  The  further  provision,  that  if  a 
motion  to  adjourn  be  interrupted,  the  question  interrupt- 
ing it  must  be  decided  without  debate  or  appeal,  would 


QUESTIONS  OF  PRIVILEGE  203 

seem  to  guard  sufficiently  the  "right  of  the  assem- 
bly to  terminate  its  sitting  at  anytime,"  which  rule 
is  the  reason  for  the  high  rank  of  the  motion  to  ad- 
journ. The  conclusion  is  therefore,  that,  in  spite  of 
the  rigidity  of  the  rule  that  the  "motion  to  adjourn 
is  always  first  in  order,"  a  question  of  privilege  or  of 
order,  in  the  rare  cases  where  they  could  occur, 
would  interrupt  such  motion,  taking  precedence  of 
the  motion  to  adjourn  as  well  as  of  all  other  mo- 
tions. See  page  220  for  an  illustration. 

148.  Questions  of  Privilege  Defined.  Ques- 
tions of  privilege  are  questions  relating  to  some 
matter  foreign  to  the  business  in  hand  ;  they  usually 
raise  some  query  regarding  the  rights  and  privi- 
leges of  the  assembly  itself,  or  of  some  individual 
member  thereof.  They  rarely  occur,  and  they  can 
be  easily  settled.  A  good  example  arose  some  two 
years  ago  in  the  United  States  Senate,  when  it  was 
suspected  that  newspaper  reporters  were  secreted 
in  the  Senate  galleries  during  the  secret  sessions. 
They  had  no  right  there,  these  sessions  not  being 
open  to  the  public,  and  by  their  presence  the  privi- 
lege of  the  Senate  to  hold  sessions  closed  to  the 
public  was  abridged.  A  senator  raised  a  question 
of  privilege,  and  means  were  taken  to  expel  the 


204          QUESTIONS  OF  PRIVILEGE 

intruders.  Other  examples  would  be:  the  sudden 
extinction  of  the  lights;  the  need  of  ventilation; 
the  disturbance  of  a  meeting  by  a  disorderly  mem- 
ber or  outsider;  the  desire  of  a  member  to  make  an 
immediate  statement  or  report,  rendered  obligatory 
because  of  his  sudden  and  necessary  departure;  an 
injustice  done  to  a  member;  charges  against  official 
character  in  a  misreported  speech ;  in  short,  any  exi- 
gency which  imperatively  requires  attention.  Rising 
to  make  an  explanation  is  not  necessarily  a  question 
of  privilege.  A  member  is  usually  allowed,  as  a 
matter  of  courtesy,  to  take  the  floor  for  an  explana- 
tion, but  has  no  right  to  it;  if  there  is  objection, 
the  question  of  granting  time  to  make  an  explana- 
tion is  put  to  vote  and  decided  by  the  majority.  It 
cannot  interrupt  other  business. 

149.  Its  Effect.  It  is  the  prerogative  of  the 
chair  to  decide  whether  a  question  thus  interjected 
is,  or  is  not,  properly  a  question  of  privilege.  The 
member  who  wishes  to  raise  it,  does  not  obtain  the 
floor  as  in  making  a  motion,  but  rises,  interrupts 
business,  if  necessary,  and  says :  "  Mrs.  President, 
I  rise  to  a  question  of  privilege."  She  is  asked  by 
the  chair  to  state  it,  does  so,  the  chair  decides 
whether  it  is  a  proper  question  of  privilege, 


QUESTIONS  OF  PRIVILEGE  205 

and  if  she  says  it  is  not,  the  member  may  appeal. 
If  it  is  allowed,  a  motion  l  is  then  made,  in  order 
to  bring  the  matter  before  the  assembly  for  discus- 
sion ;  and  this  motion  is  considered  at  once,  though 
not  of  necessity  decided  at  once,  since  it  may  be 
tabled,  postponed,  —  in  short,  treated  like  any  other 
motion.  All  proceedings  are  stayed  till  it  is 
decided;  then  they  are  resumed,  a  member  inter- 
rupted retaining  her  right  to  the  floor. 

150.  Illustrations.  A  certain  measure  is  under 
discussion,  and  Mrs.  Paine  is  speaking. 

Mrs.  Friend  (interrupting).  Mrs.  President,  I 
rise  to  a  question  of  privilege. 

The  Chair  (rising).  The  member  will  state  her 
question  of  privilege.  [Mrs.  Paine  sits.'] 

Mrs.  Friend.  I  am  very  sorry  to  say  it,  Mrs. 
President,  but  it  is  impossible  for  those  of  us  who 
are  seated  in  the  rear  of  the  hall  to  hear  what  is 
said,  on  account  of  the  whispering  of  certain  mem- 
bers. (Sits.} 

The  Chair.  This  must  certainly  be  regarded  as 
a  proper  question  of  privilege,  the  first  right  of  the 
club  being  its  right  to  hear  what  is  said.  If  we  all 

1  Or,  in  certain  cases,  by  the  chair's  request  the  matter  is  adjusted  with- 
out action. 


206  QUESTIONS  OF  PRIVILEGE 

would  speak  freely  what  we  have  to  say,  on  our 
feet,  this  trouble  need  never  occur.  The  chair  will 
ask  the  members  to  preserve  order  and  quiet.  Mrs. 
Paine  will  proceed. 

(Mrs.  Paine  rises  and  goes  on  with  her  remarks?) 

Mrs.  Allen.     Mrs.  President,  I  rise  to  a  question 
of  privilege. 

The  Chair.     You  will  state  it,  please. 

Mrs.  Allen.  There  is  a  very  violent  knocking 
somewhere  (almost  as  distracting  as  the  knocking 
in  Macbeth).  Cannot  the  doorkeeper,  or  some  one, 
be  asked  to  investigate  ? 

The  Chair.  The  chair  will  entertain  any  motion 
upon  this  question  of  privilege. 

Mrs.  Allen.  I  move  that  the  doorkeeper  be 
invited  to  ascertain  the  cause  of  this  disturbance. 

\This  is  put  to  vote ;  the  doorkeeper  does  as  she  is 
instructed,  returns  and  reports  the  trouble  (unless  she 
has  adjusted  it  herself},  and  whatever  action  is  neces- 
sary follows,  business  being  suspended  meanwhile J\ 
*  #  *  #  #  =* 

Miss  Long.  Mrs.  President,  I  rise  to  a  question 
of  privilege. 

The   Chair.     Miss  Long  will  state  her  question. 

Miss  Long.     I   am  obliged  to  go  now,  and  have 


QUESTIONS  OF  PRIVILEGE  2O/ 

been  waiting  in  vain  for  a  chance  to  ask  for  some 
instruction  in  regard  to  the  work  of  our  committee 
on  the  library.  The  matter  cannot  very  well  wait. 

The  Chair.  The  question  is  properly  raised. 
What  is  the  pleasure  of  the  meeting? 

Miss  Lovell.  I  move  that  Miss  Long  have  time 
to  make  her  statement. 

[This  is  put  to  vote,  and  action  follows  accordingly, 
the  business  in  hand  being  interrupted,  and  then 
resumed  after  this  question  is  decided.  ] 

SUMMARY 

Questions  of  privilege  and  of  order  are  not 
motions ;  they  take  precedence  of  all  motions,  may 
interrupt  any  business,  and  are  always  in  order. 

A  question  of  privilege  takes  precedence  of  a 
question  of  order. 

It  relates  to  something  foreign  to  the  business  in 
hand,  and  raises  some  question  regarding  the  rights 
or  privileges  of  the  assembly  or  of  its  members. 

Its  effect  is  to  stay  all  proceedings  till  it  is 
decided.  The  chair  decides  whether  the  question 
is  a  proper  question  of  privilege;  a  motion  and 
vote  follow,  unless  the  matter  can  be  adjusted  by 
request  of  the  chair. 


208  QUESTIONS   OF  ORDER 

CHAPTER  XX 
QUESTIONS   OF   ORDER 

DEFINITION;  DUTY  OF  THE  CHAIR;  EFFECT  OF 
THIS  QUESTION;  THE  APPEAL;  TIE  VOTE  ON 
THE  APPEAL;  LIMITATIONS;  PRECEDENCE;  ILLUS- 
TRATIONS. 

151.  Definition.     A   question   of   order   differs 
from  a  question  of  privilege  in  being  directly  related 
to  the  matter  in  hand,  and  in  tending  to  correct  or 
perfect    the    proceedings   regarding   it.     Speaking 
not  to  the  question ;  making  a  motion  when  it  is  not 
in  order  of  precedence ;    indulging  in  personalities; 
breaking  any  parliamentary  rule,  are  examples;  the 
chair  may  be  out  of  order  (for  entertaining  a  motion 
not  admissible,  or  for  refusing  to  put  one  that  is,  for 
instance)  —  and  all  these   breaches  are   occasions 
for  raising  a   " question   of  order,"  which   is  also 
often  called  a  "point  of  order."    It  takes  precedence 
of  everything  except  a  question  of  privilege. 

152.  Duty  of  the  Chair.      It  is  the  first  duty 
of   the    chairman    to  preserve  order  and  decorum; 
and  this  means,    to  preserve    not  only  an   orderly 


QUESTIONS  OF  ORDER  209 

demeanor  of  the  assembly  as  a  whole,  but  also  to 
call  to  order  any  member  who  commits  a  breach  of 
order  or  a  parliamentary  error.  If  the  chair  fails 
to  notice  any  such  occurrence,  a  question  of  order 
is  raised  by  any  member. 

153.  Effect  of  a  Question  of  Order.  When 
the  question  of  order  is  raised,  all  business  pending 
is  interrupted,  is  suspended  till  the  point  is  settled, 
and  then  is  resumed.  If  a  member  is  speaking, 
she  retains  the  right  to  the  floor,  after  the  question 
of  order  is  settled,  unless  she  herself  is  decided  to 
have  been  out  of  order.  In  this  case,  if  objection 
is  made,  she  cannot  proceed,  even  if  in  order,  with- 
out a  vote  allowing  her  so  to  do. 

The  course  of  proceeding  is  similar  to  that  of  the 
question  of  privilege.  When  the  occasion  arises, 
the  member,  without  regularly  obtaining  the  floor, 
rises  and  says :  "  Mrs.  President,  I  rise  to  a  ques- 
tion of  order."  She  is  asked  by  the  chair  to  state 
it;  she  does  so,  and  the  chair  then  decides  whether 
it  is  "well  taken,"  saying:  "The  chair  decides  the 
question  of  order  to  be  well  taken,"  or  "to  be  not 
well  taken."  This  declaration  of  the  chair,  which 
is  called  a  "ruling,"  decides  the  question  (subject 
to  appeal),  and  matters  proceed  in  accordance  with 


210  QUESTIONS   OF  ORDER 

her  ruling.  There  is  no  vote  taken,  and  no  sub- 
mission of  the  question  to  the  assembly  for  dis- 
cussion. It  is  thus  seen  to  be  very  different  from 
a  motion.1 

Since  it  must  relate  directly  to  the  business  in 
hand,  it  follows  that  a  point  of  order  must  be  raised 
immediately  upon  the  occasion  for  it ;  if  it  is  de- 
layed, and  other  business  intervenes,  it  cannot  be 
raised  at  all.  If  it  relates  to-  words  spoken  in 
debate,  these  words  are  taken  down  by  the  secretary 
when  the  objection  to  them  is  raised. 

154.  The  Appeal,  If  any  member  is  dissat- 
isfied with  the  ruling  of  the  chair,  she  may 
"appeal,"  by  rising  and  saying:  "I  appeal  from 
the  decision  of  the  chair."  The  chair  may,  but 
need  not,  insist  upon  a  second  to  an  appeal,  which 
is  made  by  some  other  member  rising  and  saying: 
"I  second  the  appeal."  The  question  is  now  re- 
moved from  the  control. of  the  chair,  and  is  decided 
by  the  assembly,  which  by  vote  overrules  or  sustains 
the  chair's  ruling,  the  majority  deciding  it.  The 
form  for  putting  this  question  is :  "  Shall  the 
decision  of  the  chair  stand  as  the  judgment  (or 

1  The  chair  may  allow  remarks  before  giving  her  ruling,  but  she  is  not 
obliged  to,  and  she  may  stop  them  and  give  her  decision  at  any  time. 


QUESTIONS  OF  ORDER  211 

decision)  of  the  meeting?"  Debate  follows, — in 
which  the  chair  may  take  precedence  over  other 
members,  giving  her  reasons  for  her  ruling,  without 
leaving  the  chair,  —  and  then  the  question  is  put  to 
vote,  and  declared  as  follows :  "  The  decision  of  the 
chair  is  sustained,"  or  " overruled,"  as  the  case 
may  be.  This  vote  decides  the  matter  finally; 
it  cannot  be  reconsidered.  It  is  thus  seen,  that  in 
this,  as  in  all  other  matters,  final  authority  rests 
with  the  whole  body,  and  not  with  the  chairman. 
As  Warrington  says :  "  The  right  of  appeal  is  indis- 
pensable to  the  free  action  of  all  assemblies,  the 
presiding  officer  not  being  the  master,  but  the 
servant. " 

155.  Tie  Vote  on  an  Appeal.  A  tie  vote  on  a 
motion  defeats  the  motion,  as  has  been  shown.  A 
tie  vote  upon  an  appeal  has  the  opposite  effect;  it 
affirms,  instead  of  defeating.  The  decision  of  the 
chair  is  sustained  thereby.  The  reason  for  this  is 
that  the  ruling  of  the  chair  is  assumed  to  stand, 
unless  it  is  overthrown;  and  since  a  tie  vote  "ac- 
complishes nothing,"  it  cannot  overrule  a  decision. 
The  chair  will  then  not  need  (as  she  would  not 
wish)  to  vote  to  sustain  her  own  decision.  Rule: 
The  effect  of  a  tie  vote  on  an  appeal  is  to  decide  affirma- 


212  QUESTIONS  OF  ORDER 

tively  the  question:  "Shall  the  decision  of  the  chair 
stand!" 

156.  Limitations.  A  question  of  order  cannot 
be  committed,  amended,  or  reconsidered.  It  can- 
not be  tabled  or  postponed  without  at  the  same  time 
tabling  or  postponing  the  whole  matter  out  of  which 
the  question  of  order  arose.  The  same  is  true  of  the 
appeal.  It  cannot  be  acted  upon  by  any  of  these 
motions  separately  from  the  proceedings  out  of 
which  the  question  of  order  arose.  If  any  dependent 
motion  is  made  while  an  appeal  is  pending,  it  applies 
to  the  whole  matter  under  discussion,  which  is  post- 
poned, committed  (or,  as  the  case  may  be),  appeal, 
question  of  order,  and  all.  A  motion  to  lay  upon 
the  table,  therefore,  lays  upon  the  table  the  whole 
subject  under  consideration.1  As  an  appeal  is  usu- 
ally debatable,  it  would  seem  that,  when  debatable, 
the  previous  question  can  be  applied  to  it,  when 
expressly  moved  upon  the  appeal.  See  section  61. 

If  a  point  of  order  upon  a  point  of  order  is  raised, 
the  second  is  decided  first,  .but,  to  avoid  complica- 
tions, is  not  debatable,  nor  open  to  appeal.  If  the 
question  under  discussion  when  the  point  of  order 

1  See  the  Introduction,  for  the  practice  of  the  United  States  House  of 
Representatives,  which,  by  special  rule,  is  tha  opposite  of  this. 


QUESTIONS   OF  ORDER  21$ 

is  raised,  is  undebatable,  the  appeal  is  undebatable. 
If  a  question  of  order  interrupts  a  motion  to 
adjourn,  it  must  be  decided  without  debate  or 
appeal.  See  section  147. 

157.  Precedence.    It  may  be  well  to  repeat  here 
the  rule  regarding  the  rank  of  dependent  questions. 
When  a  motion  or  a  proposition  is  under  debate,  the 
following  matters  can  be  considered,  and  they  take 
precedence  of  one  another  in  the  order  given. — 

1.  Question  of  privilege. 

2.  Question  of  order. 

3.  Motion  to  adjourn. 

4.  Motion  to  lay  on  the  table. 

5.  Call  for  the  previous  question,, 

6.  Motion  to  postpone. 

7.  Motion  to  commit. 

8.  Motion  to  amend. 

9.  Motion  to  postpone  indefinitely. 

158.  Illustrations.  —  Questions  of  Order  and 
Appeals.     Th£  Mendon  Women's  Club  being  in 
session,    and     the     item    "  new    business "    being 
reached,  the  following  action  follows:  — 

Mrs.  Burns.     Mrs.  President. 
The  Chair.     Mrs.  Burns. 


214  QUESTIONS   OF  ORDER 

Mrs.  Burns.  I  move  that  at  the  close  of  the 
season,  our  club  have  a  luncheon.  It  will  be  help- 
ful to  sociability,  and  I  am  sure  we  should  all 
enjoy  it. 

The  Chair.  You  hear  the  motion,  that  the  club 
have  a  luncheon  to  close  its  season.  The  question 
is  before  you  for  discussion. 

Miss  Lovell.     Mrs.  President. 

The  Chair.     Miss  Lovell. 

Miss  Lovell.  Why  could  we  not  call  it  a  break- 
fast instead?  I  move  to  amend  by  striking  out  the 
word  "luncheon,"  and  inserting  the  word  "break- 
fast" 

The  Chair.     You  have  heard  — 

Mrs.  Burns.  Mrs.  President,  I  accept  the  sug- 
gestion. It  makes  no  difference  what  we  call  it,  so 
that  we  have  it. 

The  Chair.  The  amendment  is  accepted  if  there 
is  no  objection,  and  the  question  is  upon  having  a 
breakfast. 

Mrs.  Allen.     Mrs.  President. 

The  Chair.     Mrs.  Allen. 

Mrs.  Allen.  I  object  to  this  motion.  There 
will  be  a  great  deal  of  expense  attendant  upon  it, 
and  I  am  sure  many  of  us  could  not  afford  it.  Do 


QUESTIONS  OF  ORDER  21$ 

let  us  have  one  society  in  town  that  leaves  eating 
out  of  its  programme!  There  is  the  Young 
Women's  Club,  and  the  J.  R.  S.  and  the  K.  C.  L. ! 
They  are  always  having  suppers;  and  I'  m  sure 
why  they  wish  — 

The  Chair  (rising).  The  member  will  kindly 
proceed  in  order.  She  is  at  present  speaking  off  the 
question.  Criticism  of  other  clubs  is  not  in  order. 

Mrs.  Allen.  Very  well;  I  will  endeavor  to 
proceed  in  order,  Mrs.  President.  I  am  decidedly 
opposed  to  this  idea! 

Miss  Sawyer.     Mrs.  President. 

The  Chair.     Miss  Sawyer. 

Miss  Sawyer.  I  am  as  decidedly  in  favor  of  it. 
We  need  something  of  a  social  nature  in  order  to 
cement  our  club  friendship  and  make  us  a  little 
family,  as  it  were.  Breaking  bread  together  always 
helps  the  spirit  of  good  fellowship  without  which 
no  club  can  be  a  success. 

Mrs.  Preston.     Mrs.  President. 

The  Chair.      Mrs.  Preston. 

Mrs.  Preston.  I  move  to  lay  this  question  upon 
the  table.  I,  for  one,  think  — 

The  Chair.  The  motion  to  table  is  undebatable, 
and  the  member  is  therefore  out  of  order.  Are  you 
ready  for  the  question  1 


2l6  QUESTIONS  OF  ORDER 

Mrs.  Paine.  Mrs.  President,  I  rise  to  a  question 
of  order. 

The  Chair.     You  will  please  state  it. 

Mrs.  Paine.  The  chair,  after  stating  that  the 
motion  to  table  is  undebatable,  asks  us  if  we  are 
ready  for  the  question,  thereby  implying  that  debate 
is  invited. 

The  Chair.  The  point  shows  that  our  member  is 
wide-awake,  but  it  is  not  well  taken  nevertheless. 
The  chair  asked:  "Are  you  ready?  "  to  give  oppor- 
tunity for  a  possible  motion  to  adjourn  or  for  a  new 
point  of  order  —  those  taking  precedence  of  the 
motion  to  table.  Are  you  ready?  Those  in  favor 
jf  the  motion  to  lay  this  motion  on  the  table  will 
say  "Aye"  *  *  *  It  is  lost. 

Mrs.  Robbins.     Mrs.  President. 

The  Chair.     Mrs.  Robbins. 

Mrs.  Robbins.  I  move  to  postpone  its  consider- 
ation for  one  week. 

The  Chair.  It  is  moved  to  postpone  for  one 
week.  Are  you  ready  ? 

Miss  Long.     Mrs.  President. 

The  Chair.     Miss  Long. 

Miss  Long.  I  move  to  refer  the  matter  to  a 
committee  consisting  o*  — 


QUESTIONS  OF  ORDER  2 17 

Mrs.  Robbins.  Mrs.  President,  I  rise  to  a 
question  of  order.  The  motion  to  commit  is  not 
now  in  order,  a  motion  to  postpone  being  pending. 

The  Chair.  The  point  is  well  taken.  The 
motion  to  commit  is  not  now  in  order,  the  motion 
to  postpone  taking  precedence.  Are  you  ready  to 
vote  on  the  motion  to  postpone  ?  Those  in  favor 
*  *  *  It  is  lost. 

Miss  Long.     Mrs.  President. 

The  Chair.     Miss  Long. 

Miss  Long.  I  now  renew  my  motion  to  refer  it 
to  a  committee  consisting  of  the  president,  trea- 
surer, and  recording  secretary. 

The  Chair.  You  hear  the  motion.  The  chair 
will  divide  the  motion,  putting  first  the  motion  to 
commit.  Are  you  ready? 

Miss  Faxon  (remaining  seated),  /think  we  ought 
to  dispose  of  this  matter  in  the  club  itself. 

Mrs.  Young.  Mrs.  President,  I  rise  to  a  ques- 
tion of  order. 

The  Chair.  Mrs.  Young  will  please  state  her 
question. 

Mrs.  Young.  The  last  speaker  did  not  rise  and 
address  the  chair. 

The  Chair.     The  chair  decides  that  point  to  be 


2l8  QUESTIONS   OF  ORDER 

well  taken.  All  debate  must  be  regularly  pro- 
ceeded with. 

Miss  Faxon  (rising).  I  stand  corrected,  Mrs. 
Chairman,  and  am  opposed  to  the  committee, 
because  it  gives  too  much  power  to  a  few. 

The  Chair.  The  assembly  could  of  course 
instruct  its  committee  after  appointment.  Are  you 
ready  ? 

Mrs.    Robbins^)  . 

,..  >  (rising  at  once).    Mrs.  President. 

Mrs.    Paine     )  ^ 

The  Chair.      Mrs.  Robbins. 

Mrs.  Robbins.      I  move  — 

Mrs.  Carter.     I  rise  to  a  point  of  order. 

The  Chair.     State  your  point  of  order,  please. 

Mrs.  Carter.  Mrs.  Paine  rose  before  Mrs. 
Robbins,  Mrs.  President.  She  is  seated  so  far 
from  the  chair,  that  probably  the  chair  overlooked 
her.  Is  she  not  entitled  to  the  floor  rather  than 
Mrs.  Robbins? 

The  Chair.  The  chair  must  decide  that  point  to 
be  not  well  taken.  She  saw  both  members  rise, 
and  gives  the  floor  to  Mrs.  Robbins ;  unless  Mrs. 
Robbins  yields  (?). 

Mrs.  Robbins.  Since  I  am  entitled  to  the  floor, 
I  think  I'll  keep  it,  Mrs.  President.  I  move  — 


QUESTIONS  OF  ORDER  219 

Mrs.  Carter.  I  appeal  from  the  decision  of  the 
chair. 

The  Chair.  Mrs.  Carter  appeals  from  the  chair's 
decision.  The  question  is,  Shall  the  decision  of 
the  chair  stand  as  the  judgment  of  the  club?  [De- 
bate may  follow.']  Those  in  favor  of  sustaining 
the  chair  will  say  "  Aye"  *  *  *  It  is  a  vote;  the 
decision  of  the  chair  is  affirmed,  and  Mrs.  Robbins 
will  resume,  the  question  being  upon  the  motion 
to  commit. 

Mrs.  bobbins.  I  move  the  club  do  now  ad- 
journ. 

The  Chair.  A  motion  to  adjourn  is  made. 
Those  in  favor  *  *  *  It  is  lost.  Those  in  favor  of 
the  motion  to  commit  *  *  *  It  is  lost.  What  is 
the  further  pleasure  of  the  club  ? 

Mrs.  Ellis.  It  looks  to  me,  Mrs.  President,  as 
if  certain  members  of  this  club  think  more  of  defeat- 
ing a  motion  they  don't  like,  than  of  getting  a  fair 
debate  upon  it.  One  speaker  here  has  left  no 
stone  unturned  to  secure  her  object! 

Mrs.  James.     I  rise  to  a  question  of  order. 

The  Chair.     Please  state  it. 

Mrs.  James.  The  last  speaker  is  indulging  in 
decided  personalities. 


22O  QUESTIONS  OF  ORDER 

The  Chair.  The  point  of  order  is  well  taken. 
Mrs.  Ellis  will  confine  herself  to  the  question. 

Mrs.  Ellis.  I  appeal  from  your  ruling,  Mrs. 
President.  I  have  been  careful  to  use  no  names, 
and  I  think  I  am  strictly  in  order. 

The  Chair.  An  appeal  is  taken.  Shall  the 
decision  of  the  chair  stand?  Those  in  favor  *  *  * 
It  is  lost.  Mrs.  Ellis  is  decided  to  be  in  order, 
and  may  proceed. 

Mrs.  Ellis.  I  only  desire  a  fair  discussion  of  a 
very  important  question,  and  I  think  — 

Miss  Willis.     Mrs.  President. 

The  Chair.      Miss  Willis. 

Miss  Willis.     I  move  we  adjourn. 

The  Chair.     A  motion  is  made  to  — 

Mrs.  Paine.  Mrs.  President,  I  rise  to  a  question 
of  order. 

The  Chair.     Please  state  it. 

Mrs.  Paine.  The  floor  cannot  be  taken  from  a 
member  for  the  making  of  a  motion  to  adjourn. 

The  Chair.  The  chair  decides  the  point  to  be 
•well  taken,  and  the  motion  to  adjourn  to  be  out  of 
order.  Mrs.  Ellis  wiU'resume. 

Mrs.  Ellis.  I  therefore  move  to  postpone  the 
whole  matter  to  two  weeks  from  to-day. 


QUESTIONS  OF  ORDER  221 

Mrs.  Granger.  Mrs.  President,  I  rise  to  a 
question  of  order.  Have  we  not  already  voted  not 
to  postpone?  Is  a  second  motion  in  order? 

The  Chair.  New  business  having  intervened,  a 
second  motion  to  postpone  is  in  order.  Are  you 
ready?  Those  in  favor  *  *  *  It  is  carried,  and 
the  question  of  holding  a  breakfast  is  postponed, 
and  will  be  made  a  special  assignment  for  two 
weeks  from  to-day.  The  chair  hopes  the  members 
will  take  special  pains  to  be  present  on  that  occa- 
sion, so  that  there  may  be  no  lack  of  due  consider- 
ation. The  time  has  now  come  to  adjourn  — 

Mrs.  Friend.     I  move  we  adjourn. 

The  Chair.  Those  in  favor  will  say  "Aye  " 
#.  #  *  The  ciub  stands  adjourned  to  one  week  from 
to-day  at  2.30  o'clock. 

SUMMARY 

A  question  (or  point)  of  order  relates  to  the 
matter  in  hand,  and  tends  to  perfect  or  correct  it. 

It  is  the  duty  of  the  chair  to  preserve  order  and 
correct  parliamentary  errors.  If  she  fails,  a 
member  " raises  a  question  of  order.'7 

The  effect  of  this  question  is  to  suspend  proceed- 
ings till  it  is  decided. 


222  QUESTIONS   OF  ORDER 

The  member  raising  it  does  not  "obtain  the 
floor,"  but  interrupts  business  anywhere  and  at  any 
time. 

It  must  be  raised  immediately  upon  the  occasion 
for  it;  if  business  intervenes,  it  is  inadmissible. 

The  chair  decides  whether  the  point  is,  or  is  not, 
"well  taken;'7  and  this  settles  the  matter,  subject 
to  appeal. 

Any  one  dissatisfied  with  the  ruling  may  appeal. 
The  question  whether  the  ruling  shall  stand  is  then 
decided  by  a  majority  vote. 

A  tie  vote  upon  an  appeal  affirms  the  chair's 
decision. 

Neither  a  question  of  order,  nor  an  appeal  from 
the  decision  upon  it,  can  be  committed,  amended, 
or  reconsidered;  the  question  and  also  the  appeal 
can  neither  be  tabled  nor  postponed,  without  at  the 
same  time  tabling  or  postponing  the  whole  subject 
to  which  they  relate.  When  the  appeal  is  debat- 
able, as  it  usually  is,  the  previous  question  may  be 
moved  upon  it. 


CONCLUSION 

THE  principles  and  forms  given  in  the  foregoing 
chapters  are  to  be  used  as  a  guide  in  conducting 
meetings.  Reading,  or  even  study,  however,  is 
not  enough  to  fit  one  to  become  a  good  parliamen- 
tarian. For  this, practice  is  necessary;  and  societies 
that  wish  to  conduct  their  sessions  properly  are 
recommended  to  hold  occasional  or  regular  execu- 
tive sessions,  at  which  parliamentary  law  may  be 
practised.  These  sessions  can  be  mock  sessions 
simply  for  practice;  but  it  is  more  helpful  to  adopt 
the  custom  of  doing  the  regular  business  of  the 
society  in  periodical  executive  sessions  of  the  whole 
membership,  thereby  practising  and  accomplishing 
something  besides.  A  club  whose  business  is  done 
by  a  small  directors'  board,  or  committee,  has  no 
opportunity  for  this  general  practice.  By  holding  a 
monthly  executive  meeting  (taking  one  of  the  regu- 
lar club  days  for  it),  by  bringing  up  before  it  all 
matters  of  business,  and  by  discussing,  modifying, 
and  taking  final  action  upon  them,  the  members  will 

223 


224  CONCLUSION 

learn  more  in  one  year  than  they  could  in  five  by 
mere  study  and  play-practice.  The  text-book  can  be 
used  for  study  at  home  and  for  reference  at  the  club. 
In  addition  to  this,  those  members  specially  inter- 
ested could  meet  occasionally  and  read  and  practise 
together.  These  methods  have  been  pursued  with 
great  profit  in  several  associations  known  to  the 
writer;  and  those  societies  in  which  opportunity  is 
given  for  all  to  have  a  voice  and  a  vote  in  the  busi- 
ness, are  conspicuously  progressive,  wide-awake, 
and  harmonious. 

An  organized  society  wishing  -to  adopt  this 
manual  as  its  authority,  will  insert  in  its  by-laws 
a  section  similar  to  this:  The  meetings  of  this  club 
shall  be  conducted  by  the  rules  of  parliamentary 
procedure,  the  "Woman's  Manual  of  Parliamentary 
Law  "  being  the  authority. 

Whenever  a  society  may  wish  to  dissent  from 
any  of  the  principles  herein  recommended,  a  special 
rule  can  be  made,  setting  forth  the  procedure  the 
society  prefers,  and  such  special  rule  will  govern  that 
society  instead  of  the  principle  laid  down  in  this 
book.  This  special  rule  need  not  be  included  in 
the  by-laws;  a  recorded  motion  is  equally  binding. 
For  example,  a  certain  society  may  deem  it  advis- 


CONCLUSION  225 

able  that  all  motions  shall  be  seconded,  or,  that  the 
making  of  the  motion  to  reconsider  shall  not  be 
restricted.  A  motion  may  then  be  made  "that  in 
this  club  every  motion  shall  be  seconded  before  it  is 
stated,7'  or,  "that  in  this  club  the  motion  to  recon- 
sider maybe  made  by  any  member."  Of  course, 
no  society  will  make  a  special  rule  offsetting  those 
usages  which  are  universally  recognized,  if  they 
desire  to  be  parliamentary  at  all;  but,  where  there 
is  a  conflict  of  authorities,  a  society  may  choose  its 
own  procedure,  and  it  will  then  make  a  special  rule 
authorizing  such  procedure  in  case  it  is  not  author- 
ized by  the  manual  adopted  as  its  guide. 

FINAL  SUMMARY  OF   PRINCIPLES 

Parliamentary  Law  is  not  fixed  nor  arbitrary,  but 
is  in  process  of  development. 

Such  usages  as  have  become  generally  adopted 
are  properly  a  part  of  parliamentary  law. 

No  one  manual,  or  authority,  is  final. 
Each  society  votes  to  adopt  that  authority  which 
it  likes  best.  Having  adopted  an  authority,  it  must 
follow  the  rules  which  such  authority  lays  down. 
Provided,  that  any  society  may  make  any  special 
rule,  offsetting  any  procedure  recommended  by  its 


226  CONCLUSION 

accepted  authority,  this  special  rule  of  its  own  then 
governing  instead  of  the  book. 

Where  there  is  a  conflict  of  authorities,  that  one 
which  seems  best  fitted  to  the  needs  of  the  society 
in  question  should  be  accepted  and  indorsed. 

Justice,  equality,  and  reasonableness  are  the 
basic  principles  by  which  to  test  the  expediency 
of  a  given  procedure. 


ADDENDA  AND  APPENDIX 

MODEL    OF  A    CONSTITUTION   AND 
BY-LAWS 

\  To  be  varied  to  suit  the  needs  of  the  Society  in  question) 


ADDENDA. 


To  Section  15. — 'In  choosing  a  method  of  electing  officers, 
the  end  should  be  to  secure  both  fairness  and  secrecy ;  i.e.,  a 
secret  ballot  and  an  equal  chance  for  all.  Perhaps  no  method 
is  better  for  this  purpose  than  that  of  receiving  nominations 
for  each  office  by  informal  ballot.  Each  member  would  write 
upon  a  paper  the  name  she  prefers  ;  every  name  offered  would 
then  be  considered  a  nominee  (as  in  open  nominations  from 
the  floor)  and  the  formal  ballot  would  then  be  taken,  the 
society  balloting  till  some  one  received  a  majority  of  the 
votes.  When  a  nominating  committee  is  deemed  inexpedient, 
this  method  is  recommended. 

To  Section  34.  —  If  the  chairman  does  not  know  the  name 
of  the  person  who  rises  and  "  addresses  the  chair,"  she  says  : 
"What  name?"  The  name  is  given,  and  the  chairman  then 
" recognizes"  her  by  repeating  it,  and  she  then  "has  the 
floor." 

To  Section  64. —  In  putting  a  motion  to  vote  in  large  assem- 
blies, it  is  well  for  the  chair  before  "  declaring  "  the  vote,  to 
say,  "  It  appears  to  be  [or  not  to  be]  a  vote."  Then,  after  a 
short  pause,  to  declare  the  vote,  saying,  "  It  is  [or  is  not]  a 
vote."  The  declaration  may  be  enforced  by  a  blow  of  the 
gavel. 


CONSTITUTION  1 

ARTICLE  I.  Name.  —  This  club  shall  be  known 
as  the  (Mendon  Women's  Literary  Club). 

ARTICLE  II.  Object.  —  Its  object  shall  be  (the 
mutual  improvement  of  its  members  in  literature, 
art,  science,  and  the  vital  interests  of  the  day). 

ARTICLE  III.  Officers.  —  Its  officers  shall  be  a 
president,  a  vice-president,  a  recording  and  a  corre- 
sponding secretary,  a  treasurer  and  an  auditor.  [If 
a  Board  of  Directors  is  desired,  that  is  provided  for 
here;  viz.,  "and  a  board  of  (seven)  directors.'7] 
There  shall  also  be  (three)  lecture  committees  of 
(three)  members  each.  These  officers  and  com- 
mittees shall  be  elected  by  the  club  at  each  annual 
meeting,  as  provided  for  in  the  by-laws.  The  busi- 
ness of  the  club  shall  be  transacted  by  its  members, 
in  executive  meetings  held  once  a  month.  \If 
there  are  directors,  this  last  sentence  will  be  omitted.} 

1  If  a  club  is  incorporated,  its  charter  may  take  the  place  of  its  Constitu- 
tion. The  By-laws  will  then  include  the  matter  here  given  in  both  instru- 
ments. 

229 


230  APPENDIX 

ARTICLE  IV.  Meetings.  —  The  club  shall  hold  an 
annual  business  meeting  on  the  (fourth  Tuesday  in 
March)  and  an  afternoon  meeting  every  (Tuesday) 
from  (October)  to  (March)  inclusive.  The  (third 
Tuesday)  of  every  month  from  (October)  to  (Febru- 
ary) inclusive  shall  be  a  business  meeting  of  mem- 
bers, and  all  important  business  shall  be  finally 
voted  upon  at  these  business  meetings  only.  None 
but  members  shall  be  present,  except  as  provided 
in  the  by-laws.  (Seven)  members  shall  constitute  a 
quorum.  Members  shall  be  notified  of  regular 
meetings  by  an  (announcement  in  the  Mendon 
Telegraph).  Special  meetings  may  be  called  by 
the  president,  upon  the  written  application  of  any 
(five)  members,  all  members  to  be  specially  noti- 
fied of  the  proposed  meeting. 

ARTICLE  V.  Financial  Year.  —  The  financial 
year  shall  begin  on  the  (first  Tuesday  in  October), 
and  the  fee  then  payable  from  each  .member  shall 
be  (two  dollars).  If  the  fee  is  not  paid  before  the 
expiration  of  one  (month)  from  the  time  of  election, 
or  from  the  beginning  of  the  financial  year,  the 
person  from  whom  it  is  due,  having  been  notified, 
shall  cease  to  be  a  member. 

ARTICLE  VI.    Membership.  —  Any  (two)  members 


BY-LAWS  231 

(of  one  year's  standing)  may  present,  in  writing,  at 
any  regular  meeting,  the  name  of  any  woman  wish- 
ing to  become  a  member.  The  name  shall  then  lie 
upon  the  table  till  the  meeting  (one)  week  later, 
announcement  being  made  of  such  application.  [If 
it  is  desired  to  restrict  membership  in  any  way,  such 
restriction  is  added  here, ,]  Each  name  shall  be  voted 
on  separately,  by  ballot  [white  and  black  balls  may 
be  used,  or  blank  slips  of  paper  on  which  are  written 
"  Yes  "  or  "No  "],  and  the  applicant  declared  elected 
unless  (three)  negative  votes  be  cast.  A  candidate 
failing  of  election  shall  not  be  eligible  again  that 
club  year.  The  membership  shall  be  limited  to 
(100). 

BY-LAWS 

ARTICLE  I.  DUTIES  OF  OFFICERS.  — SECTION  i. 
President  and  Vice- President.  —  The  president  shall 
preside  at  all  meetings,  and  conduct  them  by  a 
formal  order  of  business,  shall  deliver  an  annual 
address,  and  shall  perform  the  other  duties  usually 
belonging  to  this  office.  In  case  of  her  absence  or 
disability,  these  duties  shall  be  performed  by  the 
vice-president,  or  by  the  chairmen  of  the  lecture 
committees,  in  their  order.  The  vice-president  shall 


232  APPENDIX 

hold  herself  ready  to  assist  the  president  in   any 
way. 

SECT.  2.  Secretaries.  —  The  recording  secretary 
shall  keep  a  correct  record  of  all  meetings.  The 
corresponding  secretary  shall  receive,  read  to  the 
club,  and  answer,  all  letters  relating  to  club  affairs, 
and  preserve  all  club  papers.  She  shall  notify 
members  of  their  election,  and  of  the  limit  of 
time  when  their  fees  are  due  in  order  to  continue 
members;  shall  sign  and  deliver  all  tickets  of 
membership,  keep  a  correct  list  of  members  with 
their  addresses,  and  attend  to  all  other  business  of 
the  club  relating  to  its  membership  and  its  docu- 
ments. She  shall  make  a  written  report  of  the 
year's  transactions  and  present  outlook  of  the  club 
at  the  annual  meeting.  \This  duty  may  be  given  to 
the  recording  secretary  instead J\  The  records  and 
correspondence  shall  be  open  at  all  times  to  the 
inspection  of  the  club.  [In  dubs  where  there  is  a 
great  deal  of  correspondence  with  other  dubs,  especially 
where  a  club  belongs  to  the  1 1  General  Federation  of 
Women's  Clubs,"  another  secretary  may  be  added, 
called  a  Federation  Secretary,  whose  duty  will  be 
strictly  to  attend  to  the  correspondence  with  other  clubs 
and  with  the  Federation.] 


BY-LAWS  233 

SECT.  3.  Treasurer.  -  -  The  treasurer  shall  re- 
ceive, collect,  hold,  and  pay  out  all  club  moneys, 
subject  to  the  order  of  the  club.  She  shall  keep  a 
correct  account  in  detail  of  all  moneys  received 
and  expended  by  her,  and  shall  render  her  report 
in  writing  at  the  annual  meeting. 

SECT.  4.  Auditor.  —  The  auditor  shall  audit  all 
bills  and  the  accounts  of  the  treasurer,  and  report, 
in  writing,  at  the  annual  meeting  whether  they  are 
correct. 

\If  there  are  directors,  a  section  defining  their  duties 
is  added  here.  There  will  then  be  no  "  business  meet- 
ings" strictly  speaking,  as  the  business  will  be  done 
by  the  directors.  See  section  12.] 

SECT.  5.  Lecture  Committees.  —  The  (three) 
lecture  committees  shall  be  called:  i.  The  Depart- 
ment of  (Art  and  Literature) ;  2.  The  Department 
of  (Science  and  Economics);  3.  The  Department 
of  (Ethics  and  History).  The  (first  and  second 
Tuesdays  of  October  and  November)  shall  be  in 
charge  of  the  first  department;  the  (first  and  second 
Tuesdays  of  December)  in  charge  of  the  second 
department;  and  the  (first  and  second  Tuesdays  of 
February  and  March)  in  charge  of  the  third  depart- 
ment. The  chairman  of  each  of  these  committees 


234  APPENDIX 

shall  make  a  written  report  at  the  annual  meeting 
of  the  work  done  by  her  committee  during  the  year. 
The  programme  for  all  other  meetings  shall  be  ar- 
ranged by  the  club  at  its  monthly  business  meetings. 

SECT.  6.  Election.  —  At  the  (business  meeting  in 
February),  the  president  shall  appoint  a  committee 
of  three,  no  member  of  which  shall  be  an  officer 
or  a  chairman  of  a  lecture  committee,  to  nominate 
a  list  of  officers  and  lecture  committees  for  the 
ensuing  year.  This  nominating  committee  shall 
notify  their  nominees,  and,  in  case  of  any  refusals, 
shall  supply  their  places.  They  shall  then  present 
the  perfected  list  to  the  members  at  the  (third 
regular  meeting  in  March).  At  the  annual  busi- 
ness meeting,  the  election  shall  take  place,  and 
shall  be  by  ballot ;  if  any  person  nominated  be  not 
elected,  the  club  may  ballot  till  every  position  is 
filled.  [If ere  may  be  added,  if  necessary,  any  other 
provision  to  secure  a  fair  election.  See  Election  of  Offi- 
cers, sections  14/0  18.]  (No  one  shall  be  eligible  to 
office  who  has  been  a  member  less  than  one  year.) 

SECT.  7.  Term  of  Office.  —  No  person  shall 
hold  more  than  one  official  position  at  any  time, 
nor  (with  the  exception  of  the  secretaries  and  the 
treasurer)  shall  serve  for  a  longer  period  than  (two) 


BY-LAWS  235 

successive  years  in  the  office  to  which  she  may 
be  elected;  but  any  person  shall  be  eligible  for 
re-election  after  the  intervention  of  (one  year)  from 
the  time  she  last  held  the  position.  The  term  of 
office  shall  expire  with  the  annual  meeting. 

ARTICLE  II.  Members.  —  Every  one  who  is  elected 
a  member,  on  signing  the  constitution  and  paying 
the  fee,  shall  be  entitled  to  receive  a  membership 
ticket,  and  shall  be  admitted  to  all  the  privileges 
of  the  club  to  the  close  of  the  financial  year,  after 
which  her  membership  may  be  continued  by  the 
payment  of  the  annual  fee.  Members  must  be  ready 
to  show  their  tickets  at  the  door  at  every  meeting. 

Honorary  members  may  be  elected  at  the  discre- 
tion of  the  club.  Members  who  apply  for  re-election 
may,  by  unanimous  consent,  be  re-elected  by  accla- 
mation. Former  members  who  live  at  a  distance 
may  become  "corresponding  members,"  and,  by 
paying  visitor's  fees,  attend  the  meetings  when  in 
(Mendon). 

Any  member  who  desires  to  withdraw  from  the 
club  shall  send  a  written  notice  of  her  intention  to 
the  corresponding  secretary 

ARTICLE  III.  Visitors.  —  Members  may  bring 
friends  to  any  meeting  by  the  payment  of  (fifteen 


236  APPENDIX 

cents)  for  each  friend.  No  one  visitor,  however, 
shall  attend  more  than  one  meeting  in  the  same  club 
year,  except  non-residents  of  (Mendon),  and  the 
guests  of  members.  Three  complimentary  tickets 
shall  be  given  to  each  lecturer  before  the  club. 

ARTICLE  IV.  Conduct  of  Meetings.  — All  meetings 
shall  be  conducted  by  the  rules  of  parliamentary 
law,  (the  "  Woman's  Manual  of  Parliamentary 
Law  ")  being  the  authority.  No  person,  except  the 
corresponding  secretary,  shall  print,  or  cause  to  be 
printed,  any  report  of  any  meeting,  unless  authorized 
by  vote  of  the  club. 

ARTICLE  V.  Amendments.  —  This  constitution  and 
by-laws  may  be  amended  at  any  regular  business 
meeting  of  the  club,  by  a  (two-thirds  vote)  of  the 
members  present,  provided  that  a  written  notice  of 
the  intended  change  has  been  given  at  the  meeting 
*.t  least  (one  week)  previous. 

ARTICLE  VI.  Suspension  of  Rules.  —  Any  article  of 
this  constitution  and  by-laws,  by  unanimous  consent, 
may  be  suspended  for  not  more  than  one  meeting, 
except  this  article,  which  shall  not  be  suspended.1 


1  Valuable  suggestions  will  be  found  in  Mrs.  Olive  Thome  Miller's 
little  book  entitled,  "  The  Woman's  Club.  A  Practical  Guide  and  Hand 
Book,"  published  by  the  United  States  Book  Company,  New  York. 


INDEX 


SECTION 

ACCLAMATION,  voting  by 15*64 

ADDRESSING  THE  CHAIR 8,  34 

ADJOURN,  MOTION  TO 120 

rank  of 116,120 

object  of 118 

limitations  upon .         .......          120,122 

to  a  fixed  time 124 

may  be  made  after  previous  question  is  moved  ...  60 

yields  to  a  question  of  privilege  or  of  order       .        .        .  147 

the  independent  motion      .        .        .        .         .        .        .  121 

ADJOURNMENT,  effect  of 123 

motions  relating  to 124 

re-assembling  after      .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .  124 

AMEND,  MOTION  TO,  nature  of 87 

effect  of 89 

rank  of 116 

object  of nS 

primary  and  secondary 9°>  91 

giving  notice  of 93 

forms  for  stating  the  question  on 96 

by  inserting 97>  98 

by  inserting  in  a  different  place 103 

by  striking  out 100,  101,  102 

by  the  word  "  not " •        •  104 

by  striking  out  and  inserting 105,  1 06 

237 


238  TNDEX 


SECTION 

AMEND,  MOTION  TO,  continued,  — 

by  substitution   . 107,  144 

by  inserting  a  sum  or  a  time 108 

by  inserting  a  name    ........         109 

effect  of  the  previous  question  on 60,  in 

AMENDMENT,  accepting  the 94 

the  three  ways  of         ........          95 

a  change  in  meaning  necessary 99 

"germane"  and  not  "germane" 88 

to  be  considered  before  the  main  question  ....          89 

more  than  one  at  a  time 92 

reconsideration  of  an 112 

the  order  in          .........         113 

exceptions  regarding 108,109,110 

motions  not  subject  to         .        .        .        .        .        .        .         no 

of  the  motion  to  postpone 128 

of  the  motion  to  commit 133 

commitment  of  an  .        .        .        .        .        .         ,        134 

APPEAL,  from  the  decision  of  the  chair 154 

effect  of  a  tie  vote  upon 155 

debate  upon         ,,......         154,156 

limitations  upon  ........         156 

not  open  to  reconsideration 85 

illustration  ..........         158 

BALLOT,  method  of  voting  by 14,15,73 

not  open  to  reconsideration        .        .        .        .  .          85 

CALL,  for  a  meeting  .........  3 

CALL  TO  ORDER 4^9 

See  Order. 

CHAIRMAN.     See  Presiding  Officer. 
CLOSE  DEBATE,  MOTION  TO.    See  Previous  Question. 

at  a  stated  time 63 

CLUB,  formation  of 10 


INDEX  239 

SECTION 

COMMIT,  MOTION  TO,  meaning  of 133 

rank  of 116, 133 

object  of 133 

limitations  upon 133 

amendment  of 133 

effect  of 134 

reconsideration  of        ........         133 

effect  upon  it  of  the  previous  question        .        .        .        .61,  133 

effect  upon  it  of  the  motions  to  adjourn,  to  table,  and  to 

postpone 133 

with  instructions 135 

part  of  a  question 136 

illustration 134 

the  independent  motion      .......         138 

recommitment     .........         146 

COMMITTEE,  organization  of     .......  9 

quorum  of 21 

chairman  of 9 

appointment  of 10,  134,  137 

duties  of      ..........         134 

nature  of     ...........   139 

conduct  of 139 

powers  of 140 

instructions  to 134, 140 

amendments  referred  to 134 

the  report  of 141-145 

presentation  of  the  report  .        .        .        .        .        .        .         142 

reception  of  the  report       .        .        .        .         .        .        .         143 

minority  report 141, 144 

discharge  of .         142 

COMMITTEE  OF  THE  WHOLE 133,  139 

CONSTITUTION  AND  BY-LAWS,  framing  of      .        .        .        .10,11 

amendment  of 113 

model  of,  see  the  Appendix. 

COURTESIES,  in  debate      ........          52 

in  appointment 137 


240  INDEX 

SECTION 

DEBATE,  definition  of 44 

a\m  of 43,  49 

when  in  order 45 

special  rules  for  limiting 45>  47 

the  leaders  in      .........  47,  48 

the  arguments  in         ........  49 

contesting  the  floor 50 

yielding  the  floor         .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .  51 

courtesies 52 

when  allowed  by  general  consent        .        .        .        .        .  45, 53 

illustrations 46, 48, 56 

closing  of,  see  Previous  Question. 

closing  of,  at  a  stated  time 63 

of  the  previous  question     .        .        . '               .        .        .  57 

upon  reconsideration 82 

of  amendments   .........  89 

of  dependent  motions 117 

of  the  motions  upon  adjournment      .        .        .         120,  121,  124 

of  the  motion  to  postpone  .        .        .        .        .        .        .  128 

of  the  motion  to  commit    .        .        .        .        .        .        .  133 

on  appeals 154,  156 

DEPENDENT  MOTIONS.     See  Motions. 

previous  question  may  be  moved  upon       ....  61 

DIVISION   OF   MOTIONS 41 

when  not  permissible          ......         105,  135 

DOUBTING  THE  VOTE 68 

ELECTION  of  temporary  chairman 5 

of  officers 10, 14-18 

not  open  to  reconsideration 85 

See  Voting. 

EQUIVALENT  MOTIONS 42,  50 

FILLING  BLANKS 108 

FLOOR,  getting  the 8,  34 

yielding  the 50,  51 


INDEX  241 

SECTION 

FLOOR,  continued,  — 

contesting  the 50 

taken  for  question  of  privilege  or  of  order  .        .        .        .          51 

GENERAL  CONSENT,  meaning  of 45,  53 

instances  of 19,  38,  45,  53,  62,  64 

See  Unanimous  Consent. 

ILLUSTRATIONS  :  call  for  a  meeting 3 

call  to  order 4,  19 

nomination           .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .     5,6,  14,  15 

election  of  temporary  officers 5-8 

permanent  organization       .        . 10,  n 

election  of  permanent  officers     .        .        .        .         .10,  14-18  • 

majority  and  plurality 17 

the  quorum 22-24 

making,  stating,  and  putting  to  vote  a  motion  ...  34 

seconding  a  motion      ........  36 

withdrawal  of  a  motion 39 

division  of  a  motion 41 

debate 46,  48 

form  of  a  resolution 48 

contesting  the  floor 50 

yielding  the  floor 51 

the  previous  question .        .58,61 

closing  debate 63 

noting 14,  15,  64,  65,  66,  67 

doubting  the  vote        .        .'       .        .        .        .        .         .  68 

reconsideration 84 

amendments  "  germane  " 88 

effect  of  amendment  ........  89 

primary  and  secondary  amendment 91 

more  than  one  amendment  at  once 92 

giving  notice  of  amendment        .        .        .        .        .        .  93 

accepting  the  amendment 94 

the  three  ways  of  amending 95,  96 


242  INDEX 

SECTION 

ILLUSTRATIONS,  continued,  — 

amendment  by  inserting      ......      97,  98,  99 

amendment  by  striking  out         ....          100,  101,  102 

amendment  by  striking  out  and  inserting  .        .        .        .        105 

amendment  by  substitution 107 

filling  blanks  with  a  sum  or  time 108 

the  precedence  of  motions 116,117,158 

adjournment       .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .         12-? 

laying  upon  and  taking  from  the  table       .        .        .          117,127 

postponement 117,  129 

indefinite  postponement 117,  132 

'34 


commitment 


powers  of  the  committee 140 

form  of  a  report 141,  145 

presentation  of  a  report      .        .        .        .        .        .        .        142 

reception  of  a  report 143,  145 

questions  of  privilege          .        .        .        .        .        .        .         150 

questions  of  order  and  appeals   ......        158 

INDEPENDENT  MOTIONS.     See  Motions. 

LAY  UPON  THE  TABLE,  MOTION  TO,  rank  of        .        .         116,125 

object  of 118 

limitations  upon 125 

effect  of 126,  156 

may  be  made  after  previous  question  is  moved  ...          60 
illustrations 117,  127 

MAJORITY  VOTE 74 

MAJORITY  AND  PLURALITY,  definition  of        ....  17 

MEETINGS,  call  for 3 

organization  of 1-8 

opening  of 4,  19 

MEMBERS,  rights  and  duties  of         ....  27,  46,  49,  50,  153 

MOTIONS,  nature  of .30 

steps  in  making 31 


INDEX  243 


MOTIONS,  continued,  — 

words  to  be  used 32 

when  made 33 

illustration 34 

seconding  of.    See  Seconding. 

withdrawal  of 38,  39,  40,  124 

division  of 41,  105,  135 

equivalent  .         , 42,  50 

which  may  be  made  after  previous  question  is  moved        .          60 
not  subject  to  amendment  .        .        .        .        .        .        .         no 

amendment  of.     See  Amend, 
debate  of.     See  Debate. 

independent  versus  dependent 115 

the  precedence  of 114,119,157,158 

dependent,  rank  of  .        .        .        .        .        .          114-119 

dependent,  effect  of  the  previous  question  on   .        .        .    60,  61 

the  seven  dependent 116-117,118,157 

distinguished  from  questions  of  order        .        .        .        .         153 

See  also  under  the  respective  titles,  adjourn,  lay  on 
the  table,  previous  question,  postpone,  commit,  amend, 
and  postpone  indefinite'y. 

NOMINATIONS,  method  of  making  .  .  5,  6,  10,  14,  15,  109 

seconding  of .  7>  37 

not  to  be  treated  as  amendments 109 

NOMINATING  COMMITTEE,  appointment  of  .        .        .      10,  14,  15 

OFFICE,  rotation  in 13 

OFFICERS 12 

election  of 5,10,14-18 

pro  tempore .  •  .  8,  18 

ORDER,  calling  to 4>  J9 

calling  a  member  to  .......  I52>  IS^ 

ORDER  OF  BUSINESS 19,  20 

ORDER,  QUESTION  OF,  nature,  use,  and  rank  of  .  .  .  147 

when  to  be  raised *47>  f53 


244  INDEX 

SECTION 

ORDER,  QUESTIONS  OF,  continued,— 

definition  of 151 

precedence  over  motion  to  adjourn 147 

effect  of 153 

duty  of  chair  regarding 152 

distinguished  from  a  motion 153 

ruling  of  the  chair  upon     .        .        .        .        .        .        .  153 

appeal  from  the  decision  of  the  chair          .        .        .        .  154 

effect  of  a  tie  vote  upon  appeal 155 

limitations  upon .        .        .                 .        .        .        .        .  156 

question  of  order  upon 156 

in  order  after  previous  question  is  moved  ....  60 

illustrations         .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .  158 

ORGANIZATION,  of  meetings 1-8 

the  three  kinds  of 2 

of  societies 10 

of  committees 9 

PARLIAMENTARY  LAW,  definition,  object,  and  principles.  See 
the  Introduction,  pages  ix  and  xii.  See  also  the  conclu- 
sion. 

PERSONALITIES,  to  be  avoided 46,  158 

POSTPONE,  MOTION  TO,  rank  of 116,  128 

object  of 118,128 

effect  of 129 

limitations  upon 128,  130 

effect  upon  it  of  the  previous  question  .  .  .  .  61,  128 
effect  upon  it  of  the  motions  to  adjourn  and  to  table  .  128 
illustration 129 

POSTPONE  INDEFINITELY,  MOTION  TO,  definition  of      .        .        131 

rank  of 116,  131 

object  of 118 

effect  of ;  131,  132 

limitations  on 131 

illustration ..........        132 


INDEX  245 

SECTION 

PRECEDENCE,  definition  of      .       .       .       .       .       .        114,116 

of  motions 116-119 

rank  of  the  seven  dependent  motions         .        .        .         116,157 
reasons  for  ..........        119 

illustrations 117,  158 

PRESIDING  OFFICER,  election  of  temporary   ....  5 

election  of  permanent          .......     14-18 

of  a  committee 9 

pro  tempore          ......... 

title  of 8 

duties  of      .        .        .      4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  19,  25,  46,  47,  50,  58,  66,  67 

rights  of 26,  35,  71 

characteristics  of .25 

duty  in  regard  to  committees 139 

duty  in  regard  to  questions  of  order 152 

rights  in  regard  to  questions  of  order         .        .        .         154,  155 

PREVAILING  SIDE,  definition  of 83 

PREVIOUS  QUESTION,  MOTION  FOR,  definition  of  .        .        .    54,  56 

use  of 55 

effect  of 56 

form  for  putting 56 

applicable  to  debatable  motions 56 

debate  of * .        .          57 

rank  of 116 

"  question  ! "  "  question ! " 62 

versus  main  question 59 

effect  of,  upon  amendments        ......          60 

effect  of,  upon  part  of  a  question 61 

what  may  be  done  after  it  is  moved  .  .        .        .          60 

cannot  be  amended  or  reconsidered 60 

illustration 58 

PRIVILEGE,  QUESTION  OF,  nature,  use  and  rank  of        .        .        147 

definition  of 148 

example  of 148 

effect  of 149 


246  INDEX 

SECTION 

PRIVILEGE,  QUESTION  OF,  continued, — 

precedence  over  motion  to  adjourn     .        .        •.                 .  147 

may  be  raised  after  previous  question  is  moved          .        .  60 

illustration 150 

QUESTION  OF  ORDER.    See  Order. 
QUESTION  OF  PRIVILEGE.    See  Privilege. 

QUORUM,  definition  of 21 

number  desirable  for .        .  21 

necessary  before  beginning 22 

effect  of  "  no  quorum  " 22,  23 

method  of  counting    .    ' .  24 

of  temporary  meetings 21 

of  committee  meetings 21 

of  permanent  organizations 21 

RAISING  HANDS,  method  of  voting  by 65 

RE-ASSEMBLE,  fixing  the  time  to 124 

RECOGNITION,  by  the  chair 8,34,50 

RECOMMIT,  motion  to 146 

RECONSIDERATION,  definition  of 75 

nature  of     ..........  76 

effect  of 77 

technical  form  of 78 

when  in  order      . 79 

by  whom  may  be  moved     .......  80 

the  prevailing  side 83 

reasons  for  restriction  regarding 80 

rule  recommended  in  regard  to 81 

debate  upon 82 

votes  not  subject  to 85 

to  be  sparingly  employed 86 

of  elections 17 

of  the  motion  to  commit 133 

illustration 84 


INDEX  247 

SECTION 

RECORD,  approval  of 19>*9 

amendment  of *9 

of  words  called  to  order 153 

REPORT,  of  the  committee''       .        .        .        .        .        .         141-145 

of  the  minority   ........          I4T>  *44 

REPRESS,  MOTION  TO.     See  Postpone  indefinitely. 

RESOLUTION,  form  for  framing         .  48 

RISING,  method  of  voting  by 65 

ROLL-CALL,  method  of  voting  by 7J>  72 

ROUTINE  BUSINESS  .........    19?  53 

SECONDING,  of  nominations 7>  37 

of  motions 31?  35 

by  the  chair 35 

form  for 36 

extremes  to  be  avoided 37 

rule  recommended       ........          37 

of  appeals 154 

SECRETARY,  election  of  temporary 

election  of  permanent 14-18 

duties  of 8,  19,  29,  153 

SOCIETY,  permanent,  formation  of 10 

SPECIAL  ASSIGNMENT 129 

SPECIAL  RULES,  distinguished  from  general  usages,  see  the 
Introduction,  pp.  x.  and  xi. ;  also  the  conclusion, 
instances  of,         .        .  37,  45,  47,  55>  57,  72>  74.  8o>  8l>  and  P-  225 
SUBSTANTIAL  BUSINESS,  definition  and  examples  of,  117, 122, 125, 158 

SUMS   AND    TIMES Io8 

TABLE,  MOTION  TO.    See  Lay  upon  the  table. 

TAKE  FROM  THE  TABLE,  MOTION  TO,  nature  and  effect  of  .  127 

TIE  VOTE,  definition  of 69 

effect  of 69 

exception  in  regard  to 69 

the  chair's  prerogative  in  case  of 70 

upon  appeals       .        .        .        .        .        •        .        •        •  155 

illustration 7° 


248  INDEX 

SECTION 

UNANIMOUS  CONSENT,  definition  of 53 

in  electing  officers 15 

in  routine  business 19 

in  withdrawal  of  motions    .......  38 

in  debate 45>  53 

in  calls  from  the  floor 10,  36,  62 

VICE-PRESIDENT,  duties  of 28 

VIVA  VOCE  method  of  voting 64 

VOTING,  process  of  making  a  motion  and         .        .        .        .  31,  34 

form  of  putting  the  question      ......  34 

by  vivsi  voce  method 64 

by  raising  hands  or  rising 65 

the "  usual  manner "  .        .        .        .        .        .                 .  66 

the  five  steps  in  . 67 

doubting  the  vote 68 

tie  votes       .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .     69,  70,  155 

by  roll-call,  or  yeas  and  nays 72 

by  division 68 

by  ballot      .        .        . 14,  73 

informal  ballot             .       - 15 

majority  and  plurality 17 

decision  by  less  or  more  than  a  majority    ....  74 

unanimous  consent  in 15 

by  silent  vote 64 

manner  of,  may  be  decided  after  the  previous  question  is 

moved      * 60 

reconsideration 75~86 

See  Debate. 

WITHDRAWAL  OF  MOTIONS 38,39,40,60,124 

YEAS  AND  NAYS,  method  of  voting  by 72 


four  Little  Manual  Contains  the  Cube  Root  of  Par/la^ 
mentary  Law." '  —  Charles  Sumner. 

WARRINGTON'S  MANUAL: 

%  JHanual 

tOR  THE  INFORMATION  OF  OFFICERS  AND  MEMBERS  OP 
"LEGISLATURES,    CONVEN^  ~ONS,    SOCIETIES,    CORPO- 
RATIONS,   ORDERS,    ETC.,    IN    THE    PRACTICAL 
GOVERNING     AND     MEMBERSHIP    OF    ALL 
SUCH    BODIES,    ACCORDING    TO    THE 
PARLIAMENTARY    LAW    AND 
PRACTICE      OF      THE 
UNITED  STATES. 

BY  WILLIAM  S.  ROBINSON,' 
"Warrtngto*? 

Clerk  of  the  Massachusetts  House  of  Representatives, 
from  1862  to  1873. 

Price,  50  Cents. 

"  It  is  a  mixtui  1  rule,  advice,  and  '  parliamentary  '  principle,  founded 
on  ihe  experience  and  the  obvious  necessities  of  bodies  governed  by  the 
4  parliamentary  law.*  As  everybody  knows,  an  assembly  may,  if  it 

f  _i  _  ..  _i ._  *-_  ?x_-ir  j: *i  •_  lii i  j._  ii.'    i . *.:_i~ 


ciples  will  be  found  here.  But,  for  the  largest  part,  this  book  seeks  to 
give  the  reasons  for  the  ordinary  and  the  best  practice  of  the  best  ordered 
bodies.  Given  the  reasons,  and  the  practice  adjusts  itself ;  the  assembly 
transacts  its  work  speedily  and  with  proper  regard  to  the  rights  of  all ;  and 
officers  are  prepared  to  meet  objections  and  to  answer  questions  with  little 
or  no  hesitation.  Without  the  reasons,  members  and  officers  have  great 
difficulty  in  interpreting  the  rules,  and  in  coming  to  just  results  without 
troublesome  delays. "  —  Preface, 

"  Mr.  Robinson  is  perhaps  better  known  than  any  other  pseudonymous 
writer  in  the  Commonwealth  as  a  man  of  clear,  sharp,  incisive  intellect, 
which,  applied  to  rules  of  order,  as  it  must  necessarily  have  been  in  his 
many  years  of  clerkly  experience,  could  not  kaye  failed  to  make  him 
master  of  the  subject.  The  points  are  stated  with  great  precision  and 
conciseness,  and  the  indexing  is  so  perfect  that  any  question  of  parlia- 
mentary law  or  practice  may  be  settled  by  a  rapid  glance ;  while  the  size 
of  the  little  volume  fits  it  for  the  pocket,  s'o  that  a  person  who  apprehends 
any  occasion  for  its  use  need  never  go  unarmed  with  its  authority." 


"  Thia  book  is  the  only  history  of  the  Political 
A nti '-Slavery  Struggle  that  haa  yet  been  written.  " 

—  Rtv.  William  H.  Channing  of  London,   England. 


"WARRINGTON" 

PEN  PORTRAITS 

A  COLLECTION  OF 

PERSONAL  APOLITICAL  REMINISCENCES 

From  1848  to  1876. 


FROM  THE   WRITINGS  OF 

s. 


EDITED  BY 

MRS.  W.  S.  ROBINSON 

Containing  an  Introduction  by  F.  B.   SANBORN  and 
Memoir  of  "  Warrington." 


Cloth,  S2.OO 

LEE  AND  SHEPARD  Publishers 

BOSTON 


PRACTICAL  HELPS  IN  NATURAL  HISTORY 

BY  DR.  W.  P.   MANTON 

Price,  60  Cents  each.    Sent  by  mail,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  price. 


I.    TAXIDERMY  WITHOUT  A  TEACHER 

(Second  Edition.) 

Comprising  a  Complete  Manual  of  Instruction  for  Prepar- 
ing and  Preserving  Birds,  Animals,  and  Fishes  ;  with  a 
Chapter  on  Bunting  and  Hygiene;  together  with  In- 
structions for  t reserving  Eggs  and  Making  Skeletons, 
and  a  Number  of  Valuable  Recipes. 

ILLUSTRATED. 

II.    INSECTS 

How  to  Catch  and  How  to  Prepare  them  for  the  Cabinet. 
Comprising  a  Manual  of  Instruction  for  the  Field 
Naturalist. 

ILLUSTRATED. 

III.    FIELD  BOTANY 

A  Handbook  for  the  Collector.  Containing  Instructions 
for  Gathering  and  Preserving  Plants,  and  the  Forma- 
tion of  a  Herbarium.  Also,  Complete  Instructions  in 
Leaf  Photography,  Plant  Printing,  and  the  Skeleton^ 
izing  of  Leaves. 

ILLUSTRATED. 

(Second  Edition  Ready  Shortly.) 

IV.    BEGINNINGS  WITH  THE  MICROSCOPE 

A.  Working  Handbook.  Containing  Simple  Instructions 
in  the  Art  and  Method  of  Using  the  Microscope  and 
Preparing  Objects  for  Examination. 

ILLUSTRATED. 

Y.   PRIMARY  METHODS  IN  ZOOLOGY  TEACHING 

For  Teachers  in  Common  Schools. 
ILLUSTRATED. 


LEE  &  SHEPARD,  Publishers.  Boston. 


THE  FIRST  TEACHER  FOR  LITTLE  FOLKS. 


FOR  THE  IMPROVEMENT  OF  THE  SENSES 

FOR  YOUNG  CHILDREN. 

By  HORACE  GRANT, 
Author  of  "  Arithmetic  for  Young  Children.'1' 

Edited  by  Willard  Small. 
Cloth.    Price,  50  cents. 

For  the  purpose  of  producing  instruction  and  amu/emeut 
for  young  children,  too  young  to  read  or  write,  this  lithe  w--i- 
has  been  prepared.  The  special  object  is  to  excite  little  cnn 
dren  to  examine  surrounding  objects  correctly,  so  that  valuable 
knowledge  may  be  acquired,  while  the  attention,  memory, 
judgment,  and  invention  are  duly  exercised. 

In  exercises  such  as  those  which  compose  this  book,  the  most 
favorable  circumstances  may  be  seized  as  they  arise,  and  will 
therefore  produce  an  extraordinary  effect.  Wherever  we  are, 
in  a  room,  garden,  field,  or  road,  in  the  morning  or  evening, 
winter  or  summer,  action  or  rest,  something  interesting  may 
be  extracted;  for  at  the  moment  when  the  attention  is  warmly 
excited,  an  event  may  be  turned  to  the  best  account.  The  val 
uable  habits  acquired  by  means  of  familiar  objects  and  petty 
events  may  gradually  be  extended  to  the  most  important 
subjects. 

ABITHMETIC  FOB  IBM  CHILDREN 

Being  a  series  of  Exercises  exemplifying  the  manner  in  which 
Arithmetic  should  be  taught  to  young  children 

By  HORACE  GRANT. 

Amen«6»n  Edition,    Edited  by  WILLARD  SMALL. 
Price  50  cents. 

"  Consists  of  a  series  of  exercises  illustrative  of  the  mani^r 
iin  which  the  first  steps  in  numbers  should  be  taught  to  young 
children.  We  pronounce  it  first-rate.  The  primary  teacher 
will  find  it  a  great  aid  in  her  work.  It  is  rational  and  consis- 
t«  nt.  The  variety  of  style  and  method  used  lend  fresh  inter- 
est at  every  step."—  Educational  Weekly. 

"  The  forms  of  expression  used  and  the  copiousness  of  illus- 
trations are  very  far  in  advance  of  the  common  style  •>£ 
teaching  this  science  to  young  children. 

"It  is  thoroughly  rational  and  prepares  the  way  for  a  m«we 
systematic  study  of  numbers  as  the  child  becomes  more  ma- 
ture, The  young  pupil  is  taught  to  think  and  speak  in  num- 
bers ;-n  the  first  stage  and  subsequently  unites  Mith  it  the  an 
of  writing  numbers.  It  is  correct  in  theory  and  apt  fot 
practice."—  N.  E.  Journal  of  Education. 


•THB  BUG  HUNTER'S  HAHDBOOK," 

INSECTS ; 

flow  to  Catch,  and  How  to  Prepare  Them  for  the  Cabinet 
Comprising  a  Manual  of  Instruction  for 
the  Field  Naturalist. 

BY  W^JL/TEJ-R  I>.  JVLAJNTTCXN", 

Author  of  "Taxidermy  Without  a  Master,"  *4 Handbook  of  Field 
Botany,"  etc. 

Illustrated.    50  cents* 

The  Boston  Post  says:  "Are  you  interested  In  bugs?  Do  you 
like  to  capture  the  wild  and  untamed  beetle,  the  insatiable  potato 
bug,  and  the  festive  grasshoy  er,  anti  impaling  them  on  pins,  see 
'em  through  a  glass?  Then  you  want  to  know  just  the  correct 
way  to  do  it,  and  you  want  to  purchase  this  little  volume." 

"In  describing  the  outfit  nothing  essential  is  omitted,  and 
illustrations  help  to  make  plain  this  and  the  directions  for  pre- 
paring. Useful  instructions  are  added  as  to  the  construction  of  a 
cabinet,  time  and  places  to  hunt,  and  the  method  of  *  printing 
butterflies.'  Every  boy  who  has  any  taste  for  natural  history 
should  have  this  neat  little  manual.  The  many  '  Agassiz  Clubs' 
which  have  sprung  up  among  the  youth  of  the  country  should  add 
it  to  their  libraries."  —  Chicago  Advance. 

••OF  INESTIMABLE  VALUE  TO  YOUNG  BOTANISTS." 


FIELD  BOTANY: 

A  Hand-Book  for  the  Collector.     Containing  Instructions  for 

Gathering  and  Preserving  Plants,  and  the  Formation  of  a 

Herbarium;   also,  Complete  Instructions  in  Leaf 

Photography,   Plant  Printing,  and  the 

Skeletonizing  of  Leaves. 


BY    "WALTER    IP. 

Illustrated.      Cloth,  5O  cents. 

"  A  most  valuable  companion.    The  amount  of  information  con- 
veyed in  the  small  compass  is  surmising."  —  Demorest's  Monthly, 
York. 


"  It  is  just  what  the  boys  and  girls  iieed  for  the  spring  campaign 
in  Botany,  and  at  the  modest  price  of  fifty  cents  is  accessible  tc 
all."  —  Christian  Register,  Boston. 

*'  It  is  entirely  practical,  and  gives  the  collector  just  the  know- 
ledge required  to  render  his  work  permanent  and  satisfactory, 
Its  smallness  fits  it  to  be  carried  in  the  pocket,  which  is  a  consist 
oration."— ^  '\ynalBafftist.  N.  F, 


•FULL  OF  SERVICEABLE  INFORMATION." 


HANDBOOK  OF  CONVERSATION: 

Its  Faults  and  Its  Graces. 

COMPRISING 

1.— Dr.  Peabody's  Lecture.        2.— Mr.  Trench's  Lecture. 
3.— Mr.  Parry  Gwinn's  "A  Word  to  the  Wise;  or, 
Hints  on  the  Current  Improprieties  of  Ex- 
pression in  Writing  and   Speaking." 
4. —  Mistakes    and   Improprie- 
ties   in    Speaking    and 
Writing    Cor- 
rected. 

COMPILED  BY 

ANDREW  P.  PEABODY,  D.D.,  L.L.D., 

Late  of  Harvard  University. 
Cloth,  50  Centi, 


'•  A  book  which  .vill  be  of  incalculable  value  to  the  young  man  or 
woman  who  will  c;i.  efully  n  -tc  and  follow  out  its  numerous  and  valu- 
able suggestions  It  is  worth  owning,  and  ought  to  be  studied  by 
many  who  heedlessly  misuse  their  mother  tongue."—  Boston  Beacon. 

"  This  liitle  manual  contains  a  great  variety  of  valuable  matter  for 
the  instruction  of  those  who  would  improve  their  style  in  conversa- 
tion. It  is  in  fact  one  of  the  very  best  and  clearest  handbooks  of  its 
kind  that  we  have  seen  "—  The  Day,  Baltimore. 

"It  is  a  useful  handbook  on  the  proprieties  and  common  errors  of 
English  speech.'  —  The  Churchman. 

•'  The  book  is  full  of  serviceable  information  and  can  be  advanta- 
g3ously  read  and  kept  for  reference  by  every  one  who  desires  to  cou- 
verse  and  to  write  properly  and  gracefully  "—Paper  World. 

'Here  is  a  neat  pocket-vomme.  which  every  person  should  nave 
tor  ready  reference  For  the  young  it  is  of  especial  value,  and  to  th* 
Old  it  is  of  great  interest."—  Vox  Popuh. 


HandbooK  of  Punctuation. 

Punctuation  and  Other  Typographical  Matters, 

for  the  use  of  Printers,  Authors,  Teachers,  and  Scholars* 
By  MARSHALL  T.  BIGELO  W,  Corrector  at  the  Uni- 
versity Press*  Cambridge.  Small  4to.  CLOTH,  50 

CENTS. 

Lenox  Library,  New  York,  Aug.  19, 1881. 

DEAR  MB.  BiGiat-ow,  —  I  sent  for  your  "Punctuation  and  other 
Typographical  Matters  "  (having  long  groaned  over  bad  pointing  ID 
authors  and  printers),  and  was  glad  to  find  an  excellent  manual 
which  will  contribute  to  the  comfort  of  many.  I  cordially  recom- 
mend it  to  all  authors,  printers,  and  men  of  letters. 

Faithfully  yours, 
Allibone's  Dictionary  of  Authors.  I.  AUSTIN  ALLIBONE. 


"  Mr.  Bigelow's  book  is  a  practical  treatment  of  the  subject,  and 
enlarges  the  reading  public's  obi?  Cations  to  him."  —  Atlantic  Monthly, 

"  It  is  intended  for  the  use  of  authors  and  teachers,  while  business 
men  who  have  occasion  to  print  circulars,  advertisements,  etc.,  cary 
hardly  afford  to  be  without  a  copy  of  it  for  reference."  —  Schenectady 
Daily  Union. 

Mistakes  in  Writing  English,  and  How  to  Avoid  Them. 

For  the  Use  of  all  who  Teach,  Write,  or  Speak  the  Lan- 
guage. By  MARSHALL  T.  BIGELO  W9  author  of 
"Punctuation  and  other  Typographical  Matters.'* 
CLOTH,  SO  CENTS. 

"  This  is  an  admirable  little  work;  the  more  admirable  for  the  use 
of  busy  people,  because  it  is  little,  since  it  is  also  clear  and  Compre- 
hensive. The  errors  pointed  out  are  those  to  which  nearly  all  writc-rs 
are  liable.  .  .  .  We  commend  it  as  the  most  convenient,  little  manual 
of  which  we  have  knowledge." — Christian  Herald. 

"  This  is  a  valuable  little  volume.  It  is  not  a  grammar,  with  rules 
and  definitions ;  but  it  takes  up  words  and  parts  of  speech,  and  shows, 
generally  by  example,  their  correct  use.  It  is  arranged  systemati* 
catty,  and  is  adapted  to  the  use  of  the  home  and  the  school."  —  Tfi' 
Current. 

"  The  matter  is  well  arranged,  and  the  points  upon  which  instruc 
tion  is  desired  can  be  readily  found."  —  Christian  Union. 

"  This  is  a  useful  book.  A  careful  study  of  the  several  chapter* 
Would  be  of  great  advantage  to  all  who  have  to  do  much  or  litt** 
<*Deafc*ig  er  writing.  "—  Gospel  Banner. 


THE  FOBES  ELOCUTIONARY  HANDBOOKS. 


FIVE-MINUTE  DECLAMATIONS 

FOR  SCHOOL  AND   COLLEGE 
Cloth,  50  Cents. 

FIVE-MINUTE  DECLAMATIONS 

Part  Second.    Cloth,  50  Cents. 

FIVE-MINUTE  RECITATIONS 

FOB  SCHOOL  AND  COLLEGiS 
Cloth,  50  Cents. 

FIVE-MINUTE  READINGS 

Cloth,  50  Cents. 

Pupils  in  public  schools  on  declamation  days  ate  limited  to  hv-. 
minutes  each  for  the  delivery  of  "  pieces."  There  is  a  great  com- 
plaint of  the  scarcity  of  material  for  such  ?  purpose,  while  the 
injudicious  pruning  of  eloquent  extracts  has  often  marred  the  de- 
sired effects  To  obv'  .te  these  diffict."  :ies,  these  books  have  been  pre- 
pared b*  a  competes c  teacher. 


ELOCUTION  SIMPLIFIED 

With  an  Introduction  by   George  M.  Baker. 
CLOTH,  50  CENTS. 

"  The  Manual  is  divided  into  four  parts.  Part  First  describes  a 
series  of  gymnastics  to  give  strength  and  elasticity  to  the  muscles 
used  in  speaking.  Part  Second  is  a  system  of  vocal  exercises  for 
daily  practice.  Part  Third,  the  application  of  the  vocal  exercises 
to  the  reading  of  short  extracts,  showing  the  effect  when  thus  applied. 
Part  Fourth  is  a  chapter  giving  general  hints  on  elocution,  and  show- 
ing how  easily  defects  in  speech  may  be  cured. 

"  With  or  without  an  instructor,  this  Manual  is  just  what  the  student 
is  in  great  need  of,  and  he  can  supply  that  need  by  a  study  of  '  Elo- 
cution Simplified.'" —  The  Dartmouth,  Hanoz>er,  N.H. 

Sold  by  all  Booksellers,  or  sent  by  mailt  £repai<i>  en  receipt 
of  price, 

LEE  AND  SHEPARD,   Publishers  ......     .  Bocwn. 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWEI 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  01 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


MOV  13 1966 


Wfll/ 


YC173932 


M94396 


Wl 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


